


ofc' 



' > N 



.^■% 



X 


























/ ^"%, > ' «* 



^ ^ 



V 



o x 



= 






"°.., * 











<j> <$\ 



V- /^ ' ^ -^ 



,0o. 




* **• ^ 



^ -% 



^1 



\ 0C ^ 









** v 


















* v '% \ .1 ^ = v ^ ^ 



oq x 







V c N C ^ ■ 



£ %. V% 



*... 






'x. 



*■ <S s *, -> .A 



\C> <r v .i ,.\, o v x 









^ 



V * 




/ /^ l ; %/ : :%,< 



>yws /% : .; ^ 



O0 N 






■ft* V*' ' " * , °~ -0> - 






^y .*v^L/* c 



\^A,*< 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS 



THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M. A., 

RECTOR OF LYNDON, 
AND LATE FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDG-E. 



RE-ARRANGED AND CAREFULLY CORRECTED 



REV. J. A. SPENCER, A. M. 



FROM THE THIRD LONDON EDITION. 



NEW-YORK: 

D. APPLETON & CO., 200 BROADWAY. 

PHILADELPHIA: 

GEO. S. APPLETON, 148 CH ES N U T- S TREET. 

MDCCCXLVI. 






Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by 

D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 

In the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of 

New-York. 






\ •- ^ " 



PREFACE. 



The principal object of the present volume is to familiar- 
ize the young student with the primary elements of the 
Greek language, by setting him to work at translating Eng- 
lish into Greek, as the very first steps in his progress. This 
object has been kept steadily in view, and renders the " First 
Greek Lessons" somewhat unlike any work heretofore is- 
sued for the use of beginners. In all books on the same 
subject with which the Editor is acquainted, it has been the 
custom to require almost the whole attention to be devoted 
to the translating of Greek sentences into English. Mr. 
Arnold has chosen to adopt another course ; with what suc- 
cess let the wide-spread reputation which he has acquired, 
and the large and flourishing establishment over which he 
presides, give answer. 

For the purpose had in view, the author has confined 
himself to carefully-prepared exercises in English, which 
serve to illustrate, enforce, and imprint upon the memory 
such portions of the grammar of the Greek language as are 
needful at the outset. Grammatical apparatus is supplied 
according as it is wanted ; difficulties are elucidated ; pecu- 
liarities of the Greek language are pointed out ; differences 
of idiom between the two languages are specially noted ; 
and, in accordance with the plan pursued by Ollendorff in 
his admirable works on education, frequent repetition of prin- 
ciples learned, and of things already acquired, impresses 
them upon the memory with surprising distinctness and force. 



The American Editor has had a task of considerable dif- 
ficulty in preparing the " First Greek Lessons" for the press. 
Mr. Arnold's " Practical Introduction to Greek Accidence," 
from which the present volume has been mainly compiled, 
was found on examination to be defective in several particu- 
lars, principally in its arrangement. In order to remedy 
these defects, and, as far as may be, to render it uniform 
with the volumes already published under the Editor's care 
and supervision, he has spent much time, and bestowed great 
labour, upon an entire re-arrangement of the matters con- 
tained in Mr. Arnold's book, and upon an endeavour to carry 
out the distinguished author's plans to their legitimate devel- 
opments. 

In how far the American Editor may have succeeded in his 
design, it is not for him to say : he can but express the hope 
that the " First Greek Lessons" will be found equally well 
adapted to the wants of beginners with the " First Latin 
Book," and equally well subserve the cause of classical 
learning. 

J. A. S. 

New-York, Sept. 1st, 1846. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 



PART I. 




LESSON. 


PAGE. 


1. The Alphabet, .... 


. 11 


2. Exercise on the Letters, 


13 


3. Vowels, Diphthongs, &c, 


. 13 


4. Division of Consonants ; Table of the Declensions ; 


the Article, 15 


5. Accents in Greek, .... 


. 17 


6- Formation of Tenses, 


18 


7. First Declension of Nouns, 


. 20 


8. Exercise on First Declension, 


21 


9. " " 


. 22 


10. " " . 


23 


11. Second Declension (Attic Second Declension), 


. 24 


12. Exercise on Second Declension, 


26 


13. Verbs with Roots ending in f, . 


. 27 


14. Exercise on the above, 


28 


15. Irregular Nouns, . . . . 


. 29 


16. Third Declension, .... 


30 


17. Paradigm of Third Declension, - . 


. 33 


18. Exercise on Third Declension, 


34 


19. Third Declension continued, . 


. 35 


20. « "... 


37 


21. Exercises on the Declensions, . 


. 39 


22. " " 


40 


23. Contracts of the Third Declension, 


. 41 


24. Adjectives, ...... 


43 


25. Exercise on Adjectives and Nouns, 


. 45 


26. Contracted Nouns, .... 


46 


27. « " .... 


. 48 


28. " « . 


49 


29. Pure Verbs, ..... 


. 50 


30. Exercise on Ace. Sing, of Third Declension, 


51 


31. - Voc. " 


. 52 


32. Irregular Adjectives, 


53 


33. Comparatives and Superlatives, 


. 55 


34. Irregular Comparisons, . 


56 


35. First Four Numerals, .... 


. 58 


36. Barytone Verbs, . 


59 


37. « 


. 60 


38. Perfect of Mute Verbs, , . 


63 



VI TABLE OF CONTENTS 

LESSON. 

39. Pluperfect of Mute Verbs, 

40. Mute Verbs (including those in ht), 

41. Tenses of the Verb, 

42. " . 

43. " "••>''•. 

44. Verbs in an, tt, £, . 

45. Exercises on the Verbs, 

46. " u " 

47. Pronouns, 

48. On the Comparative and Superlative, 

49. Liquid Verbs, . 

50. « ... 

51. '«■«'. 

52. Pure Verbs, 

53. " 

54. Perfect II., 

55. Attic Future and Attic Reduplication, 

56. Moods and Persons, 

57. Peculiarities of Augment, 

58. Terminations of the Active Voice, 

59. Terminations of the Passive and Middle Voic 

60. Table of Contracted Verbs, 

61. On the Imperative, 

62. Subjunctive and Optative, . 
63. 

64. Infinitive and Participle, 

65. Declension of the Participles, . 
66. 

67. On the Passive Voice, . 

68. " " . . 

69. " " . 

70. Perfect and Pluperfect Passive, 

71. Moods of the Passive, . 

72. " '*« . 

73. Middle Voice, . 

74. Active Verbs with Future Middle, . 



PART I 
ntroduct: 



Principles of Word-building, . 
Accentuation, 

LESSON. 

1. Verbs in fu, 

2. Tenses and Moods, . 

3. Passive and Middle Voices, 



PAGE. 

. 64 
65 



84 

85 

87 

90 

92 

96 

100 

101 

103 

104 

105 

107 

107 

109 

110 

111 

113 

114 

115 

116 



119 
123 

129 
131 
132 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 



<p W i, 



tijii, ujii, Ir/pi 
rfflriju, • 

Ditto, . 

'LrrTtljXl, 

Transitive forms of iotjj/u, 



Contracted Verbs in sw, 



UTreifii, 

Second Aorist, . 
Perfect Second, 
Irregular Verbs in 
" " in 



in?, 6,i, 
in k, 
in A, /*, 
in o. 



" in p, C-, t, 

" 0. X> • 
General Exercises on Verbs : 
Verbals in rtos, 
Correlative Pronouns, 

" Adverbs, 

Interrogative Pronouns, 
o7Sa, 

Third Future Passive, . 
Appendix, . 
Questions on the Accidence, 
Table of Differences of Idiom, 
English- Greek Index. 



vn 

PAGE. 

135 
. 136 

137 
. 137 

138 
. 140 

141 
. 142 

142 
. 143 

144 
. 145 

146 
. 147 

148 
. 149 

151 
. 152 

153 
. 155 

155 
. 157 

158 
. 159 

161 
. 163 

164 
. 165 

166 
. 168 

169 
. 170 

171 
. 172 

173 
. 194 

210 
. 213 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS 



PART I 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



I. THE ALPHABET. 





Lesson 1 . 




The Greek Alphabet consists of i 


twenty-four 


viz., — 








Form. 


Names. 


English. Characteristics. 


A a 


Alpha 


'Alqa 


a 


B jS 


Beta 


BrJTa 


b 


r y. 


Gamma 


rdfi(xa 


g 


A d 


Delta 


Ailra 


d 


E e 


Epsllon 


*E ipTlov 


e short. 


z t 


Zeta 


Ziqza 


z 


H 7] 


Eta 


"Hra 


e long. 


# 


Theta 


Qtjra 


th 


I i 


Iota 


IwTCC 


i 


K a 


Kappa 


Kdnna 


k 


A I 


Lambda 


Adfifida 


1 


M [i 


Mu 


Mv 


m 


N v 


Nu 


Nv 


n 


3 I 


Xi 


Ai 


X 


o 


Omicron 


[AIXQOV 


6 short. 


n n 


Pi 


m 


P 


p Q 


Rho 


c Pc5 


r 


2 a 


Sigma 


SiypM 


s 


T z 


Tau 


Tav 


t 


T v 


Upsllon 


*T xpTlov 


u 


(f 


Phi 


m 


ph 


x X 


Chi 


XX 


ch 


W xp 


Psi 


?> > 


ps 


& 03 


Omega 


*Q (liya 


o long. 



12 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

The following characters are also sometimes used : 

g, f, 6. &, 7, and g-, a. 
for @, y, ■&, n, r, and at, ov. 

2. a at the end of words takes the form of g. This 
form is now sometimes used in the middle of a com- 
pound word, when the first word in the compound ends 
in a, as ngogcptQco. This is against the authority of the 
ancients. (Kiihner.) 

3. WiXov means simple, that is, unaspirated (e or u) : 
the character H being also used originally to mark the 
rough breathing (our h) ; and T to mark another breath- 
ing, that of the Digamma. (Kiihner.) 

4. A (alpha) has the sound of the English a in far, 
or like a in hat. 

5. r (gamma) before a vowel is sounded like g 
hard ; when before another y, and also before v., |, or %, 
it is sounded like ng in ring. Thus ayysXog, must be 
pronounced a?ig-elos,Ayxla)jg, Ang-chises, &c. 

6. E has the sound of e in met. 

7. Z is sounded like dz ; thus fj.eXi.Cco, melid-zo, &c. 

8. H like the English a in same, or like the ee in 
meet. 

9. J like the i in fo7, or e in we, according as it is 
short or long. 

10. X has the hard sound, as ch in chemist. 

11. Q is sounded like the o in Aope. 

12. Ai like the English aye. 

13. Av like ow in how, or, as some prefer, like aw in 
paw. 

14. Ei like the i in Jive. 

15. i?u like the English yew. 

16. Ot like oi in twice. 

17. Ov like oo in soorc, or, as some prefer, like ow in 
tra?Z. 

18. Tt like the English we. 1 

1 The pronunciation above given is according to what is termed the 
Erasmian mode of pronouncing Greek. Many, however, prefer the 



THE ALPHABET. 13 



Lesson 2. 



19. Give the names and sounds of the letters in the 
tables following : 

a ij d J q ip co | 
* § % I q> u £ v 
n x y (s q y v v 

y *p g u e y d r 

t 1] 03 T V £ V V 

y ip •& v % ■& o & 

20. Capital letters : 

AHA Z P V & S 
I B 8 A M Z N 
nKTZPTNT 
X P A A Z II 3 2 
rwZMETAT 
T H 9. T N Z T N 

n x p r 's hp 
r w o n x o o 

21. Write the names of the letters in Greek. Also, 
write in Greek capitals these words: Alexandros, 
Xenophon, PaulSs, and Matthaios. 



Lesson 3. 



22. Seven of the Greek letters are vowels ; viz., a, s } 
t], i, o, v, oo. The remaining seventeen are consonants. 

23. Two of these, s, o, are always short ; two, tj, oo, 
always long; the remaining three are called doubtful, 
being sometimes long and sometimes short. 

Reuchlinian mode, which is the same as that now in use by the modern 
Greeks. The former pronounces according to quantity ; the latter ac- 
cording to accent. Both modes are in use in the U. States. 



u 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



24. There are six proper diphthongs, viz., at, av, u, 
£v, 01, ov, and six improper, viz., a, % <p: qv, vi, mv, (which 
last is Ionic.) 

25. (1) Every word that begins with a vowel or 
diphthong has a breathing over it : it is placed over the 
second vowel of a diphthong. 

(2) The rough breathing is a comma turned the 
wrong way, and is sounded like an h before the vowel. 

Thus, ) are sounded h0} ho i 

(3) The smooth breathing is a comma, and has no 
effect on the pronunciation ; thus, av-qq is pronounced 
aner, &c 

(4) Every word that begins with v has, in Attic 
Greek, the rough breathing. 

(5) The consonant q has also the rough breathing 
over it when it stands at the beginning of a word. 

(6) In the middle of a word a single q has no 
breathing over it : of two p's, the first has the smooth, 
the second the rough breathing. 





Exercis e 


1. 




26. Write (with 


the proper 


breathings) 


the follow- 


ing words in Greek characters. 






hen homoios 


rhabdos 


rhinos 


arrhabon 


hois hon 


hikanoi 


adunatos 


esti 


ego hds 


agathos 


houtoi 


echousin 


en aneu 


hosper 


hedu 


hoti 


hun an 


hegemona 


rheuma 


rhachos 


aner anggelos 


rhipto 


ho 


rhetor 


hagia hdste 


ombros 


tode 


arrhetos 


he hon 


hebe 


alopex 


echo 


echo autos 


heauton 


ero 


haima 


huios aurion 


angkura 






tZjr' This exercise should be 


lengthened 


and varied 


according to circumstances, till the pupil is 


thoroughly 


acquainted with the breathings and their proper places. 



TABLE OF DECLENSIONS. 



15 



Lesson 4. 
27. The consonants are divided into mutes and 



Smooth. Middle. Aspirate. 
C with a p sound . . n . . § . . q> 

(1) Mutes < with a k sound . . x .. y . . % 

I with a £ sound . . r . . 5 . . # 

(2) Semivowels : I, fi, v, q (liquids), and o-. 

(3) There are also three double letters, viz., £,%,ip: 

£ = a<s, y<y, x<* 
ip = nc, @<j, cpa. 

28. General Table of the Declensions : 





i. 


II. 


in. 


Sing. 






f a, i, v, neut. 


Nom. 


{ qg, ag, masc. 


og, m. etf. 


1 oj, fern. 




( V) «> », fern. 


ov, neut. 


] v, |, q, a, y, of all 
[ genders. 


Gen. 


ov, Tjg, or ag, 


ov, 


og (cog), increases in 
gen. 


Dat. 


i, or a, 


q>, 


h 


Ace. 


rp>, or av, 


ov, 


a, or v, 


Voc. 


y\, or a, 


e, ov, neut. 


various ; neut. as 
nom. 


Dual. 








N.A.Y. 


a, 


CO, 


s t 


G. D. 


CUV, 


oiv, 


oiv, 


Plural. 








Nom. 


ai, 


oi, a, neut. 


eg, a, neut. 


Gen. 


cov, 1 


COV, 


COV, 


Dat. 


aig, 


oig, 


Gl (civ), 


Ace. 


ag, 


ovg, a, neut. 


ag, a, neut. 


Voc. 


at, 


oi, a, neut. 


eg, a, neut. 



1 Contracted from awv, and therefore circumflexed. In repeating the 
table, let the pupil say " av circumflexed." 



18 



FIKST GREEK LESSONS. 



29. ^3= Iota is generally subscribed, or written un- 
der, when following a, tj, co, as rjftsQa, airy, tovtq). But 
when capital letters are used the i is still written as a 
letter; thus AEZTIOTHL for beanot^, 'Aidtjg for adtjg. 
Iota is then said to be adscribed. 



II. THE ARTICLE. 



Singular. 





Masc. 


Fem. 


Neut. 




Nom. 





k m 


TO 


the 


Gen. 


10V 


1*19 


zov 


of the 


Dat. 


1$ 


n 


T(p 


to the 


Accus. 


70V 


iiqv 


70 


the 


Voc. 


wanting 


Dual. 






Nom. 


too 


7« 


7C0 


the two 


Gen. 


toTv 


raiv 


701V 


of the two 


Dat. 


TOlV 


raX 


701V 


to the two 


Accus. 


7(6 


id 


TOO 


the two. 


Voc. wanting. 












Plural. 






Nom. 


01 


at 


7(X. 


the 


Gen. 


rav 


7wv 


7mv 


of the 


Dat. 


zoTg 


raig 


70ig 


to the 


Accus. 


rovg 


rag 


7a 


the 


Yoc. wanting. 










Exercise 


2. 





30. Give the declension to which the following nouns 
belong, (see 28,) and the gender, as shown by the ar- 
ticle prefixed. 



70 GVXOV 



6 av&Q(nnog 
r, Xvntj 



70 sgyov 

70 ayalfia (azog) 







ACCENTS IN GREEK. 




r) av&Q<Q7Z0$ 




o dgtoTZCoXrjg 




6 veaviag 


6 Xs'cov 




rj xeyaXrj 




t) pdati<z 


to fieXt 




6 et fj naig 




t) neid-co 


tj a/xneXog 




10 dcCXQV 




6 Xoyos 


6 QrjZCOQ 




r) Hogvg 




to i'ov 


i) oxid 




to io\ov 




r) cdo% 


7] XaiXaxp 




6 &r}Q 




6 yiyag (artog) 


to nQayna (atog) 


rj sXnig 




6 niXenvg 


tO OQOQ 




t] dag (dadog) 




to av&og 


6 avdoiag (avtog) 


t) voaog 




r) q%cc. 


III. 


ACCENTS IN 


GREEK. 






Lesson 5. 







17 



31. There are three accents in Greek, the acute ('), 
the grave ( v ), and the circumflex ("). 

32. The acute stands upon one of the last three 
syllables ; the grave is never marked, but lends its sign 
to the softened acute, which stands only on the last 
syllable in a continued discourse ; the circumflex stands 
only on one of the last two syllables. 

33. Certain small words, as nag, noi, vvv, ntq, ye, (is, 
iari, &c, throw back their accent upon the preceding 
word ; they are called enclitics. 

34. Words which have the acute on the last syl- 
lable are termed oxytone ; on the penult (or next to the 
last) paroxytone ; and on the antepenult, proparoxy- 
tone. 

35. A word which has the circumflex on the last 
syllable is called perispomenon ; and on the penult, 
properispomenon. 

36. A word which has the last syllable unaccent- 
ed is called barytone ; as ngdyfia, Xvto, &c. 

37. Accents are valuable principally because they 
serve to distinguish words; thus, vo/iog, law; vopog, 
pasture ground, (iiog, life ; §iog, bow. dtjpog, people ; 



18 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

8t]fx6g, fat. zig, who ? zig, some one. em, they are ; sht, 
he goes ; &C 1 

Exercise 3. 

38. Name the accents in the following sentences; 
show whether they are placed according to the rales 
above given ; point out the enclitics, &c. 

'O dsdog hazi zijg nazQidog nQodozqg. — "OQZvykg elaiv 
ri8vqs(ovoi xa\ pafflTixoi OQVi&eg. — oncog ds eidoi palicta, 
bnolog tig ion xrfi> bipiv ; — 'Pd8iov evquv ano ye zovzcov. 
— to zs zav Tqizcovcov yzvog. — allot. 8ieXs fiov zr\v xecpalijv 
ig 8vo xazevsyxcov. — zaj ili'cpavzi iazl dQaxovzog OQQCoSia. 
co xaxodaifiov vis zov xaxodaifiovog rigidfiov. — Tvqwv 
vnb Zr\vbg ixoXda-&tj. — Zaqdav analog, fa fiaailuoig xaza- 
xexletopsvog, ovdsv alio idimxev t\ tjdovrjv. — ovzog 6 
vofiog iq}vld%&T] vnb UsQixlsovg, xal i&avfidc&t] vnb 
'Alxifiidoov. 



Lesson 6. 



39. The mutes (see 27, p. 15) are divided into three 
sets of three : — 

Smooth. Middle. Aspirate. 

p sounds . . 7i . . § . . cf 
k sounds . . k . . y . . % 
t sounds . . r . . d . . &. 

C For any p sound with g you must write xp. 

(1) < For any k sound with g you must write £. 

( For any t sound with g you must write g only. 

(2) Also for nz-g you must write \p : for xz-g, £. 
(a) Thus (tten-g ) f §le\p 

f** become \f f 

rvnr-g J [ zv\p. 

1 See " Questions" on Accentuation at the end of the volume. 



FORMATION OF TENSES. 19 

(b) And nlex-g 1 { nXel 

Xey-g > become < 7.e% 

(c) „ u *.g U ecome Ue IS 
cnevo-g ) I ansvg. 

(3) The past tense is, in Greek, called the Aorist. 

(4) The root of the future is got from the root of the 
present by adding g. 

(5). A verb is made third singular of the present or 
future by adding sc to the root of the present or future 
respectively : (ygacp, write) ygucpei, he writes ; ygdipei, he 
will write. 

(6) A verb is made third singular of the imperfect by 
putting s before and after the root of the present 1 : 
s-ygacp-E, he was writing. 

(7) A verb is made third singular of the aorist by 
putting s before and after the root of the future 2 : e-yQuxp-s, 
he wrote. 

yQacp, root of present. 
(Present) ygdcp-si, i-ygacp-s (Imjoerf.) . 
(yqaqi-a = ) ygaxp, root of the future. 



(Future) ygdxp-si, 


i-ygaxp-e 


40. Vocabulary 1. 




Write, paint 


ygacp 


Hurt, injure 3 


$kant 


Persuade 


7TEI& 


Steal 


YlzTIt 


Pursue 


dlCOH 


See 


§lB7l 


Say, speak 


key 



To hasten, use diligence onEvS. 
Obs. — The fut. of xlenr must not be formed in the 
way just explained, as its future is of a different form 
(Fut. Mid.) : as that of Stay, often is. 



1 The prefixed t is called the syllabic augment. 

2 Or, ' the sigmated root/ i. e. root with added j. 

3 In the sense of inflicting injury or damage. 



20 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Exercise 4. 

41. He hurts. He was hurting. He will hurt. He 
hurt. He persuades. He will persuade. He persuaded. 
He was persuading. He pursues. He pursued. He will 
pursue. He stole. He was stealing. He steals. He sees. 
He was seeing. He saw. He will write. He used dili- 
gence. He was speaking. He will injure. He said. 
He will paint. He hastened. He was hastening. He 
will see. 



IV. FIRST DECLENSION. 



Lesson 7. 



42. Nouns of this declension end in a and rj, femi- 
nine; ag and r\g, masculine. 





Examples. 




■>} zipq, " the honour? 


Sing. 


Dual. 


Plural. 


N. f} ZljlTj 


N. 5 


N. eu 7fjH«( 


G. T?jg ri/xi]g 


A. V ra ri(id 


G. rav riftoov 


D. T7/ Tlflij 


v. ) 


D. Ta/~? zifAaTg 


A. ttjv 7t{irjv 


G. } _ 


A. z«s Tt|tta? 


V. zifitj 


-pj > TCCt? tlfidlV 


V. Xl\lOLl 


h 


aoqiia, " the wisdom 


n 


Sing. 


Dual. 


Plural. 


N. rj aoqtict 


N. ) 


N. at Cocpiai 


G. rijg aoqiiag 


A. > ra (Toqpt'a 


G. 7C0J> uocptoJv 


D. zy aoqji'a 


Y.) 


D. r«r<? oocpi'utg 


A. t\v cocpiav 
V. aocpia 


G. > „ 


A. r«? ooqji'ag 
Y. aoqiiai 



FIRST DECLENSION. 



21 



r\ Movaa, " the Muse: 



Sing. 


Z>«aZ. 


PZwraZ. 


N. tj Movaa 


N '? 


N. at Movaai 


G. ir\g Movarjg 


A. > ra, Movaa 


G. zcov Movaav 


D. zfj Movay 


J.) 


D. zaTg Movaatg 


A. zrjv Movaav 


l~v' > T«ry Movaaiv 


A. zag Movaag 


V. Movaa 


V. Movaai 


6 


noliTijg, " £/ie citizen." 


Sing. f 


Dual. 


Plural. 


N. b 7zoXitrjg 


N "? 


N. ot noXXzai 


G. rov noXlzov 


A. > too noXlza 


G. zdov TzoXizmv 


D. 7 CO TZoXizrj 


T-.J 


D. to«V noXizaig 


A. Toy noXiztjv 
V. TroArra 1 


J-." > 70ti> noXizaiv 


A. toi>£ noXizag 
V. noXlzai 


o veanag, " the young man? 


Sing. 


Dual. 


Plural. 


N. 6 veaviag 


N "? , 


N. pi vsaviai 


G. iov rsaviov 


A. > too vsavia 


G. zav veavimv 


D. 7(£ veavla 


J,S 


D. 70^ vsaviaig 


A. zbv v eat lav 


G. . 


A. 70i>£ veaviag 


V. veavia 


j~v > Toty vzaviaw . 


V. vsaviai 


6 'Avvifiag, " iJa 


nnibal." 


o 'AzQEidtjg 


, "Son of Atreus? 


N. o '^wtjf 


lag 


N.6 


'AzQuong 


G. 70V 3 ^yy/| 


fo 


G. 7( 


w "Azqddov 


D. 7cp 'Avvtfi 


a 


D. 7 


5 AzQEidy 


A. roy 'Avvifi 


ay 


A. 7< 


)v 'AzQeidrjv 


V. Ww# 


« 


V. 


'AzQeidq 




Lesson 8. 




43. Vocabula 


ry 2. 




Soul, 


^^ 





1 Nouns in »js of the first declension generally make the vocative in 
?; instead of a. 



22 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Scythian Zxv&qg 

Young man, youth reaviag 



Letter, epistle 

Master 

Artist 

Judge 

Baker 

This (thing) 



imazolq 

dsanoz^g 

rs^viztjg 

xqittJq 

aqroncoXrig 

zovzo (neut. pron.) 

Exercise 5. 



44. He will pursue the young man. He persuaded 
the Scythian. It hurt the soul. He will write the 
letter. The young man was writing the letter. The 
young man will hurt the Scythian. He is stealing the 
letter. The Scythian was pursuing the young man. 
The master saw the youth. The artist was writing a 
letter. The judge spoke. The baker will hasten. 
The young man persuaded the judge. The master 
wrote this to the Scythians. O baker, the artist saw 
this. 



Lesson 9. 


15. Vocabulary 3. 




Poet 


jzoirjzrjg 


Citizen 


noXirrig 


Persian 


IleQOTjg 


Geometer 


yecofietQ^g 


iEneas 


Alvuag 


Anchises 


3 Ay%iariQ 


Steward 


rapiag 


Chatterer 


udolECfflg 


He will give 


dcoaet 


Do not pursue 


fit] dlWX-E. 



(1) A verb of the present tense is made imperative, 
in the second person, by adding e to the root. 



FIRST DECLENSION. 23 

Exercise 6. 

Obs. — Proper names very often take the article in 
Greek. Prefix it to them in the following exercise. 

Obs. 2. — The possessive pronouns are to be trans- 
lated by the article. 

46. He will persuade his master. iEneas will per- 
suade Anchises. The young man persuaded the judge. 
The steward will write this. The young man will give 
this to the steward. The master will give this to the 
Scythians. O baker. The artist will persuade the poet. 
The poet is persuading the artist. O baker, do not steal. 
He is persuading the Persians. He persuaded the Scy- 
thian's 1 steward. He will give this to the (two) citizens. 
O Persian, do not pursue the poet. The geometer says. 
Anchises will hasten. The chatterer stole the letter. 
The judge will see the geometer. The steward of the 
Persian. The citizen will not injure his baker. The 
soul of iEneas. O iEneas, do not speak. 



Lesson 10. 

47. Vocabulary 4. 

To hide, conceal xQvm 

To look plea 

To bury &anr z 

To leave, leave behind lem 

To soothe -&eXy 

The earth yrj 



1 Say, ' the of the Scythian steward.' 

2 Used of any of the customary ways of disposing of a corpse, whether 
by burying in the earth, embalming, or burning. To express burying in 
the earth, when it is to be pointed out that that was the mode of fune- 
ral-rite meant, iv yrj Kpiirrsiv, to hide in the earth, is used. 



24 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Battle 
The sea 


ftdlaaoa 


Truth 


a\rj&eia 


Wisdom 
Knife 
Towards 
To 


aocpla 

fid%aiQOt. 

Tzgog (with accus.) 

eig (with accus.) 



Exercise 7. 

td 3 Place the governed, genitive after the article of 
the governing noun. ' The of the viper head..' 

48. He looks. He looked. He will bury the young 
man. He will hurt his master. He will hurt the young 
man's soul. He buried the Scythian. He is looking 
towards the earth. He looked towards the sea. He will 
look towards the baker. O baker, don't look towards 
the earth. He left his wisdom. He soothed the young 
man. He will soothe the geometer. The honour paid 
to his wisdom {say, the honour of his Avisdom) soothes 
the geometer. Look-to the honour paid to [say, the ho- 
nour of) truth. He will give this to the son-of-Atreus. 
He was soothing the Muse with his wisdom. The bat- 
tle hurt the citizens. The judge looked-to truth. He 
hid this. Hannibal saw the battle. The truth of Han- 
nibal's steward. The two-poets will give this to the 
Muses. 



SECOND DECLENSION. 
Lesson 11. 



49. Nouns of this declension end in og masculine, 
sometimes feminine, and ov, neuter. 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



25 



Examples. 



Sing. 
N. 6 yjjTiog 

G. TOV XTjTTOV 
D. TCO X7/77CO 

A. rbv y.r]nov 

V. WJ7ZS 



o xqnog, 



£ the garden." 
Dual. 



TCO X)j7ZCO 



tow KtJTZOlV 





Sing. 




N. 


■>] voaog 


N. 


G. 


Tyg vogov 


A. 


I). 


rfj vogco 


V. 


A. 


ri)v vogov 


G. 


V. 


VOGS 
Sing. 


D. 

6 de 


N. 


6 astog 


N. 


G. 


tov aszov 


A. 


D. 


TO) UETCp 


Y. 


A. 


tov dsrov 


G. 


V. 


aeie 


D. 



r) voGog, " the disease. 
Dual. 



%a VOGCO 



raiv voooiv 



" the eagle." 

Dual. 



TCO a£T03 



Plur. 
ol xrjnoi 

TOO*' x/]7TCOV 

Tolg yJ/noig 
Tohg w]novg 

XlJTTOl 

Piur. 
al vogoi 

TCOV 1'OGCOV 

zaTg voaoig 
Tag 1'oaovg 

VOGOI 
Plur. 



TOlV aSTOlV 



N. 


ol 


dsroi 


G. 


TCOV 


asrcov 


I). 


TOig 


asroig 


A. 


rovg 


aszovg 


V. 




a8T0l 



Sing. 
TO GVY.OV 
TOV GVKOV 
TCp GVXCp 
TO GVKOV 
GVKOV 



to gvxov, " the Jig" 
Dual. 



TCO GVKCO 



TOlV ovxoiv 



Plur. 



N. 


TO. 


cvxa 


G. 


TCOV 


GVXCOV 


I). 


ToTg 


Gvxoig 


A. 


T« 


Gvxa 


"V. 




GVXCi 



{Attic Second Declension.) 

50. There are a few words which have some pecu- 
liarities, and are said to belong to the Attic declension, 
because used by the Attics in preference to the usual 
forms thus Xayaog became lay cog : vaog (vcog)= vsag, &c. 
4> 



2B 



FIRST. GREEK LESSONS. 



51. It has w for the vowel of its final syllable 
throughout, which is subscript wherever the second 
declension has i (whether subscript or not). 

52. D3" "Ea>g dawn, and names of places, "Admg, 
Tecog, &c. take accusative ro. 



Sing. 
N. 6 Aaj'oo'tf 
G. zo9 ^.aya) 
D. tc-5 J.«j'w 
A. TO^ Xaycov 

(or Aayoo) 
V. ^.ayco? 



Examples. 
6 /ta/w'ff, " //?,e hare." 

Dual. 

N. 
A. 
V. 
G. 
D. 



XaycS 



roTv layopv 



Plur. 

N. ol layco 
G. tcoV ^.aycdj' 
D. toZ£ ^.ftj'O)^ 
A. tovg laycog 



to ai'coj'fcoj', " upper chamber; " " dining-room." 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

N. TCC «*'GJ?'£C9 

G. tooV arroyfoiy 

D. tojV ai>ooye<pg 

A. t« a^amoo 
tow avaymv 17 - , / 

' V: uvooyeay 

53. In like manner decline 6 taooV, " /Ae people," 6 
vmg, " £Ae temple" 6 rang, " the peacock" fj y.dlcog, " £Ae 
rope," &c. 



N. 


TO 


«yco'^fco»' 


N. 


G. 


TOW 


aj'oij'fca 


A. 


D. 


TOp 


CCl'COJ'fift) 


V. 


A. 


TO 


a^coj'fcoj' 


G. 


V. 




dvayscov 


D. 



L e s 


son 12. 


54. Vocabulary 5. 




Young-one 

Island 

Messenger 

Work 

Law 


vsozrog 

vrjoog [rj) 
dyyelog 
tQyov 
t'Ofiog 



VERBS WITH ROOTS IN £. 27 

Word, speech ).6yog 

Rose Qodov 

Violet iov 

House ohog 

Vine a/xntXog (Jr) 

In iv (with dative) 

In the house iv tq5 ofxtp 

Mount Athos "A&'ag 

Dawn sag. 

Exercise 8. 

55. He steals the poet's roses. He looked towards 
the messenger. He will give this to the messenger. 
The judge looked to works. He will hide the poet's 
words. He is pursuing the (two) poets. The disease hurt 
ihe artist. The young man will give the (two) eagles 
to the damsel. The law persuades the judge. The 
wisdom of the laws will persuade the judge. The 
messenger looked towards the island. He will look 
towards the baker's garden. He will hurt the Scythian 
with his knife. The eagle will soothe its young-ones. 
I will give the viper 1 to the eagles. He will leave the 
house. 



Lesson 13. 
( Verbs with roots ending in £.) 

56. Vocabulary 6. 

To wonder at, admire ■davfia^ 
To chastise y.ola£ 2 

To bring, take ao^. 



1 ex^"i (declined like MoCja). 

2 It will be seen afterwards that these verbs generally form their fut. 
in a different way. The fut. Oavimaoj is found in good writers, though 
fut. mid. is the more common. • 



23 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

From verbs in £ the root of the fut. is generally formed 
by changing the £ into a {dav^aa, xopd). Obs. The a 
and i in fut. of these verbs are short. 

Exercise 9. 

57. The law will chastise the Scythian. He admired 
the poet's roses. He was admiring the violets. The 
master was chastising the Scythian. The poet will 
admire the island. The messenger stole the rose. The 
Scythian admires the poet's house. The Persian will 
admi#e the houses. The Persian is admiring the vine. 
The law chastised the Persian. O Persian, do not 
wonder at my words. He brought the (two) vines. He 
will give roses to Hannibal. The roses in the island 
of the Muses soothe the poet. Violets are 1 in the house 
of Anchises. O works of vEneas ! The law of speech 
towards messengers. 



Lesson 14. 



£Cf^ What do proper names very often take in Greek ? 
(45, Obs.) Give the terminations of the first and second 
declensions. 

Exercise 10. 

58. The peacock is wondering at the hare. The 
young man admired the peacock. The boy pursued 
the hare. The Persian stole the hare. The Persian 
will pursue the hares. The Persian will admire the 
wisdom of the Scythian. He admires the poet's dining- 
room. O geometer, admire the temple of Minerva. 2 
The poet looked towards Mount- Athos. The young 



1 riaiv, from dpi, to be. 

2 'ABrivS (contracted from 'AOnvda), G. 'AdnvSs, &c, 



IRREGULAR NOUNS. 29 

man did not 1 admire the peacock's voice. 2 He was 
looking towards the temples. The poet admired Mount- 
Athos. He does not admire the temple of Minerva. 
He did not admire the temple of Mercury. 3 He will 
give this to the peacocks. He brought the figs. 

(1) From what roots might davfidaet come 1 [&avfiar, 
ftavnad, &av(ia&, or &avfia£.] Why ? [Because the t 
sounds are thrown away before g, and £ is treated as a 
t sound.] 

(2) From what roots might za% come ? [From rax, 
zay, za%, zaxz, zaoo, or razz.] Why 1 [Because any k 
sound, or xz, with g = £ ; and aa, zz, are treated like k 
sounds.l 



59. Vocabulary 7. 



Lesson 15. 




7. 




two genders, 
skin 6, fj olfiog 
shrub 6, fj Xi&og 


path 
stone 



o, tj qivog 
6, fj -&d[M>og 
6, fj fiaqfiizog lyre. 
(6) Words that alter their meaning with their gender. 
6 tyyog the yoke fj tyyog the balance 

6 Innog the horse fj Innog the cavalry 

6 Xs'xi&og the pulse-broth fj Xsxi&og the yolk (of an egg). 
(c) The following become neuter in the plural : — 



6 fioczQvxog the curl 


ra fi6aTQv%a 


6 deofiog the chain 


zee dsofxd 


6 -freafiog the statute 


za ■&SG/XCC 


6 oYqp(>o£ the chariot-seat 


zu dicpQa 


6 xsXsv&og the way 


za xsXev&a 


6 Xv-fvog the torch 


za Xv%va 


6 a?™? the corn 


za oiza, &c. 



ovk before the verb. When it does not stand before a vowel, i 

ipwvfi. 

'Epplf, Mercury (contr. from 'Ep;t£as), G.'Epfiov, &c. 



30 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

(d) Contracts of the second declension. 
tC5" They are contracted thus : — 
voog, vovg (mind), vov, vop, vovv, vov | vm, voiv J voT, vav, 
voig, vovg, vol. 

oaxiov, oaxovv (hone), oaxov, oarco, oaxovv, oaxovv | dorm, 
oaxolv | data, oaxcov, baxolg, oaxa, baza. 

voog (vovg) mind oaxiov (oaxovv) hone 
nloog (nlovg) voyage advsov (xavovv) basket. 

Exercise 11. 

60. Bring the yoke of the horse. Do not wonder at 
the cavalry's curls. The statute is (faxlv) in the house. 
Take the pulse-broth, O Minerva. The lyre of the poet 
and (xc») the corn. Look toward the chariot-seats. 
The bones of the peacock and the torches. He will 
give a torch to the man (av&gconog). Mercury did not 
admire the stone. In the basket is a shrub. The 
voyage of iEneas. He stole the balance. He was 
looking at the skin of the hare. O son-of-Atreus, do 
not conceal the truth. Chastise the poet. The Persian 
in chains is writing to his steward (45, Obs. 2). An- 
chises was bringing yolks (of eggs) to the house of the 
poet. 



VI. THIRD DECLENSION. 
Lesson 16. 

61. Nouns of this declension end in a, t, v, neuter ; 
oj, feminine ; and v, |, q, a, ip, of all genders ; that is, 
either masculine, feminine, or neuter. 

62. The oblique cases of nouns of this declension 
are longer by one syllable than the nominative, as -frfe, 
&i]o6g, &riql, <fcc. : and the genitive singular always ends 
in og. 

63. As in the Latin third declension, the nom. of this 



THIRD DECLENSION. 3] 

declension seldom contains the unaltered root ; which 
may be got from the gen. by throwing off og. 

64. The t sounds and v are thrown away before at in 
dat. plur. of the third: ovtai, evrai, avzoi, vvzoi, become 
ovai, eict, am, vat. 

(a) The ace. in v belongs to ig, vg, avg, ovg. Pure 1 
nouns of these terminations have v only: impure ones 
a only, if they are accented on the last syllable : if not 
generally r, but often both forms. 

65. To find the nominative of the third from an ob- 
lique case, when the root ends in a consonant, 

(1) Add g to the nom. 

(2) Throw away the t sounds and v before this g. 

(3) When vt has been thrown away, the vowel must 
be lengthened : s, o, become ei, ov. 

In other words — 

avrg evrg ovrg vvrg 

become ag eig ovg vg. 

(4) e, o in mas. and fem. nouns, pass into q, a, unless 
the nom. ends in £ or ip. 

(5) For root in ovr, sometimes the t falls off, and the 
nom. is mv. 2 

(6) Roots in at sometimes belong to nom. a (neuter) 

or KQ, 0)Q. 

(7) Roots ending in v or q are often without the g in 
the nom. : but here too s, o, become ij, eo. 

66. Of the Vocative. 3 

(1) It frequently occurs in this third decl. that a word 
might have a distinct vocat., but commonly, and with 
Attic writers in particular, its vocat. is the same with 
the nomin. We shall state the rules, by which some 



1 Nouns are called pure when the root ends in a vowel, as ypavs, 
ypa-6s : 0ovs, 0o-6s : o-Ss, av-6; ; xt'f, ki-6s : impure when the root ends in 
a consonant. 

2 Hence roots that end in ovr belong to nom. ovs or <av. 

3 From Buttmann. 



32 FIRST GREEK LESSORS. 

end-syllables may form a distinct vocat., and leave it to 
the student to notice the words in which it really is dis- 
tinct. 

(2) The end-syllables evg, ig, vg, and the words naig, 
ygavg, povg, throw their g off, and those in svg take the 
circumflex, as fiaaiXtvg, vocat. co ^aaiXtv,—ndgi, Acogi, 
T/]&v, fjdv, &C. — rial, ygav, §ov. 

(3) Those in ag and eig, before whose g a.v has been 
dropt, do the same ; but then they commonly resume the 
v, as for instance rdXdg, dvog, co zdXdv — Aiag,avzog, co 
Alav — yuQmg, evzog, <x> lagiev. Yet several names in dg, 
avzog, form their voc. in long a, a.s'AzXag, avtog, co'AtXCc. 

(4) The words of which the nomin. has ij or co for 
the vowel of their final syllable, merely shorten this 
vowel in the vocat. ; but in general only when the other 
cases also have e or o : it is the same with ^zrjg, tgog, co 
fi7]7£Q- — gtjzcog, OQog, co gr t zog' — Zcoxgdzrjg, sog, co JZcoxgazeg. 

(5) The feminities in co and cog make the vocat. in oi, 
as ^Eancpco, co 2ancpol' — 'Hcog, co 'HoT. 

Obs. 1. From the rule 4 are excepted those which 
have the accent on the end-syllable ; as notfirjv, ivog, co 
Ttoijv'iv {shepherd) ; but only substantives, not adjectives 
(as, for instance, co xslaipscpsg). These three, ndzeg, dvsg, 
ddsg, from nazi'ig, avt\g, da^g {husband's brother), gen. 
tgog, also follow the general rule, but remove the accent 
to the first syllable. 

Obs. 2. The words which retain the long vowel in 
the other cases, continue unchanged in the vocat.: hence 
co TlXdrcov {gen. covog), co Eevoqicov {covzog), co irjr^Q {fjgog), 
co Kgdtijg {rjzog). There are but three among them, 
which shorten the vowel in the vocat. : 'AnoXXcov, covog, — 
Iloaeidcov, covog, — acozrjg, iqgog {deliverer), vocat. co 'AnoX- 
Xop, Uoaeidov, acozeg, and they likewise throw the accent 
back. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



Lesson 17. 



Examples. 



to 



nqayiia, "the thing? "the affair" 



Sing. 
N. to nqayfia 
G. Toy nqdyfiazog 
D. tw ngdyfxazi 
A. to nqayiia. 
V. ngayfia 



Sing. 
N. to juele 
G. tov (xilizog 
D. T(£i fiiXiri 
A. to fiiXi 



Sing-. 
N. to yoj>t; 
G. tou 70WTO? 

D. T<£ ^oWt* 

A. to yovv 
V. yoVv 



Dual. 
tw nqaynazs 

zoiv JTQayfidzoiv 



Plural. 
N. Ta nqdy\iaza 
G. Tcoy 7iQay(Jicitmv 
D. tois nqdyfiaai 
A. t« nqdy^aza 
V. nqdynaza 



to ffg'At, " £Ae honey" 

Dual. 

N. 
A. 
V. 
G. 
D. 



to!) fisXize 
zoiv fisXizoiv 



to yoVv, " ^Ae k?iee." 

Dual. 

N. 
A. 
V. 
G. 
D. 



TO) ^O^aTS 



Toti' yovazoiv 



Plural. 
N. Ta fiehza, 
G. tow [teXizcov 
D. TOl? fxshai 
A. t« fisXiza 
V. fiiliza 



Plural. 
N. Ta yoVaTa 
G. Tear yovdzoov 
D. zoigyovaai 
A. Ta yovaza 
V. yoVaTa 



Sing. 

N. 6 f, £:;.v 

G. tov "EXltjvog 
D. T(p "EXXtjvi 
A. zov°EXXriva 



6 to^ " ^e Cfreefc." 



Dual. 



za> "EXXqve 

zoTv'EXXyvoiv 

2* 



Plural. 
N. ot "EXXqvsg 
G. tcwj> 'EXXrjvasv 
D. zolg"EXX?]Gi 
A. zovg a EXXr]vag 
V. "EXXqveg 



34 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 







6 Xmv, u the lion. 


» 




Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


N. 


6 Xioav 


N. ) 


N. oi Xe'ovrsg 


G. 


rov Xtovrog 


A. > rco Xiovrs 


G. rav Xeovrmv 


D. 


i5) Xiovri 


V. \ 


D. rolg Xfovoi 


A. 


rov Xiovra 


•p > roiv Xeovroiv 


A. rovg Xiovrag 


V. 


Xtov 


V. Xiovrtg 






Lesson 18 . 






67. Vocabular 


m 






Body 


(jcofia 






Milk 


ydXa, xrog 






Tear 


duxQv, og 






Shepherd 


no([j.TJv, svog 


6 




Dog 


xvoav, xvvog, 


6 et r\ 




Armour 


otiXov, ov 






Head 


XEtyaXt}, 7jg. 
Exercise 12. 





68. The Greek chastised the shepherd's dogs. In 
the house of Anchises (are) the tears of a young man. 
The baker will give milk and honey to the artist. The 
Persian looked towards the lions. The body of the eagle. 
The son-of-Atreus brought (his) armour (pi.) to the bat- 
tle. The knees of the two -lions. The Scythian stole the 
honey. The geometer persuaded Hannibal. The Muses 
persuade the young man to wisdom. The honour paid 
to {say of) wisdom soothed Anchises. The dog stole 
the milk of (his) master. He buried the bodies of the 
Greeks. The lions leave the two shepherds. Truth 1 
will give this to the poet. The roses in the garden of the 



1 Abstract nouns often take the article ; truth, >'; d\fideia or dh'iOeia. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



35 



geometer were soothing the citizens. iEneas's sickness 
injured the artist. The hares in the island injure the 
poet's roses and garden. Hannibal wrote the thing in 
a letter, and said, O judge, look towards the sea. The 
eagle's young ones will hurt the citizen's gardens. He 
admires Mount-Athos. 



Lesson 1 



( Third Declension, continued.) 



Situ 





rov 
rov 



6 xopa%, " the raven. 

Dual. 



XOQCi% 

xopaxog 
xopaxi 
xo q axa 
xopa% 



703 xopaxB 



roiv xopdxoiv 



Plur. 
oi xopaxeg 
toov xopdxoiv 
toTg xopaxi 
70vg xopaxag 
xoQctxsg 



Sing. 
N. rj 7T7SQvl~ 
G. TijgnzEQvyog 
D. rjj nrtpvyi 
A. ttjv nxiqvya 

V. 7l7Wv"S 



t\ nriqv%, " the wing? 

Dual. 



TtTSQVyE 



raiv nreqvyoiv 



ai 



N 

G 

D. Tatg 

A. rag 

V. 



Plur % 
nrsQvysg 
nreovymv 

miovyag 
ntsqvyeg 



Sing. 

6 QTjTCOQ 

rov QijTOQog 

7(7) Q1]XOQl 
70V QTj70Qa 

frj70Q 



6 qi]703q, " the orator." 

Dual. 



too 6rj7ope 



701V Qt]7OP0lV 



Plur. 
oi qfoopsg 

700V QT170Q03V 
70ig QTJ70QCn 
70Vg QT]70pttg 

Qfoopsg 



3fi 



FIRST GEEEK LESSONS. 







to ijnaQ., 


" the liver." 




Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


N. 


zb rjnao 


N '? 




N. za 'i'i7iara 


G. 


rov iqnazog 


A. > TQJ 


?J7TU7B 


G. rav r)ndzo)v 


B. 


zcp Tqnazi 


Y.) 




D. roig Tjnaoi 


A. 


to Tjnao 
i)na.Q 


G. 1 . 


t , 


A. roc ijnara 


V. 


D. \ roiv 


r^nazoiv 


V. ijnara 




o ncug, 


" the boy" 


: 7] noug, Ci 


the girl." 




Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


N. 


6 nuig 


N.) 




N. ol naidsg 


G. 


rov naidog 


A. > TOO 


nalde 


G. rcov n a id a v 


i). 


zu> Tiaibi 


V. ) 




D. zoTg natal 


A. 
V. 


rov rzaida 
Tial 


g. i : 
D. 5 t 


naiboiv 


A. zobg naiSag 
V. naldsg 




69. Vocabulc 


try 9. 








Flatterer 




xolal-, axog, b 




Flesh 




c«oJ, octQxog, r) 




Whip, scoui 


•ge 


f/dan^, Tyo 


S, v 




Flame 




ylo£, qiloyog, r) 




Fox 




alo37iq%, sxog, r\ 




Pure aii- 




ai&t'jQ, eoog, 6 et j) 




Old man 




yt'ocav, ovzog 




Philip 




fbihnnog, 


ov 




Xenophon 




EevocpdJv, 


ai'tog. 






Exercise 13. 





70. The geometer admired the flame. The fox hurt 
the girl. The boy will admire Philip's head. The eagle 
soothes its young-one with its wing. The eagle looked 
towards the steward. With eagles' wings. The Per- 
sian's steward will look towards the sea. He was steal- 
ing the young man's whip. The Scythian was stealing 
the geometer's roses. He will give this to the foxes. He 
will give honours to the geometers. He will give the fox 
to the boys. He concealed the geometer's words. He 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



:J7 



will give the fox to the Persian's boys. He will give ho- 
nours to the Greeks. The flatterer persuaded the old 
man. Xenophon persuaded the Greeks. The flatterer 
looked towards the flame in the judge's dining-room. 
The flesh of the eagle's young-ones. He was admiring 
the pure-air. He is wondering-at the fox's cunning (ao- 
qiia). Philip saw the flame. O Scythian, do not admire 
the flatterers. The two orators will give this to Xeno- 
phon. The raven's wing, and the liver of the hare. O 
girl, do not admire Philip. O orator, soothe the poet's 
mind. The bones and flesh of the fox. He saw violets 
in Xenophon's garden. O Greek, chastise the flatter- 
ers. Give the eagle's liver to the dogs. The old-man 
will chastise the orators. The two-boys stole the mas- 
ter's figs. 



Lesson 20. 



(Third Declension Continued. 



Sing. 
N. 6 OQVIQ 

G. 70V OQVl&OQ 
D. 70J OQVl&l 

A . zbv 0Qri&a x 

Y. oong 



Sing. 

N. i] Xupndg 
G. 7% Xapndcdog 
D. 7rj Xauddi. 
A. rijv lufindda 
V. Xafxridg 



6 oQng, " the bird.' 
Dual. 

N. 
A. 
V. 
G. 
D. 



OQVl&E 



rolv oQri&oiv 



Piural. 
I N. oi ogvt&sg 
G. tmv 6qvi&03V 
I D. zoig oqvuu 

j A. Tovg oon&ag 
| V. oQn&eg 



?j lafindg, " the torch." 



Dual. 



-co Xajmdde 



tuiv Xaunddoiv 



Plural. 
N. at Xapnddsg 
G. tooj' 7.a(xnd8(>3v 
D. tolg Xafindoi 
A. tag lafirrddag 
V. Xa^inddeg 



Also hpviii. See 64 (a) 



38 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 





TOU 

T(7j 

toy 



Sing. 

yiyag 

yiyavtog 

yiyavti 

yi'yavra 

yiyav 



6 yiyag, " the giant." 
Dual. 

N. 
A. 
V. 

g; 
d. 



too yl.ya.vts 



yiyavroiv 



Sing, 
t] lcu).a\p 
tijg iMLlanoL, 
ty Xailam 
trjv XaiXana 
XaiXaxp 



?j XalXaxp, " the storm. 
Dual. 

x XaiXans 



Imlanoiv 



Sing. 
N. 6 novg 
G. tov nodog 
D. to~t no8i 
A. to v rtoda 

V. 770^' et 710V 



6 novg, " the foot." 
Dual. 

N. 
A. 
V. 
G. 
I). 



Plural. 

ol yiyavtsg 
toov ytydvzwv 
toTg yiyaai 
tovg yiyavtag 
yiyavtsg 

Plural. 

al XaiXansg 
rmv XaiXdnav 
talg XaiXaxpi 
tag XaiXanag 
XaiXansg 



nv nodoiv 



Plural. 
N. ol node? 
G. tav nodmv 
D. tolg tiogI, 
A. tovg Tiodag 
V. nodsg 



71. Vocabulary 10. 
Dove 
Statue 
Ethiopian 
Storm, winter 
Goat 
Greece 
Helmet 
Q,uail 
Thong 



nsXeidg, ddog, r\ 
avSoidg, dvtog, 6 
AlOiOxp, onog, 6 
%s<{<ojv, cot'og, o 
ait, a't'yog, ij 
'EXXdg, ddog, rj 
xoQvg, v&og, rj 
oqzv^, vyog, 6 
l[xdg, dvtog, o. 



Exercise 14. 



72. The boys of Greece admire the goats in the gar- 
den of the poet. Do not chastise the girls, O Philip. 



EXERCISES ON THE DECLENSIONS. 39 

In the winter disease will injure the citizens. The 
Ethiopians looked towards the statue of Xenophon. 
He admired the orators. He will give honours to the 
old men. He wondered-at the giant's body. He will 
admire the orators of the Greeks. He wondered-at the 
wisdom of the old men. He will give the roses to the 
old men. He pursued the flatterer. The boy is admir- 
ing the doves. He admired the wisdom of the orator. 
He will give the statue to the Persian. The geometer 
was wondering-at the giant's bones (59, d). The boy 
admires the eagle's head. The Ethiopian looks towards 
the flame. The Scythian looked towards the Greeks. 
He will give the dove to the fox. The eagle will soothe 
its two-young-ones. The Scythian saw the helmets of 
the Greeks. The quails and hares are in the house of 
Hannibal's steward. The storm (XaTXaxp) on the sea. 
Xenophon saw Mount- Athos. He admired the peacocks. 
He was wondering at the thongs. The giant's feet in- 
jured the baker's garden. The two-goats on Mount- 
Athos. O master, the Ethiopian was stealing the citi- 
zen's corn. iEneas is taking the figs to Anchises. Boy, 
do not steal the roses and violets in the garden of Philip. 



Lesson 21. 



H^ Give the terminations of the third declens. with 
the genders of each. How do you find the nomin. case 
from any of the oblique cases? (65.) 

Exercise 15. 

73. Was the Ethiopian looking-at the hares? 1 Philip 
will give this to the son-of-Atreus. In Greece are statues 

1 Marks of Punctuation. — At first the Greeks had no punctuation 
marks, the words being written in capital letters, without any separation 
between them. The marks which afterwards came into use were the 



40 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

of Xenophon, the Greek. He persuaded the giants. 
The boy's two-feet. Will iEneas give figs to the poet? 
Was Philip a Greek ? He was wondering at the helmet 
of Anchises. Is he writing a letter in the house ? Was 
the girl bringing goat's milk to the messenger? There 
are torches in the geometer's dining-room. Will the 
eagle pursue the two-hares? He was looking-at the 
vines in the citizen's gardens. Will the two-citizens 
speak ? Sickness of body injures the mind. The young- 
ones of the quails are in the garden of the judge. 





Lesson 22. 


f4. Yocabulary 


11. 


Lawgiver 


vofto&aztjg 


Voice 


qpooi'j; 


Nightingale 


aijdav, ovog, r\ 


Dragon 


dodxmv, ovzog, 6 


Servant 


{reodncav, ovzog, 6 


Swallow 


%Ehdoav, ovog, rj 


Goose 


yr\v, fflvog, 6 


Claw, talon 


ovvS,, vyog, 6 


Tooth 


oSovg, ovzog, 6. 



Exercise 1 



75. He will give this to his servant (45, Obs. 2). He 
admires the poet's nightingale. He admired the voice 
of the nightingales. The raven is stealing this with its 
claws. He was admiring the lion's claws. The Scy- 



following : the comma and period, as in English ; the colon and semi- 
colon, a dot or point above the line (thus,/<£-) ; the sign of interroga- 
tion, in form the same as the English semicolon (thus, tovto ;) the diu- 
resis (••) which separates two vowels which otherwise would form a diph- 
thong (thus, diSfis, d-iSfii) ; and the apostrophe (' ), used when a vowel is 
cut off from the end of a word before another word beginning with a 
vowel (thus, err' ijii). 



CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



41 



thian will admire the wisdom of the lawgiver. The 
wild beast bit 1 the boy with his tooth. It hurt the wild 
beast's foot. He will give the quail to the old man. He 
will admire the dragon's teeth. The boy will give this 
to the geese. He will give this to Hannibal. O Philip, 
do not hurt the citizens. The artist painted the poet. 
He was admiring the Persian's house. The artist will 
persuade his judges. He will give the whips to his ser- 
vants. The fox persuaded the raven. The fox's cun- 
ning persuaded the lion. The boy bit the servant with 
his teeth. The girl soothed the boy's mind with her 
voice. The voice of law soothes the citizens. 



Lesson 2 3. 

(Contracts of the Third Declension.) 

[Contracted ace. plur. is like contracted nam. plur 





h 


h 


71 


6 


TO 


o 


Sing. 


TQlfo 


hi- 


nol- 


™\l- 


aar- 


PaoiX- 


N. 


VQ 


CO 


i? 


vg 


V 


svg 


G. 


sog, ovg 


oog, ovg 


sag 


smg 


Eog 


s'cog 


D. 


SI, El 


01, 01 


si 


El 


El 


H 


A. 


sa, tj 


6a, co 


IV 


vv 


V 


t'd 


V. 


eg 


01 


I 


V 


V 


EV 


Dual. 














N.A.V. 


ss, rj 


hi™ 


ss 


ES 


EE 


EE 


G.D. 


s'oiv, olv 


2nd dec. 


ECpV Z 


ECpV 2 


EOIV 


SO IV 


Plural. 














N.V. 


ssg, eig 


Tj X Ot 


sig 


sig 


V 


sig 


G, . . 


EO)V, COV 


2nd dec. 


scov 


scov 


SCOV 


S03V 


D. 


sai 




SOI 


SGI 


SOI 


svai 


A. 


sag, sig 




sig 


sig 


n 


sig. 



1 Form it from root of future 6^. 

2 cwv according to all the old grammarians ; but iow is the form found 
in MSS. 



48 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Remarks. 

(1) zb TH%og like tQiqoyg, but neut. phir. rslx-sa, idi-->\. 

(2) vg, G. vog, contracts N. and A. plur. into vg. ii&vg, 
N. and A. plur. ix&vg. 

(3) to xe'oag (horn), G. arog, but drops t, and then 

Sing. G. m'gaog xigcog D. xjioaf" x£0« 
Dual, xt'gae nsga G. D. aegdoiv xegyv. 
Plural, xegaa yJga G. aegdcov xegaiv D. xsgaai. 

( TFbrcfo £/m£ suffer syncope. 1 ) 
76. IJattjQ, (irjztiQ, -O-vyaTriQ, yaaryg, throw away s in 
G. U. sing, and D. pi. They also have V. eg, and in- 
sert a before ai in D. />/. 'Avfjg has uvSq-os, £ a, (fee. V. 
«>'££>. D. 2-*/. ardgden. 

i] fxr]rrig, " £Ae mother P 





Sing. 




Dual. 


Plur. 


N. $ 


M 7T ]Q 






N. at uqzt'gsg 


G. 7//£ 


{ fjitjif'gog 


N. 
A. 


1 [ 


G. 7001' < r ' - 




I mtqos 


> ra fii]Tt'gs 


^ [Xf]zg<av 


D. 7?j 
A. t^p 


I firjrgi 
(trjTt'ga 


V. 
G. 
D. 


• ralv \M]t£gaiv 


D. raTg fiTjrgdai 
A. 7«s,- fit]Tsgag 
V. fttj7Egeg 


V. 


M™Q 












6 dri]g, " the man.'" 2 






Sing. 




Dual. 


Plur. 


N.6 

G. 70l> 

D. 79 


dvfiQ 

{ dvegog 
( dfSgog 
{ dvt'gt, 
I dvdgi 


l 

Y. 


» { dvt'ge 

> 7W < v / 

i ( avogs 


, T < ^ dvt'geg 

I avdgeg' 

si ~ <j avmoop 
Ijr. 7C0I> v ' »• - 
^ afOOOOJ* 

D. 70^ dvdgdai 


A. 70V 


{ dvt'gu 
£ dvdoa 


G. 
D. 


) « ^ dvwoiv 
^ ^ avogoiv 


. , ( dve'gag 


V. 


dveg 






^ avdgeg 











1 Syncope=lhe taking away of one or more letters from the body of a 
word. 

2 Answering to wY in Latin. 







ADJECTIVES. 


77. Vocabulary 


12 




Father 

Star 

Daughter 

Belly 

Ceres 

Lamb 




narrJQ 

acrfjQ, 6 

■&vydrrjQ 

yaorrjQ, t) 

/Ji]fjirjjrjQ 

dgtjv, uqvoc, 6 et r). 




E 


xercise 17. 



m 



78. O father, persuade the poet. He will give this 
to his father. He admired the artist's daughter. The 
Scythian hurt the wild-beast's belly. O Ceres, do not 
injure the citizens of Greece. The artist painted Ceres. 
The daughter saw Philip's mother. The mother will 
persuade her daughter. The father chastised the boy. 
Do not hurt the girl. See the stars, O boy. He brought 
the lamb to Ceres. The fox bit the lamb's foot. The 
men admired the temple of Minerva. He saw the two- 
statues of Mercury. 



VII. ADJECTIVES. 1 

Lesson 24. 

79. S3 3 Adjectives are declined like substantives, 
and are of three declensions : 

(1) The first comprises adjectives of three termina- 
tions. 

(2) The second, those of two termin. 

(3) The third, those of one termin. 

80. Adjectives of three terminations in og, rj, ov, and 
og, a, ov, are declined in the masc. and neut. like nouns 
of the second decl., and in the femin. like a noun of the 

1 See Appendix, §§ 1 — 3. 



14 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



first decl. Other adjectives of three termin. are declined 
like nouns of the third decl. 

81. Adjectives of two terminations in og, ov, are de- 
clined like nouns of the second decl. ; the remainder 
like nouns of the third decl. 

82. Adjectives of one termin. are declined for the 
most part like nouns of the third decl. 

Examples. 



mas. 
N. dya&og 
G. dya&ov 
D. dya&aj 
A. dya&ov 
Y. dya&s 



dya&og, " good" 
Sing, 
fern. 
dya&r\ 
dya&rjg 
dya&y 
dya&tjv 
dya&i] 



N. A. V. dya&m 
G. D. dya&oiv 

N. dya&oi 
G. dya&oiv 
D. dya&oT? 
A. dya&ovg 
Y. dya&ot 



N. ix&Qog 
G. iy&gov 

D. fy&Q$ 

A. ty&qov 
Y. £#i^ s ' 

N. A. Y. %%» 

G. D. i%&Qoiv 



Dual, 
dya&d 
dya&aiv 

Plur. 
dya&ai 
dya&wv 
dya&aig 
dya&dg 
dya&ai 

" hateful, hostile." 

Sing. 
£%&qd 

iy&Qa 

iy&gdv 

il&Qd 

Dual. 
k#Qd 
eyOQaiv 



neut. 
dya&ov 
dya&ov 
dya&oj 
dya&ov 
dya&ov 

dya&co 
dya&oTv 

dya&d 

dya&mv 

dya&oTg 

dya&d 

dya&d 



£%Qqov 

Fy&QOV 

ix&Q$ 
i'X&gov 

i%&QOV 
?X&Q03 

i%&QoTv 





ADJECTIVES. 


4J 






Blur. 




N. £%&QOl 




£X&Qai 


?X&Qci 


G. fy&Qav 




i%&Q.mv 


ix&Qoiv 


D. i%&QOig 




iX&Qccig 


sX^Qoig 


A. ii&govg 




i%&Q<xg 


ix&Qa 


Y. %#igo* 




i^OQat 


ix&Qa 




L 


esson 25. 




83. Vocabulary 


13. 






Base, disgraceful 


at6XQk l 




Wise, clever 




oocpog 




Friendly, dear 




qiD.og 




Empty 




xsvog 




Beautiful 




xalog 




An enemy 




i%&()6g (used substantively) 


A friend 




qilog 


do. 


He was 




7 






Exercise 18. 





£d= What do abstract nouns often take? (p. 34, 
note 1.) 

84. He will persuade his dear father by his words. 
Empty wisdom will persuade the citizens. He wonders 
at the wise young man. He is hateful to the wise. O 
young man, do not pursue empty cleverness. He won- 
ders at the words of the base flatterer. The speech is 
disgraceful. He admired the wise geometer. The poet 
will admire the (two) wise geometers. He is friendly to 
the good. O geometer, do not hide thy wisdom. The 
boy admired the dove's beautiful head. He will pursue 



1 Adjectives ending in oj pure (i. e. oj preceded by a vowel) and pos, 
make the /em. in a (as £%0pfc) ; but 00s (when not poos) makes fem. in n 
(thus bydooi, v> Of). 



48 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



the dear young man. He will paint the beautiful heads 
of the boys. He will hurt the flatterer's hateful head. 
The flatterer will persuade the young man by his base 
words. He admired the wise artists. iEneas's ship was 
in the sea. The good boy is a friend to wisdom. The 
empty chatterer was hostile to Philip the good. A beau- 
tiful girl is in the house. Write, O Hannibal, to the boy's 
mother. The two-feet of the man will pursue base 
Philip. The Muses are dear to poets. The servants of 
Anchises saw the two-eagles' claws. 





Lesson 26. 




(Contracted Nouns.) 


Sing. 


rj, trireme. 


to, wall. 


f„ (echoing) sound. 


Nom. 


rpifipn; 


TU%OS 


*X* 


Gen. 


Tpifipeo; rpifipovs 


rei X eos re( X ovs 


V X 6os i) X ovs 


Dat. 


TpifipeC rpinpei 


TCI^ti' TCl X €l 


r\ X 6'C i] X oi 


Ace. 


Tpinpea rptfipri 


hT'xos 


n X 6a ijx<* 


Voc. 


rpiripes 


TU X OS 


fi X oT 


Dual. 








N. A. V. 


rptfipez rpinpri 


reives Tei X r) 


[LT The dual and plu 


G. D. 


rpiripioiv rpir/poiv 


Ttiyioiv rei X oXv 


ral follow the second de 


Plural. 






clension. (Dual, r) X io 


Nom. 


rpifipees rpifipetg 


re( X ca T£ 'X'? 


pi. fi X oi, &c.) 


Gen. 


rptrjpEoiv rpirjp&v 


TtlJ^iblV T£l%G~jl/ 




Dat. 


rpifipsat (v) 


rd X e<n (") 




Ace. 


Tpifipea; rpivpeig 


T ei X ea Tti X n 




Voc. 


rpifipees rpifipus 


T£L X ea Tei X ri 




85. Vocabulary 14. 


Beauty xallog, to 


Strength, force ftsvog " 


Flower iivQog " 


Mountain ogog " 


True alrj&rjg (two terminations) 


Accurate axQi^/jg 


False ipsvdtjg 


Self-satisfied, vain uv&adrjg 



TpirjpeS) GOItling 



rpinpwv, GOttling. 



CONTRACTED NOUNS. 47 

Persuasiveness, per- 



suasion, proof \ ' ' 

Temple t>aog, 6 

To build, colonize xr%- 

To rot (titans.) nv&-. 

XCr Imitate this order : 

r\ axQifiig cocpia, accurate wisdom. 

i] zov noiTjtov anQi§ri<; aocpia, the poet's accurate wisdom. 

Exercise 1 9. 

[How are adjectives in qg declined ? (Like TQitjQijg for 
the mas. and fern. ; like rnxog, for the neuter ; except 
that the termination of the nom. is eg, not og.) — The con- 
tracted forms are to be used.] 

86. The poet will build a temple to Persuasion. He 
painted the self-satisfied young man. He wonders at 
the strength of the flame. He admires the poet's flowers. 
He will admire the geometer's accurate wisdom. The 
earth will rot the artist's bones. True wisdom will per- 
suade the citizens. He soothed the poet's mind by his 
persuasiveness. The persuasiveness of his words will 
soothe the judge's mind. The damsel soothed the young 
man by her beauty. False wisdom hurts. The per- 
suasiveness of false wisdom soothed the self-satisfied 
young man. He wondered at the strength of the giants. 
He admired the temple of Persuasion. The geometer 
will build a temple to accurate wisdom. True honour 
soothes the poet's mind. The boy was admiring the 
beauty of the eagles. The poet admired the beauty of 
the mountains. He admires the walls of the temple. 
The boy admires his father's true wisdom. The citizen 
built a temple to Ceres. The geometer admires the 
accurate laws of wisdom. The boy stole the poet's flow- 
ers. The citizen admired the lawgiver's accurate 
wisdom. 



48 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Lesson 27. 
(Contracted Nouns. — Seej). 41.) 



s. 


>?, city. 


Plur. 


S b, ell. 


Plur. 


S. t6, city. 


Nom. 


TT0\lS 


tt6\sis 


nrjxvs 


nrj^.'S 


acrv 


Gen. 


TToXeo; 


tt6\€(ov 


TTfl^CCOS 


7rij^£o)!' 


aareog 


Dat. 


TT6\£l 


n6\cai (i/) 


TT>JX ei 


izfixscn (i/) 


aarsi 


Ace. 


Tt6\tV 




^X W 




llcrrv 


Voc. 


TTOXl 




nrj%v 




liarv 


Dual. 






Dual. 




Dual. 


N. A. V. 


ir6\es 




7Tf, x ce 




Sores 


G.D. 


k6\s V v 1 




nfix eo , iv 




aoreoiv 



Plur. 

aart) 
dcreaiv 
aareai (y) 



(1) Adjectives in vg (neut. v) have the regular G. wg 
(without contraction), and do not contract cain the neut. 
plural. — tjdvg. Neut. rjdv. G.tjdtog. PLrfiug. Neut.rjdia. 



87. Vocabulary 15. 

Serpent 

Axe 

Sharp 

Wine 
Sleep 



oqng, o 
nslsxvg, 6 
6£vg, sia, v 
olvog, o 
vnvog, 6. 



rig note; who in the world? 
if, note ; why in the world ? 



£3=- (Eng.) I will 
(Greek.) I will 
omitted. 



jive some wine. 
*ive of the wine; 



some' being 



Exercise 20. 

88. Who in-the- world built the city? 2 Why in-the- 
world did he build the cities ? He hurt the boy with his 
axe. Who in-the- world stole the axes ? He is soothing his 
mind with sweet sleep. Sleep is sweet to artists. The 
artist's axe was sharp. Who in-the-world will bring 



1 or TTokiotVj irt)xioiv. 



1 tt6\i; is to be used for city. 



CONTRACTED NOUNS. 49 

the axe ? He will give (some) of the sweet wine to the 
boy. Who in-the-world built the beautiful temple to 
Ceres? Why in-the-world does he admire false wis- 
dom? The Scythian wonders at the force of wine. 
The sweet voice of his mother soothes the boy. Sweet 
sleep soothes the wise poet. The poet admires the 
beauty of the city. He will admire the beauty of the 
two-cities. The boy admires the beauty of his whip. 
Who in-the-world stole the boy's whip ? He will give 
this to the swallows. The boy admired the beautiful 
serpent. The boy will admire the beauty of the ser- 
pent. The sweet voice soothed the two-beautiful ser- 
pents. 



Lesson 28. 



(Contracted Nouns.) 

(1) vg, G. vog, contracts N. and A. plur. into vg. ty&vg, 
N. and A. plur. l%&vg. 

(2) to xsQ&'g (horn), G. atog, but drops t, and then con- 
tracts. 

Sing. G. xs'oaog, xtqcog. D. xiqcu, mqu- 

Dual. xsQas, yjga. G. D. xsqccoiv, xbqojv. 

Plural, xt'oaa, xega. G. xsouodv, xeoav. D. xloaai. 



89. Vocabulary 16. 




A wonder 


ri'oag, to 


Reward 


p'oug, " 


Old-age 


yVQag, " 


Flesh 


xoiag u 


Stag 


elayog, 6 


Fish 


ly&vg, ii&vog, &c. 



(1) zEoag generally keeps the r in the singular. The 
other three never have it ; and in Attic Greek always 
appear in the contracted form. 



50 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Exercise 2 1. 

90. The stag will hurt the boy with his horn. The 
boy admired the stag's beautiful horns. The Scythian 
admires the rewards of wisdom. I will give (some) of 
the flesh to the lions. The artist admires the beauty of 
the horn. He admires the old age of the good judge. 
The lion hid the flesh 1 in 2 the earth. The wild-beast 
will hide (some) of the flesh. The artist stole the beau- 
tiful statues. The boy was looking towards the beau- 
tiful fish. Who in-the- world hurt the stag's head with 
his axe? The damsel admires the beauty of the fish. 
He will admire the beautiful walls of the city. The 
flesh of the quail is sweet. The poet admired the sweet 
song of the nightingale. 



Lesson 2! 



(Contracted Nouns. Pure Verhs.) 1 



Sing, o, king. 

(iaoilEvg 

finotle'cog 

fiuoilt'd 
fiaailsv 



Dual. 



(jaotlt'e 
ftaailioiv 



Plural. 
fiaGikng 4 
fiaoiXt'cov 
fiaoilevai (v) 
fiuoilmg et fiaailtig 
paaileTg. 



91. Vocabulary 17 

Horseman 
Priest 
To love 
To sell 



ITTTTEVg 

iegevg 

qstls- 
nbils-. 



33= Pure verbs whose roots end in e, change e into 
before g. — q>ils, root of fut. q>i!ng-. 



1 Flesh to eat is Kpia;, not <rapf. " h with dat. 

8 Pure verbs are those whose roots end in a vowel (see note 1, p. 3]) 

4 Old Att. SaffiXfjs. 



EXERCISES ON THE DECLENSIONS. 51 

Exercise 22. 

92. The king will give this to the horsemen. The 
boy wondered-at the king. The geometer will sell the 
statue to the king. The mother will love her good 
daughter. O king, soothe the citizens. The young 
man will give (some) of the flesh to the dragons. The 
judge wonders-at the force of truth. The horseman 
wonders-at the rewards of the citizens. Who in-fhe- 
world sold the doves to the horsemen? He will give 
this to the priests of Ceres. He admired the teeth of the 
beautiful serpent. Why in-the- world did he write the 
letter? The song of the nightingale soothes the mind 
of the poet. The voice of the dove is sweet. The sweet 
voice of the dove soothes the mind 1 of the poet. He 
will love the boy. He sold the house. 



Lesson 30 



{Of the ace. sing, in the third decl. See 64, a.) 

(1) The third pi. of pres. and fut ends in ovai. 
The first sing, and third plur. of the imperf. end in ov. 
The third plur. of the aorist 2 ends in av. 
Pres. rv7Tz-ovoi : fut. vvxp-ovai : imperf. t-rvm-ov : aor. 
s-zvxp-av. 

93. Vocabulary 18. 

Oak 8qv, nom. Sqvq, 

Hope ilmd, " eWg, 

Foot nod, " novg, 

Strife igid, " itQig, 

To fly from ^£17- 



1 See 59 (d). 

2 That is, of the only aorist we have hitherto given : the first aorist. 





ace 


. 8qvv 




>h 


" 


tXniSa 




0, 


" 


7z68cc 




>b 


" 


'£qiv et eg 


8a 



52 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Pleasure 
Bad 
Life 
Virtue 


rjdovrj 
xaxog 
§iog, 6 
aQEvrj 


Old-man 
Historian 


yt ; Q(ov, ovtog 
avyyoaqs&vg. 




Exercise 23. 



94. Good hope soothes the poet's mind. Sweet sleep 
flies-from the bad. The good fly-from base pleasure. 
The good admire the beauty of virtue. Base pleasures 
hurt the mind. O boy fly-from base pleasures. The 
life of the good is sweet. The wise fly-from flatterers. 
The stags will hurt the boys with their horns. The 
words of virtue will persuade the good citizens. The 
serpent hurt the poet's foot. O boy, fly-from strife. 
Strife is hateful. Who in-the-world loves strife ? He 
hurt the young man with his feet. 



Lesson 31. 
(Vocat. of the third decl.) 

P^r 3 Repeat the rules for the vocat of the third ; 66 

(2), (4), (5). 

Exercise 24. 

95. O orator, do not hide the geometer's wise words. 
O old man, do not look towards the sea. O boy, do not 
steal. O city, do not admire empty wisdom. O histo- 
rian, wonder-at the force of accurate wisdom. O son-of- 
Atreus, admire the Greeks. O boy, admire the strength 
of the Greeks. O Greek, do not admire false wisdom. 
O boy, look towards the house of the old man, and ad- 
mire the wisdom of the Greek. 



IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 



• r )3 



IN. fisyag 
G. fieydXov 
T). [isydXqy 
A. niyav 
V. peyag 



N. A. V. psydXco 
G. D. fxeydloiv 

N. ftsydXoc 
G. peydXcov 
D. fisydXoig 
A. fisydXovg 
V. psydXoi 



mas. 

N. TTO^Vff 
G. TToHov 

D. j7oM.<p 
A. noXvv 
V. jzoAv 

N.A.V.ffoJUw 
G. D. ^o^.^o«» 

N. noXXoi 
G. rcoHrav 
D. noXXoig 
A. noXXovg 
V. noXXoi 



Lesson 32. 
(Irregular Adjectives.) 



\iiyag, "great? 

Sing. 

fern. 
peydXt] 
[tsydXqg 
HEyd).xi 
[xeydXqv 
fiaydXrj 

Dual. 
fieydXcc 
[leydXcuv 

Flur. 
fieydXai 
fAEydXmv 
fiEydXaig] 
fxsydXag 
ftsydXcu 



noXvg, "much." 

Sing. 

fern. 
TtoXXri 
noXXrjg 
noXXy 
moXXtjv 
noXXri 

Dual. 
noXXd 
noXXaiv 

Plur. 
noXXai 
noXXStv 
noXXoug 
noXXdg 
noXXai 



neut. 
fiiya 
[isydXov 
(isydXoc) 
[isya. 
fisya 

(lnydXco 
(isydXoiv 

fisydXa 

fieydXcov 

fisydXoig 

fxsydXa 

fisydXa 



neut. 
noXv 
noXXov 
noXXai 
noXv 
noXv 

noXXco 
noXXolv 

noXXd 

noXXwv 

noXXoig 

noXXd 

noXXd 



54 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



N. nag 
G. navzog 
D. navri 
A. ndvra 
V. nag 

N. A. V. ndvre 
G. D. ndvtoiv 

N. ndvrsg 

G. ndvrcav 

D. Trafft 

A. ndvrag 

V. ndvrsg 



" all," ' 

Sing. 

fern, 
ndaa 
ndarjg 
ndarj 
ndaav 
ndaa 

Dual, 
ndaa 
ndaaiv 

Plur. 
ndaai 
naocov 
ndaaig 
ndaag 
naaai 



every. 



neut. 
ndv 
navrog 
navii 
ndv 
ndv 

ndvzs 
ndvtoiv 

ndvra 

ndvrwv 

ndai 

ndvra 

ndvra 



Exercise 25. 

96. All the Greeks saw the figs. Every poet loves 
the Muses. Wisdom brings honour to all men. All the 
arms of the young men were in the house. The boy's 
father loves the great claws of the eagle. Many men 
were persuading the geometer. iEneas has much (many 
things). The roses in the garden of the good judge are 
many and beautiful. O orator, admire every good art- 
ist. All the stags were looking towards the sea. Give 
good words to the citizens. The Greek has great 
strength. Who in-the-world hurt the boy's foot? Why 
in-the- world does the poet love Anchises? He saw 
many beautiful serpents. Sleep is sweet to the good. 
Why did Philip steal the baker's horse? iEneas built 
great houses in the city. The eagle's claws are in the 
fox's belly, O Hannibal. 



COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 



&5 



VIII. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 
Lesson 33. 

97. The forms of the comparative and superlative are 

(1) most commonly tsgog, tatog. 

(2) less commonly Tmv, tazog. 

98. Adjectives in og and vg reject the g before zsgog, 
zazog, the o being changed into co, if the preceding syl- 
lable is short. 

99. Adjectives in rj? and kg change these terminations 
into sg before zzgog, tatog. 

100. Adjectives in ag add tegog, tatog to the root. 

101. All other adjectives that take tegog connect it 
with the root by the syllable eg, sometimes ig. l 

102. The form uav, tatog is used — 

In some adjectives in vg and gog, these syllables being 
thrown away before the terminations. 



103. Vocabulary 19. 






Wise 


oayog 


aocpwzegog 


aoqicozazog 


Strong 


foxvgog 


ioyvgozegog 


iayvgozazog 


Heavy 


§agvg^ 


fiagvzegog 


ftagvzazog 


Pious 


evae^iqg 


ewefieazegog 


evoefieazazog 


Wide 


eigvg 


evgvzegog 


evgvtatog 


Graceful 


%agieig 


yagieazegog 


yagiiatatog 


Black 


fiiXag 


fieldvzegog 


(jielavtatog 


Sweet 


tjdvg 


TjdlOOV (l) 


qdictog 


Hateful 


\%&gog 


ly&icov (r) 


zX&iatog 


Base 


alaigog 


aidjfimv (?) 


aia/tatog. 




Exercise 2 6. 





Sd^ (1) The comparative is usually followed by the 
genitive case ; as, cocpategog (pilmnov, " wiser than 
Philip:' 



n belongs to the k sounds. 



Ob FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

(2) The superlative degree is also often followed by 
a genitive ; as, tj&«Jrog navrmv, " 'most hated of all." 

104. iEneas is a more graceful (person) than Philip. 
The dove's pinions are very-graceful (superl.) The 
mother of Anchises is more graceful than the daughter 
of the poet. He is the wisest of all (men). Who in-the- 
world is more base than the father of the ^Ethiopian ? 
A pious father loves good sons. The mother is-admiring 
her graceful daughter. The sea is wider than the earth. 
Philip is the strongest in the house. The voice of the 
nightingale is very-sweet. He is blacker than a 
raven. 



Lesson 34. 



{Irregular Comparisons.) 

tCj" These comparatives and superlatives are really 
from obsolete positives, but arranged for convenience 
under the positive with which they agree in meaning. 



105. Vocabulary 20. 






1. good 


dyctdog 


fisXriav 


ctgiatog 
§sXriarog 


2. painful 


dXysivog 


XQSIGOOJV 

dXylwv 


XQUUOTOg 

alyiaiog 


3. bad 


xaxog 


%eiQ(ov 


%si'Qiazog 


4. beautiful 


xaXog 


xaxiwv 
xaXXi(oi> 


xdxiarog 
xdXXiarog 


5. great 

6. little 
- (much 

(many 


ixtyag 

(MXQOg 

nolvg 


(A£lt,OiV 

iXdaaav 
( nXicov 
\ nXsimv 


fisyiazog 
eXd%ioTog 

TiXeloTog 


easy 


Qa8wg 


QO.03V 


Qaorog. 



IRREGULAR COMPARISONS. 57 

(Adverbs.) 



near 


ayp 


aoaov 


uy%i<jTa 


very 


fiula 


paXXov, 


more fidXiara 


little 


[IIXQOV 


ijoaov 


rjxusta (least of all=by 
no means). 



td 3 Comparatives in a>v sometimes drop v from ova, 
oveg, and ovag, and then contract oa into co ; osg and oag 
into ovg. 

Thus [*£%ova becomes fAsi^co. 

****** { become ne&vg. 

Exercise 2 7. 

106. The daughter of Ceres has a very beautiful sta- 
tue. The father loves (his) daughter. She is better 
than Philip. The dragon's teeth are greater than the 
feet of the wild beast. Who in-the-world saw a more 
beautiful girl, the daughter of the good judge? Most of 
the citizens were Greeks. The Scythians are the worst 
of all base persons. O best son of the best father ! The 
men are worse than the boys. The geometer has a 
better mind than the poet. The wisdom of Xenophon 
is greater than the wisdom of the two-citizens. Xeno- 
phon has a most excellent son. He loves (his) father 
more than his mother. The Greeks are worse than the 
Persians. Ceres loves most of all the flowers in the gar- 
den of the aiood mother. 



a* 



58 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



IX. THE FIRST FOUR NUMERALS. 









Lesson 3 5. 










eig, " one 


» 


dvo, "two." 






m. 


f; 


n. 






N. 


ilg 


[iia 


iv 


N. 8vo et 8vm 


N. 





G. 


ivog 


(img 


ivog 


G. dvolv et 8vi.lv 


G. 


dvcov 


D. 


SVl 


fiia 


iri 


D. dvolv 


D. 


dvai 


A. 


t'va 


(A LUV 


tv 


A. Svo 


A. 






roug, " three" 
N. TQEig TQtTg rni'a 
G. TQiav rgiaiv tqioSv 

D. 7QIGI 7QI61 IQiai 

A. TQtig TQSig roia 



Ttaaaosg, "four" 
N. rsaaageg ztaaageg tiaaaqu. 

G. 7E(J(jdQ03V 7£O6UQ03V 7EaO<XQ03V 

D. rs'oauQGi rtaaaoai TtoactQai 
A. ziacaqag ttooaoag ttaaaga 



107. $CjT The cardinal numbers from newe, Jive, to 
exuTov, a hundred, are indeclinable (see Appendix, § 3.) 

Exercise 27. 

108. They saw four men in the house of Xenophon. 
The two-good boys were wondering at the two nightin- 
gales. They brought three very beautiful flowers to 
the poet's dining-room. One of the Greeks was looking 
at the armour of the Persians. Philip wrote two letters 
to his beautiful daughter. O orator, do you not see the 
four eagles, the two nightingales, and the three serpents ? 
O poet, love the muses most-of-all. The citizens have 
this. Give, O servants, the swallows to the best boy of all. 
The armour of the five men was in Anchises' hands. 
The honey of Greece is very sweet. Xenophon will 
love it much. Among («V) the Persians are beautiful 
girls and boys. They are more graceful than the Greeks. 
The shepherd's dogs were looking at the three foxes. 
They saw four bodies. Milk is very good for boys. 
Ceres has two temples in Greece. On Mount- Athos the 
dogs are very good. Philip is easy towards his daughter. 



BARYTONE VERBS. 59 

X. BARYTONE 1 VERBS. 
Lesson 36. 

109. The Present, Perfect, and Future, are prin- 
cipal tenses ; all the others secondary or historical tenses. 

110. The historical tenses have all an " augment" 
in the indicative mood: that is, e prefixed, if they begin 
with a consonant ; a lengthening of the vowel (when 
possible) if they begin with a vowel, [e prefixed is 
called the syllabic, the lengthening of the vowel the 
temporal augment.] 

111. The augments of— 

e, a, o, t, v, av, at, a, 01, 
are r\, tj, <x>, T, v, qv, ?/, rj, q>. 

112. si, ev, ov, and the long vowels tj, a, are not aug- 
mented, ev is sometimes augmented by the Attics (tjv)] 
who also in slxd^co augment si. Imp. ijxa^ov. 

(Reduplication.) 

113. The perfect takes a reduplication, when it be- 
gins with any single consonant but q ; or with any mute 
and liquid, except yv, and sometimes yl and fil. 

114. The reduplication is a syllable prefixed, made 
up of the initial consonant of the verb and e [rvn, re- 
ivri). But if the verb begins with an aspirate, the smooth 
is used for the reduplication : qsvy, nEcpsvy. 

115. The reduplication does not occur, but the sim- 
ple augment instead of it, when the verb begins with q ; 
with two consonants without a liquid ; or with yv (yl, 
ft). 

[The double consonants xp, £, £, are considered as two 
consotiants.] ipall, sxpal).. yvo, lyvo. 

116. Obs. Several with yl take only e. Some be- 
ginning with I, fi, take ei : It] ft, fisto, — siltjq), Eijiaq. 

1 See 36, p. 17. 



6§ 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



117. When the perfect does not take a reduplication, 
it takes an augment. 

S^ The reduplication or augment of the perfect 
remains through the moods and in the participle. 

118. When the perfect takes a reduplication, the plu- 
perfect prefixes the augment to it. But when the per- 
fect takes an augment, the pluperfect makes no further 
change. 

119. Verbs that begin with q, double q after the aug- 
ment; and the perfect and pluperfect take the syllabic 
augment, not the reduplication. Qamm, tQQaqia, f^(5a- 
q>eiv. 

{Concurrence of Consonants.) 

120. When two consonants come together in the for- 
mation of tenses, &c, the former is often changed. 

121. The principal changes of this kind are given in 
the following table, which is arranged as the multipli- 
cation table 1 often is : 



Any p sound with 
Any k sound with 
Any t sound with 



r 


d 


& 


a 


(*> 


nr 

XT 

at 


§5 

yd 

2 


a& 


a 


pep 

fi* 

6jt 



Lesson 37. 

(Barytone Verbs Continued.) 

(N.) 
122. v before a p sound or \p becomes fi. 
v before a k sound or £ becomes y. 
v before a liquid becomes that liquid. 



The table is to be said both ways : 

(1.) Any p sound with t=tt, &c. 
(2.) Or, TTT=zany p sound with r, &c. 

This combination does not occur. 



BARYTONE VERBS. 61 

v before a or £ is generally thrown away. [It is 
retained before aai in perf. pass.] 

123. When a would stand between two consonants, 
it is thrown away. 

124. When a t sound and v are both thrown away 
before <y, the remaining vowel, if short, is changed into 
a diphthong ; if a doubtful one, it is lengthened. £ be- 
comes ei : o becomes ov. 

125. An aspirate is not doubled, but the first is 
changed into its smooth: the same change occurs when 
the first (alone or followed by q) is separated from the 
second by a vowel. 

Short Root. 

126. Some tenses of verbs are derived from a shorter 
root than that which appears in the present tense. 

127. The short root can often be obtained from the 
longer one, by changing a diphthong into a simple vowel ; 
a long vowel into its kindred short one; or throwing 
away one of two consonants. 

128. If tj has arisen from a, a will re-appear in the 
short root : firj&, pad. 

129. Of diphthongs and double letters, the last is 
thrown away. But in £ (= ad) and sv, the first letter is 
thrown away : si before a mute has i in the short root, 
u before a liquid e. 

130. 
(Long) nroi, ay.ov, pall, rvnr, pr]&, teiv, Ieitt, qisvy, (jp(?a£, 
(Short) nvo, uy.o, pal, ivn, iia$,zi:V, hn, cpvy, q>oad. 

(Formation of the Tenses.) 

[The names of the historical tenses are in italics ; 
those to which t is prefixed are from the short root ; and 
so are the other tenses (except imp erf.) when the root 
of the pres. ends in two consonants.] 

131. (a) Barytone verbs (i. e. those that end in w), are 



62 



FIRST GKEEK LK.SSOAS. 



called mute, pure, or liquid, according as their charac- 
teristic is a mute, a vowel, or a liquid. 



(b) Present 

Imp erf. 

Perf. I. 

Pluperf. I. 
tPerf. II. 
tPluperf. II. 

Aorist I. 
1vlor/s£ II. 

Fut. I. 
tFut. II. 

Fut. III. or 

Paulo-post Fut. 



^4ci. 



Md. 



opiai 

6/xrjV 



xa or a 




\10LI 




xfijj' or ay 




prp> 


a 




(none) 


£<y 




(none) 


era 


aaf.ii]V 




■&tiv 


OJ' 
(7 CO 

oj (eeo) 


opirjv 
oofj.ai 

OVfAUl 


iofiat) 


7]V 

{tijaofiai 
riaofiai 



with root of perf .pass, aoftca 



132. Remarks. 

(1) 'The first aor. act. of liquid verbs ends in a with- 
out the a. 

(2) In the perf. act. a, sir, are to be used for mute 
verbs, whose characteristic is a p or k sound. The 
rough breathing shows that the preceding mute must be 
changed into its aspirate. Thus rhvn-a, becomes tkzvya. 

(3) The future 2 act. and mid. are peculiar to liquid 
verbs ; but the fut. 2 pass, is a really existing tense, 
whenever the verb has aor. 2 pass. 

(4) When the verb has a mid. voice, the tenses that 
constitute it are the mid. forms, and the pres., imperf., 
perf., pluperf., of the pass. form. Perf. II. (generally- 
called the perfect middle) has not mid. meaning. 

(c) On the Second Aorist ', 

(1) When the root of the present is incapable of being 
shortened, the second aorists act. and mid. would be 



1 Comparatively few verbs have the second aorist in the act. and 
mid. ; but more have it in the passive. 



PERFECT OF MUTE VEKBS. 63 

exactly like the imperfects. Such verbs may, however, 
have aor. 2 pass., because that tense' is distinguished 
from the imperfect by its termination, rgmco has, with 
change of vowel, hQanov. 

(2) The second aorist is also wanting in verbs that 
are formed from other words by the regular derivative 
endings, «'£<», /£<», aivw, evoj, dm, eco, oca. 



Lesson 3 8. 
{On the formation of the root of the Perfect for mute verbs.) 

(1) For the p and k sounds the reduplication or aug- 
ment (according to rules 113, &c, p. 59) must be pre- 
fixed, and the final p or k sound changed into its aspi- 
rate ; the i having first been rejected, if the verb ends 
in nz or xx. [See Table in 121, p. 60.] 

Examples. 
t(h/3- perfi xEzoTq- 

IVTl {f)- 7£7t>qp- 

dfistp rjftEtq)- 

tiXex- 7Z£7Tlex- 

(2) For t sounds the / sound must be changed into x, 
the root having been reduplicated or augmented as before. 

EQElS- ?]OEtX- XpEvd- FlpEVX- 

(3) The termination of the third singular is s. 

£d= Obs. £ is treated like a t sound : cg. xx like a k 
sound, where no different direction is given. 

Exercise 28. 

133. He has injured the city. He has carved 1 ihe 

1 y\v<pw may take either the reduplication or the augment. B. (See 
116, p. 59.) 



64 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

image. He has written the letter. The young man has 
pursued the lions. He has deceived his father's hopes. 
The boy has woven the flowers. The Persian has ad- 
mired the beauty of the city. The Scythian has admired 
the clever 1 arts of the Persian. The lawgiver has 
assembled the Scythians into the city. The young- 
man has pursued the pleasures of vice. The judge has 
chastised the boys. He has made-himself-acquainted- 
with true wisdom. He pursued true pleasures. 



Lesson 39. 



(1) The pluperf. 3 sing, ends in «, added to the root 
of the perf. ; or, if the perfect has a reduplication, to the 
root of the perfect augmented. 

(2) Root of perf. rervcf- plup. 3 s. irervqi-si. 

" '' ypeicp- plup. 3 s. rjpeicp-Ei. 

Exercise 29. 

134. The Persian had written the letter. The young- 
man had pursued the wild-beasts. The lawgiver had 
chastised the vice of the (two) young-men. The bad 
citizen had injured the city. False wisdom had injured 
the young-man's mind. O young-man, do not pursue 
false wisdom. The base flatterer had concealed this. 
The wise artist had carved the beautiful statue. The 
self-satisfied young-man had written this. Pursue the 
true pleasures of virtue. The Persian will leave-off. 
The sweet pleasure of virtue soothes the mind. Who 
in-the- world will give the three roses to the boy % Philip 
had stolen the shepherd's dog. He is a most base (per- 
son) and has injured the daughter of the good judge. 
Anchises has a better house than 2 iEneas. Xenophon 
had brought a beautiful dove to Greece. 



MUTE VERBS. 



65 



XI. MUTE VERBS, 

(Including those in Trr.) 

Lesson 40. 

135. The verbs in nz have a p sound for their true 
characteristic. As all the p sounds are combined in 
the same way with other consonants, it is immaterial 
which of them is the true characteristic, except for 
aor. 2. 

136. The following should be remembered : 

fiXdjiTOj, KQvnrm, have for their true characteristic §. 
§dnzo3, Qama, Qantw, oxanzw, qitizco, dqimw (p. 

137. The following table gives one example of the 
changes that take place, when the consonant termina- 
tions are appended to the root. It must be understood, 
that what is told of them is told for all the terminations 
that beain with the same consonant. 



p sound 
k sound 
t sound 



Perf. 






Perf. Pass. Aor. 1 . Pass. 



fifiai 
I o/iai 



qs&r t v 



138. For the perf. 1. act. the p and k sounds take a, 
and aspirate the characteristic (in m the true charac- 
teristic) : the t sounds take y,a after throwing away the 
t sound. 



TtrQi,p-a=ri:ZQiq)a. rvnz 



short root 



zv7Z : ztzvn-a, ztzvqu. 



139. In monosyllabic roots, £ of the root is generally 
changed into a in the aor. 2. iqinm, aor. 2. izqanov. 

140. The same change takes place in the perf. pass, 
of azpe'ym, zQsepco (root -&Q£qi), tqmco (eazQafifiai, zt&QafXfxai, 
TezQafifiai). 



0(5 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



141. ev is sometimes changed into v in the per/, pass. 



cfEvy 



j, zavyvi : perf. pass, ns'cpvyuai, Tt'zvyfit 



142. Vocabulary 21. 

(Mute Verbs, p^ The consonant that is printed after 
some of the roots is their true characteristic. ' Fut. mid. 
means that the fut. act. is of the mid. form : i. e. ends in 



Hurt— p ass. aor. 2 

Look pass. aor. 2 

Carve 

Write -pass. aor. 2 

—Mid. 
Pursue 
Pluck, gather. — 

Mid. 
Warm, cherish 
Soothe, beguile 
Squeeze pass.aor. ' 
Steal. Fut. Mid.: 

pass. aor. 2 
Hide pass. aor. 1 

and 2. — Mid. 
Leave aor. 2. perf. 

2.— Mid. 
Leave off 
Plait, weave, pass. 

aor. 2.— Mid. 



pien 

ylvq> 

y Q acp 

5(03X 

8QE7T 

■Oalrr 
yIetix 

XQV7ZT Q3) 

Xsin 
tiIe-a 



Rot (trans.) 

Pass, rot in- 

trans. 
Hasten 
Twist, bend, turn. 

pass. aor. 1 

and 2. — Mid. 
Turn (back or the 

other way) ; 

rout (an army) 

Aor. 2 the 

most common 

in all the voi- 
ces. — Mid. 
Support,nourish. 

—Aor. 2. pass. -&QEcp (r^eqp 2 ) 

most common. 

—Mid. 
Deceive, beguile. 

—Mid. lie 



7TV& 



OTZEvd 



GZQEq) 



ZQETt 



\pEw8 



Lesson 41. 
143. Terminations of the Verb as far as yet wanted. 

1 The first pers. of the pres. tense is got by adding cj to these roots. 

2 The root dpef becomes rpsip by 125, but the tenses where the <f> dis- 
appears will begin with 0: e. g. fut. dpcipco. 



TENSES OF THE VERB. 67 

(1) Present, a. 
Imperf. ov. 

Fut. aw. — for liquid verbs a>, with short root. 
Aor. 1. aa. — for liquid verbs a, with the vowel of 

short root lengthened. 
Perf. a. — for all but the p and k sounds, %a. 
Plup. siv. — for all but the p and k sounds, xuv. 

(2) The fat. is formed (for all but liquid verbs) by 
adding w to the sigmated 1 root. 

144. The terminations of the present and future are— 

Pres rvTiT- \ ro HS Bl ) ^ Princ iP alten - 

-r, . ' < etov srov > ses have third dual 

r ut. 7vW- } 9 i ,i • j i i 

r ( ofiev ets ovoi . } ov i thud plural, ai. 

Exercise 30. 

145. He looks towards (agog, ace.) the sea. We will 
look towards the harbour. The artist is carving the sta- 
tue. You will write. They are pursuing. The young- 
man is pursuing the hare. The two-young-men are 
pursuing the Ethiopian. You (pi.) are looking towards 
the harbour. The boy is weaving the flowers. You 
(sing.) are plucking the flowers. He is looking towards 
the mountains. Sleep soothes the mind. You are 
soothing the young-man's mind. They-two are steal- 
ing the fox-skin. He soothes his mind with pleasure. 
The boy is hastening towards the old-man. The old- 
man supports the boy. We are deceiving the old-men. 
The elephant is hastening towards its master. We are 
writing. They are carving the statues. They will 
carve the statues. The clever artists will carve the sta- 
tues. I will carve a statue. We are plucking the flow- 
ers.- We will pluck the flowers. 



That is, the root formed by adding sigma. 2 For i 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Lesson 42. 



146. (1) The imperfect is got by augmenting the 
root, and adding ov. 

(2) The aorist is got for mute verbs by adding aa to 
the augmented root, and making the changes required 
by the rules for the concurrence of consonants [121-125, 
p. 60]. 

(3) Terminations. 

Imperfect. 



ov eg e 

erov eriqv 

0(lEV £7£ OV. 



Aorist I. 

a ag s 

aiov uti]v 

afiw azs av. 



(4) And observe, 
33P The principal teases have j «£** g^ 

The secondary tenses have j *|^ ^g; 

Tvnr-co. Imperf. l-rvm-ov. 

Exercise 31. 

33= What are the rules for the augment? (See 110, 
111.) 

147. He was looking towards the dove. He looked 
towards the sea. The dove was soothing the raven. 
You (pi.) were carving the statue. Vice was hurting 
the state. Vice hurts the state. The lawgiver was 
chastising the Persians. False pleasures hurt the soul. 
Pleasure soothes the soul. Thou wert soothing thy soul 
with pleasure. The boy was wondering-at the root of 
the vine. Ye were looking towards the sea. The boy 
was writing a letter. The young-man cherished the 
old-man. Thou wert looking towards the harbour. 
The harbour looks towards the south-wind. The boy 
was plucking the geometer's flowers. The artist pur- 



TENSES OF THE VERB. 69 

sued the Persian. Ye were writing the letters. He was 
stealing the dove. They were hiding the thong. You 
{pi.) are hiding your desire of wisdom. Love is the root 
of wisdom. I pursued the Persians. You (s ing.) wove 
the flowers. You-two injured the city. They hurt 
the cities. 



Lesson 43, 



148. ( 1) To form the perf. for p or k sounds. Prefix 
the reduplication or augment ; write cp, i respectively, 
for the p or k sound, anaput on the termination «. 

#jf> Obs. tit, y.t are to be treated as simple p and k 
sounds. 

(2) Examples: film- fit-pXeqi-u. 

plant- (is-flXaqha. 
nXzx- ftE-nXe^-a. 

(3) The pluperfect is got from the root of perfect by 
augmenting it (unless it is already augmented), and add- 
ing uv. 

i-fie-pXdcp-ei, &c. 

(4) Terminations of the Perfect. 

a as £ 

arov arov 

afisv ate act 1 

(5) Terminations of the Pluperfect. 

eiv EIQ El 

eitov Eirr\v 

Ei(itv size siaav or eoav 

Exercise 32. 

^r3=" Give the rules for Reduplication (113-119). 

149. Thou hast written the clever letter. I have 

1 For avTvi. 



70 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

carved the statue. You-two have injured the city 
by your vice. The-two young-men had injured the 
cities of the Greeks. Ye had written the letters. I had 
carved the beautiful statues. Ye had pursued the hares. 
Ye pursued false wisdom. False wisdom had injured 
their minds. They had injured the minds of the young- 
men by their false wisdom. You [sing.) had injured 
the cities of the Persians. The-two artists have carved 
the statue. Thou hadst carved the beautiful statues. 



XII. VERBS IN ^rr,(. 

(All of which are lengthened forms from* simpler roots.) 

Lesson 44. 

150. Most of the verbs in era- or tt have a k sound for 
the true characteristic : but some of them a t sound. 

raaaoo (ray) ; q^Qiaaco (<$(>m) ' firjaaa) (fii}%). 

151. Most of the verbs in £ have 5 for their true char- 
acteristic ; but some of them y. 

cpQd£(o (g^a5) ; ot,co (68) ; but xod^oj (xQay). 

152. Consequently verbs in aa, rt follow the k or t 
sounds : verbs in £ the t or k sounds. 

153. yld£(o, ahi£co, and oalni£,w, have roots ending in 
yy, xldy^oj, xexlayya, &c. 

154. Vocabulary 22. 

Assemble (trans.) d&Qoi^ 

Force. — pass. pidt,o[Aai 
Make known : make myself acquainted with p^ 

Admire, wonder (at),/w£. mid. -&av[ia£ 

Reap &sqi£ 

Proclaim xtjqvgg 

Chastise, fut. mid. xolat, 



TENSES OF THE VERB. 71 

Bring, take. — Mid. receive, obtain xo/«£ 

Build, found mit, 

Am of opinion; think fdfu£ 

Bewail, fut. m id. oinwt,(y) 

Do: a long throughout.— Per/. 1. have done 

(trans.) : 2. have done (= am well off, &c.) nqct<sa 
Order, arrange, appoint 1 raaa (ray) 

(1) Those in £<», given in this Vocabulary, have all a 
t sound for their true characteristic, except olneofa, which 
has a k sound, and therefore root of fut. olfim%. The im- 
perfect always retains the root of the present. 

(2) When the true characteristic is a t sound, the £ 
must be thrown away before the tenses that begin with 
g and x; that is, for all the other tenses, as far as yet 
given, of the active voice. 

Example. 

Principal. Historical. 

(Pr.) 6vopaX<a mvo/xa^ov (Imp.) 

(Fut.) dvofxci-oco (6v6(ia-aa (Aor. 1.) 

(Per/.) oovofttt-Ka covofid-xeiv (Plup.) 

(Pr.) vofii^co h'Ofii^ov (Imp.) 

(Fut.) vofii-oa h6fu-aa (Aor. 1.) 

(Per/.) vE-vopt-xa h-v£-voni-y.siv (Plup.) 

Exercise 33. 

What is the augment of a ? (Ill) Of oil (111) 

Obs. xti£(0 is to make habitable for the first time : 
hence of a country, to colonize. 

155. I was assembling the Persians. I will assemble 
the boys. I assembled the geometers of Greece. You 
(pi.) assembled the old-men into 2 the market-place. I 
shall make-myself-acquainted-with the soul. You will 

1 Of an army, draw-up. 2 et ' s with accus. 



72 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

found the city. They assembled the masters. He 
founded the cities. The king will found the cities. 
The master was chastising the Ethiopian. The boy 
was crying-out.'- He will chastise the boy. The Greek 
has brought the silver. The king of the Persians was 
colonizing the country. They have brought the silver. 
They had taken the silver into the market-place. He 
will chastise his desires. The lawgiver will chastise 
vice. The master punished (xold£co) the base trick. 
You (pi.) will punish the base tricks of the boys. He 
will admire the temples of Greece. 



Lesson 45. 
Exercise 34. 



156. He was chastising the shameless boy. The 
self-satisfied young-men will deceive his hopes. The 
shameless flatterer deceived the judge by his arts. The 
boy cried-out. The young-man has-made-himself-ac- 
quainted-with 2 the soul. I have-made-myself-acquaint- 
ed-with the nature of the soul. The king was assem- 
bling the horsemen. He injured (pianzm) the city. You- 
two had injured the city. He will assemble the good. 
The law-giver will punish 3 (xola'Qco) the shameless. He 
had made-himself-acquainted-with 2 the sweet pleasure. 
He will carve the statue. He has carved the statues. 
He chastised the Scythian with a thong. The lions 
pursued the Greek. He deceived his master by his per- 
suasion. The boy admired the horns. The boy has 

1 oijid^oj, to wail, or cry-out, especially of one who has been chas- 
tised. 

8 Does the perfect of yvuptfa take the reduplication or the syllabic 
augment? (115.) 

3 The fut. act. of KoXafa is used by good Attic writers ; e. g. Xeno 
phon and Plato, who also use the fut. mid., which is the usual form. 



TENSES OF THE VERB. 73 

admired the wings of the dove. The Scythian will hide 
the artist's axe. The Greek was admiring the waves of 
the sea. The Persian is admiring the harbours of Greece. 
The prophet soothed the Greeks by his wisdom. The 
Scythian will reap the ears-of-corn. The goats will de- 
ceive the shepherd's hopes. 



Lesson 4i 



157. (1) The verbs in ttod, asm, given in Vocabulary 
22, have all a k sound for their true characteristic. 

(2) Hence their futures and aorists end in £w, £a (the 
k sound with g becoming £) ; the perfects and pluperfects 
in %a, %£ii> (the k sound being changed into its aspirate 
(%), and the termination a, eiv, respectively, appended). 
See Table in 121, p. 60. 

Principal. Historical. 

(Pres.) q>vXnaao3 h-cpvlaoo-ov [Imp.) 

(put.) qivldla i-q>vla%-a (Aor. 1.) 

(Per/.) TiE-cpHa^-a e-necfvXdx-Etv (P hip erf.) 

Exercise 35. 

158. He will proclaim the safety of the city. He pro- 
claimed the victory. You {sing.) will proclaim the 
victory of the Greeks. They were proclaiming these 
things. 1 He will do these things. They were doing 
well. 2 He appointed the laws. He arranged the horse- 
men. He has done these things. You were doing these 
things. He proclaimed the victory of the soul. He has 
brought the silver. You (pi.) are appointing laws. 3 O 
lawgiver, thou art appointing laws for the city. The 
lawgiver looks to the preservation of the city. He has 
carved the statue of the geometer. 

1 ravTa. 8 ev. 3 vdpos. 



74 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



XIII. PRONOUNS. 

Lesson 47. 

159. Pronouns are divided into nine classes accord- 
ing to the different relations of the substantives which 
they represent. For the declensions of these several 
classes, let the learner turn to the Appendix, § 4. The 
demonstrative pronouns ovrog and ixshog are declined 
as follows : 

ovtog, u this." 
Sing: 



masc. 


fern. 


neut. 


N. ovzog 


avrt] 


TOVTO 


G. TOVTOV 


TUVTtjg 


TOVTOV 


D. TOVTCp 


ravtrj 


TOVTCp 


A. TOVTOV 


Tavtt]V 
Dual. 


TOVTO 


N. A. V. TOVTO) 


ravta 


TOVTCO 


G. D. T0VT01V 


TCCVTCtlV 
Plur. 


T0VT01V 


N. OVTOl 


avrai 


TCtVTCC 


G. TOVTCOV 


TOVTCOV 


TOVTCOV 


D. rovToig 


tavzaig 


TOVZOig 


A. rovtovg 


ravrag 


TCCVTCt 


ixsTvog, " that." 






Sing. 




N. ixsTvog 


SHEW?] 


ixsTvo 


G. ixsivov 


ixsivrjg 


ixsivOV 


D. ixsivo) 


ixsi'vr} 


ixsivCp 


A. ixsivov 


ixsivtjv 


ixSlVO 


V. ixElVOQ 


ixSlVJJ 
Dual. 


ixSlVO 


N. A. V. exetVro 


ixsiva 


EXEIVCO 


G. D. ixsivoiv 


ixsivaiv 


ixsivoiv 









PRONOUNS 






N. 


EXElVOl 




Plur. 
ixEivai 




Ixsfyu 


G. 


exeivcov 




ixEivav 




exeivcov 


D. 


Ixsivoig 




ixeivaig 




ixsivoig 


A. 
V. 


exeivov? 
exeTvoi 




ixsivag 
ixtivai 




ixaiva 
ixslva 






E 


x er c i se 


36. 





75 



160. (I) £3" The Greeks used the article with ovtog 
(this), and ixsivog (that). The pronoun either preceded 
the article, or followed the substantive. 

ravzTjg ilqg noXsoig, or zrjg nolzmg ravTtjg 

(2) ' Tins' is to be translated by ' this the? ovzog 6. 
' That' " " < that the :' ixeivog 6. 

161. The eagle pursued the quail. This boy will 
pursue. The artist had carved this statue. The Greek 
had written this letter. You (pi.) had written those 
letters. Sleep soothes the mind. The law-giver will 
restrain-by-punishment (xoXat,) the desires of the citi- 
zens. False wisdom soothes the self-satisfied young- 
men. O Scythian, thou art pursuing true wisdom. 
The prophet proclaimed good things for the poor. This 
wisdom is sacred. True wisdom is sacred. He thinks 
true wisdom sacred. He will appoint laws for this city. 



Lesson 48. 

What case does the comparative degree govern } 
YVhat case is the superlative often followed by? (p. 55.) 

Exercise 37. 



162. The beauty of the girl soothes the mind of the 
poet. This axe of Philip's is better than that of Xeno- 
phon's. The soul of man is stronger than (his) body. 



76 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

This is the true God and eternal 1 life. That (fellow) is 
the basest of all (men). Who in-the-world will pro- 
claim this (thing) to the king of the Persians? O orator, 
say good words. Nothing (ovde'v) is more useful 2 than 
a good friend, nothing more hurtful 3 than a bad (one). 
Nothing is sweeter than honey. I have done all (plur.). 
The best men love wisdom. This one is especially 
(105) graceful, and all wise persons (avdgsg) will love 
his (avTov) words. O good boy, you shall see the armour 
of the Greeks, and weave flowers for (eig) the head of 
Xenophon. The poet was plucking flowers in the 
garden of his beloved 4 friend. The artist carved a beau- 
tiful statue for the temple of the muses. Bring figs. 
What is this ? O iEneas, you are proclaiming good things 
to this city. 



XIV. LIQUID VERBS. 
Lesson 49. 

163. Liquid verbs form all their tenses, except the 
present and imperf., from the short root, and. have only 
the second future in the active and middle voices. 

164. The first Aorists Act. and Mid. are without a : 
they lengthen the vowel of the future; and for that pur- 
pose change 

s into si ) gtzsqco, sansiqa 
a into t] ) qiavrio, eyyva. 

But those in Qaivm, and some others in aivm, make 
aor. 1. ava. 

165. Monosyllabic roots change s or si of the root 



aiwvtos, adj. of two terminations, — how declined? 

fcxptA^tof. a ft~Xa0ep6i. * dyain?r<5f. 



LIQUID VERBS. 77 

into a in the perf. act. and pass. ; the second Aorists ; 
and A or. 1. pass. 

aztXXco, sazaXxa, iazaXfiai, iazak&'tjv, iazdXtjv. 

166. The following verbs in ecva, ivco, vv<o, 

kqivo), xXivoo, zairco, xzeivo), nXvvoj, 
judge, bend, stretch, kill, wash, 

drop the v in Perf. act. and pass, and Aor. 1. pass. 

xqIvco, xsxgixa, xsxQifiai, ixgt&Tjv. So xXivca. 

zeivco, zs'zaxa, zszafiai, iza&qv. 

xzslvco, ixzdfiai, ixza&r^v. 

nXvvca, ninXvxa, mnXv^iai, inXv&rjv. 

167. The Perf. pass, of verbs that retain v is not 
formed uniformly. 

(1) Most of them change v into a ; but some into p : 

cpuwoo, n{<fUG(iai : but ^Qaifco, i^Qafifiai. 

(2) A few reject the v, the preceding vowel being 
long. 

ZQCtyyvvi, zezqayvfiai. 

(3) But in all these formations the v re-appears in the 
other persons : 

TTsqiacfxai, niyavaai, &c. 

168. Verbs with the characteristic p form the perfect 
as if from a longer form in ecu : ve'pm, veve'fflxu. So also 
fievoj. 

169. Vocabulary 23. 

(Liquid Verbs.) 

Assemble; collect. Att. red. 1 — Mid. dyeig 

Announce. — Mid. aor. 2. act. and mid. are , , . 

little used a ™ eXX 

1 See 191, p. 84. 



78 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Shame. — pass. I am ashamed aloy>w 

Blunt a^lvv 

Ward off; with dat. defend. — perf. is want- , _ 

ing.-MiD. **»* 

Palpitate aonouo 

Resound ; no aor. or perf. $qeh 

Flay ; pass. aor. 2. dsg 
Wither; aor. 1 takes a; pass. I am withered ^aqaiv 

Stain, pollute; aor. 1 takes tj fitaiv 

Mid. I lament odvgofiai 

Pity oixTsiQ 

Sharpen b^vv. 



Lesson 50. 



Give the rales on the short root (126-130). 

170. (1) In liquid verbs the termination of the fut. is 
£<», contracted into a, which is added to the short root. 

(2) the termination of the aorist is a, not oa: and it 
lengthens the vowel of the short root, with the change 
of e [not into -q, but) into ei, and of a into rj. 

(3) But those in -Qaivca, and a few more in aivoo, retain 
the a of the short root, but lengthen it. 

(4) In the perf. £ of the short root becomes a. 



(5) Es 
{a) ayysXX :- 

Principal. 
(Pres.) ayyiXXai 
{Fut.) ayysXm 
{Perf.) yyysXxa 

(b) yatv :- 
Principal. 
(Pres.) (paivco 
{Fut.) (pava 
{Perf.) necpayxa 



-short root, ayysX. 

Historical. 
ijyyeXXov {Imp.) 
qyyeiXa {Aor. 1.) 
iiyyi.Xv.uv {Plup.) 

-short root, yav. 

Historical. 

iqiaivov {Imp.) 
ecpqva {Aor. 1.) 
inayayxuv {Plup. 



LIQUID VERBS. 79 

(6) ICjT v before % becomes y, by 122, p. 60. See perf. 



Exercise 38. 

171. I was assembling the masters. I will assemble 
the Ethiopians in 1 the market-place. I announced the 
victory. I shamed the family. I blunted 2 the axe. I 
will blunt this axe. I was flaying the lion. I flayed 
the wild-beasts. Vice withers the soul. He polluted the 
temple of Mercury. I was pitying this boy. I pitied the 
boy. The sea was roaring (/fy«,u). The winter withered 
the flowers. I shall pity these poor (men). I will de- 
fend the good. I defended this city. The unjust judge 
disgraced the city. 



Lesson 51. 



The future of liquid verbs (being a contracted tense) 
is conjugated thus : — 

(5 elg el 

HZOP BITOV 

ovfiev eirs ovoi. 

.Exercise 39. 

172. They will disgrace the cities of the Greeks. 
The Greek was palpitating. Boreas will wither the 
lilies. They will pollute the temples of Minerva. He 
was blunting these axes. You ( pi.) announced the vic- 
tory of the Greeks. The boy will sharpen the axe. 
You announce the victory. Pleasures will wither the 
soul. The storm will wither the poet's flowers. The 

1 si'f with ace, properly ' into.' 

2 The perfects in y/ca from vw are very rare ; but are given here for 
practice. 



SO FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

corpses were palpitating. The waves' of the sea were 
roaring. You (sing-.) will blunt the workman's axe. 
He has flayed 2 the wild beasts. Assemble the wise 
men in (eig) the house of the good citizen. He will blunt 
the axes of the Greeks. God will pity the poor. Who 
will defend Philip 1 Hannibal will not reap the ears-of- 
corn. I will flay the wild beasts. I saw four eagles. 
Who will give this to the mother of a base son? He 
was pursuing the hares. 



XV. PURE VERBS. 
Lesson 52. 



173. These verbs generally lengthen the charac- 
teristic vowel, before the consonant terminations are 
added : qili-a, q>iXtj-ao3, &c. 

1 74. When the characteristic is a, the future, &c. have 
a, if the preceding letter is one of those in qbi. If not, 77. 

Tifidm, rifi^aco : but idea, idem (a), &C. 
But cvAQodo[iai has a : %Qam, xquoucm, rj. 

175. Some verbs retain the short vowel, and these 
take a a before the terminations of the Per/, pass, and 
A or. 1. pass. 

176. So also, dxovco hear, xslevm bid, nalm strike, aeico 
shake, and several others, take a a in these tenses. 

177. naveo (make to cease) has nmavnai, but Aor. 1. 
fTzav&tjv and inava&tjv. 

178. Vocabulary 24. 

(Pure Verbs.) 
Of derivative verbs, generally. 
(a) The being or having what the root denotes, is 
expressed by verbs in 

dco, s'co, svoj (co'crcrco or axreo, d£co, t'^co). 

1 0°Neuter plurals in Greek generally take a singular verb. 
a Remember that £ of this root passes into a in perf , 165. 



PURE VERBS. 



81 



(6) The making a thing into, or furnishing it with, 
what the root denotes, is expressed by verbs in 
oco, it,03, vv<n (aivco). 

Obs. t£w is set down in both classes : the most steady 
to these meanings are em, 6<a, evm. 



Do injustice ; injure 


uSixe 


Stain with blood 


alfiazo 


Deceive 


anara 


Threaten 


aneile 


Count 


agi&fie 


Exercise; practise 


aaxe 


Reduce to slavery ; enslave. — Mid. 


Sovl.0 


Am unhappy 


Svotv%£ 


Hunt ; fut. mid. 


frrjoa 


Move 


HIVE 


Rail at ; act. pass. mid. 


X0180QS 


Dare 


Tolfia. 


Lesson 53. 




Recite 173, 174 (p. 80). 




(1) Example. 





(Pres.) aoW-co tj8ixe-ov (Imp.) 

(Fut.) adixqaa) rjdixqaa, (Jior. 1.) 

(Perf.) TjdixTjxa rfiim^etv (Plup.) 

(2) How is ode, "this," declined? [Exactly as the 
article, 8e being appended.] 

(3) ^d^ rtjads rijg nolemg, of this city (or rrjg noXemg 
rrjads). 

(4) ovrog (this) commonly relates to what has been 
mentioned ; ode to what is going to be mentioned. 

Exercise 40. 

179. He will injure these citizens. You will injure 

4* 



82 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

the geometer. He will stain- the eagle's wings -with- 
blood. 1 He stained- his head -with-blood. They 
stained- their heads -with-blood. I have stained- the 
viper's head -with-blood. I will practise virtue. You 
(pi.) will practise virtue. Vice will enslave the soul. 
True wisdom will soothe the mind. He counted these 
flowers. I will count the lilies. You-two will count 
the Ethiopians. He has counted the thongs. You 
(pi.) have counted the wild-beasts. I chased the wild- 
beasts. He chased. He railed at the good citizens. He 
will dare. He was-unhappy. They will-be-unhappy. 



XVI. PERFECT II, 
Lesson 54. 



180. This tense is formed from the short root ; but, 
with the exception of o, lengthens the vowel-sound of 
the penult. 

181. a of the short root is changed into q, but after q 
into a. 

182. £ of the short root is changed into o. 2 

i of the short root is changed into oi. 

183. ev of the present is retained, though the short 
root has v. 

J 84. In verbs in £, cc, rr, of course the a must be ap- 
pended to the true characteristic. 

185. Some verbs that end in two consonants (not tit, 
or cg, it) and have e in the root, form Perf. II. by chang- 
ing s into o : as, cpt'pB 



1 Hyphens used in this way, mean that the word with a hyphen 
after it, and that with a hyphen before it, are to be translated by one 
verb. Thus " stained-with-blood" is to be translated by one Greek verb. 

2 Or, which comes to the same thing, u of the pres. in mute verbs 
becomes ot ; in liquid verbs, o, in Perf. II. 



SECOND PERFECT. 83 

Thus : aneigoi (otzeq), ianoQa ' ttjxco (tux), rhijxa ' \ein<a 
(Xm), XsXoma ; but cpsvyco (qjvy), as'qmvya. 

186. [The perf. 2 belongs especially to the intrans. 
signif., as is clearly seen in verbs in which the two sig- 
nifications are intermixed. IlQdrrm is one of those 
whose pres. act. has the two meanings, and its two per- 
fects, at least in the most current prose, actually have 
the two different significations : nqmrm, I do, make, 
perf. nmQuia' nQarta, I find myself; I am doing (well 
or ill), perf. nrnqaya. This appears to have been origi- 
nally the case with all such verbs as OAQ, IlHrfi, aq- 
Tim, zijxa, &c. : they all had both meanings, and that of 
the perf. 2 was the intrans. one. But the pass, or mid. 
of most of those verbs had the intrans. signif., and as 
the perf. 2 has the same, the perf. 2 of the following 
verbs appears to belong to the mid. or pass, voice, to 
which, however, it belongs as little as the perf. 1, niyv- 
xa, eoztjxa, which are exactly in the same predicament. 
B.] 

187. Vocabulary 25. 

ayvvui, — ayvvfiat, break, intrans. ; perf. eayu, am broken. 

daico, — daiofiai and dsdqa, burn, intrans. 

iysiQco, iysiQOficu, awake, £yQ>']yoQct, watch. 

'iXnm (cause to hope), — eXnopca and 'ioXna, hope. 

n?]da) (afflict), — m'jdofxui and xsxijda, am anxious about 

any thing, 
(taivco (ixfiaivco, drive mad),—[iairofica and ixs'fA,tjva, am 

m.ad. 
oi'yoa, avoiyoj, avtcp%a, — avoiyofiai, open, intrans., avecpya, 

stand open. 
oXkvpti, 6Xc6Xtxa,-—oXXv/j,ai, go to ruin, oXcoXa, am undone. 
jiei&co, amenta, — aei&ofiat, believe, ninoi&a, trust, 
nriyvvfii, — nrjrvpou, become fixed, ninr\ya, am fixed. 
Qijyvvfii, — Qriyvvfiair, tear, intrans., sQncoya, am torn. 
(7//77co (make putrid) — oqnopai, become putrid, aiariaa, 

am putrid. 
TTJxm, (melt, trans.) — tfaopai, melt, intrans., perf. retina, 
cpaivm, (shoiv) — cpaivoftai, appear, perf. asyrjva. 



84 FIRST GKEEK LESSONS. 



XVII. ATTIC FUTURE, AND ATTIC REDU- 
PLICATION. 

Lesson 55. 

188. When aco is preceded by a short vowel, the a 
is often left out in the Ionic dialect; and the two vowels 
contracted in the Attic : Telia, fut. Teliaco • Ionic, Telia • 
Attic, tela. 

189. If the short vowel be i, the two vowels are not 
capable of contraction ; but the go is circumflexed, and 
conjugated as if a contraction had taken place. 1 

190. With respect to the quantity of the penult, the 
following rule must be attended to : — 

The penult of daa, loco, vaco, is always short when 
they come from verbs in £00 or com, rrco. 

191. In verbs that begin with a vowel, the first vowel 
and following consonant are sometimes repeated before 
the temporal augment (rednplicatio Attica). 

ay, i[x, 6q, Perf. ?)y, jjfi, wq. 
(redup.) dytjy, 4"?/"? oqojq. 

192. This form inclines to a short vowel in the third 
syllable, and therefore shortens a long vowel-sound: 
dleicpa, dlqliqia ' dnovco, dxrjxoa. 

193. Vocabulary 26. 

(1) The following verbs retain the short vowel (T). 
(a) yilam, laugh ; dlda, break ; negate cause to 



pass ; enda, draw. 



kXed-W tsXw, rt'Aas, ) . 1 _ 1 „ 

i ~ > £' ciTuv, tiTov ovuev, eire, oven, 

vojiicrii) — vofj.iMj vouieis, \ ' ' ' 

0tfdo-oj—0t/3a>, 0i0a S , (3ifq I arov, aTov \ $ptv, are, <5<n. 
So in the mid. kojjl'i^w, fut. /co/.iiao/.iai, jut. Att. K(>[xiov"nai, u, etrai, &c. 



ATTIC FUTURE AND REDUPLICATION. 85 

(s) aldsofxat., venerate ; uxs&pai, heal ; aagsco, suffice ; 

£V'aj, boil; ifis'at, vomit; y.aXtm, call; xote'co, rage; 

vemt'co, quarrel ; £>«, polish ; reta'oo, finish ; rQe'co, 

tremble, 
(o) clq6o3, plow. So dfioaco, will swear; bvoam, will 

profit. 
(i>) avvo), end; apvw, drain ; /&<», stuff; Igvio?, draw; 

fiAx^co, drag ; [tedvco, intoxicate ; rnvw, spit ; ravvca, 

stretch out. 

(2) Forms with long and short vowel belong to 
(s) aive'oa, praise ; saa, &c. ; but qvypai, rjv£&tp>'. 

aiQsco, take ; foco, &c. ; but riQe&ijv. 

dm, bind ; Stow and drjoco, dt'dexa, dedepai, 

nod f'co, desire; no&eaofiai 1 and aofrrjaoficu, £tz6&e<ju, 
and ino&rjaa, 7ren6&i]xa, Tzeno&rjfiai, mo&ea&rjv. 
(y ) flvw, sink ; Svaw, sdvaa idv&t]v. 
&vco, sacrifice ; ■diaa, t&voa, itv&qv. 
Xvco, loose ; Xwoj, sXvaa, XsXv/acu, iXv&rjv, XeXti- 

COfiOll. 

(3) Verbs that have ev in the fut. or its derivatives. 
nXa'o) &£(o 7ZVE03 gem vito #«'<». 
sail run blow flow swim pour. 

(4) Verbs in ai or « that have in the fut. av. 

xaica (Att. xaoo) aXaica (Att. xXdm). 

burn weep. 



Lesson 56. 
(Moods and Persons.) 

194. The general terminations of the moods for the 
act. are — 

1 The future is always KoQfiau in Xenophon. (B.) 



80 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Imper. 


Opt. 


Subj. 


Iujin. 


Part. 


e 

But Aor. I. has 

ov 


Ol/il 

ai/ii 


CO 

co 


eiv 
cu 


cov 
clg 



The Per/, has svm, cog, for iujin. and part. The 
futures have no imperat. or subj. 

195. The general forms for the pass, and mid. are — 



Imper. 


Opt. 


Subj. 


Infin. 


Part. 


ov 
But Aor. I. mid. 


oifitjv 


COfiUl 


ea&ai 


opevog 


at 
Aor. I. II. pass. 

Per/, pass. 

GO 


aifirjv 

EITJV 


cofiai 


ao&ou 

r\vai 

o&cu 


a^svog 

el? 

fie'vog 



196. Obs. Optat. and subj. of the per/, pass, are sup- 
plied by its participle with dqv, co (opt. and subj. of thai, 
to be). 

General Forms of the Persons. 

(Principal tenses, with subjunctive ) 





Active. 




1 Person. 2 Person. 3 Person 


Sing. 


g 


Dual 


wanting rov rov 


Plur. 


(iev re at 



Passive. 
1 Person. 2 Person. 



[AE&OV 

fieda 



Historical T> 



(With optative.) 
Active. 



(a at.) 
a&ov 
a&e 



Passive. 



3 Person. 
rat 
a&ov 
vrai 



Sing. 
Dual. 
Plur. 



1 Person. 2 Person. 3 Person. 

wanting rov njv 
fxev re v or aav 



1 Person. 2 Person. 3 Person. 



m v 

He&ov 

fxe&a 



M 

c&ov 
o&e 



ro 

a&tjv 



In Aor. I. 0-i;r( 3 not M<, by 125. 



PECULIARITIES OF AUGMENT. 87 

XVIII. PECULIARITIES OF AUGMENT. 
Lesson 57. 

197. Rules for compound verbs : — 

(a) Verbs compounded with a noun, or a (negative 
or connective), take the augment at the beginning : yilo- 
aoqpe'a), iquloooqiEov, aqioovioi, rjqiQovsov. 

(b) Those compounded with a preposition, or with 
dvg, sv, take the augment to the verb, and the prepositions 
suffer elision : naQala^^dvoo, naquldfifiavov, dno-bnli^w, 
acponXi^co, acpmnh^ov. 

Obs. 1. — FIqo and tzsqi are not elided: tzeqiz'xco, neoi- 
sT%ov • noodyw, nQ07]yov ' so also aficpi in aficpit'vwfii, and 
dficpttliaam, but o of tiqo is often contracted together with 
the following vowel : e. g. nqoiXtyov, noovleyov nqoldcoxa, 
aQovdcoxa. 

Obs. 2. — Of class b some have the augment before 
8vg and sv, when the verb begins with w, v, or a conso- 
nant : as, dvoconeTv, idvamnEOv. So 8vczv)reiv, evdoxifietv, &c. 
Likewise several, in which the preposition is closely- 
combined with the verb by elision, or the simple verb is 
out of use: xad-sv8(o,sxd&£v§ov, but also xa&r t v8ov xu&i£,<o, 
ixd&i^oV avTtfiolsG), TjVTtfioleov ufi^ia^ijtiai, qjQOifxid'Qv), 
&c. 'Hvwq&oov from dvoQ&oco, and ijvcoyleov from hoylim, 
are augmented in both places. 

(Anomalies of Augment.) 

198. Four verbs beginning with « take no augment: 
dco, breathe ; dta, hear ; drj&t'aam, am unaccustomed 

to ; a>]8%onai, am disgusted. 
So the following with or. 
oixovqhq, keep the house ; olvoco, intoxicate ; oigzqsco, 
make raging mad.—EiQov is found for ijvqov. 

199. The following change £ into a: 

'ifw, I have ; idw, I suffer ; t'lxw, I drag; tonm, hqttv^w, 



88 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

I creep ; i&itm, I accustom ; iXiaaco, I roll ; iaridco, 
I entertain (as a guest) ; sno/xai, I follow ; toyd- 
£ofiai, I work. — Thus, s^ro, u-^ov. 

So sluov, said, from a root in : and uXov, took, from 
root it,. 

200. The following still take the syllabic augment 
(with the breathing of the verb): dXioxco, idXmv, was 
taken ; dyvvpi, tdy^v, was broken ; a&ioj, thrust, sw&eov, 
&c. So the perfects ioixa, am like, from stum : eooya, 
from £Qy(o, do ; ioXna, hope, from tXnm, cause to hope. 

201. 'EoQT(i£m, make a festival, and eotxa, take a kind 
of augment in the second syllable, imp. ecagra&v: plup. 
(of soma) icaxeiv. 'Opdco takes both augments ; idocov. 

202. MeXXco, am going (to do), and dvvafiai, am able, 
take the temporal augment : r^eXXov, tjdvvd^v. 

Remarks on the Greek Verb. 



203. The Greek verb is much more varied and rich 
in its forms than the Latin, or any other language. 1 It 
has — 

(1) A middle voice in addition to the active and pas- 
sive voices. 

(2) An optative mood distinct from the subjunctive 
mood. 

(3) Aorist tenses, which are distinguished from the 
preterite and perfect. 

(4) A dual number in every mood, besides the sing, 
and plural. 

(5) And a greater copiousness of moods and parti- 
ciples for the several tenses. 



See Matthiae, Greek Gram. § 155. 



On the Active Voice. 

Obs. 1. The principal tenses and subjunct. have the 
third dual in ov, third plural in a: the historical tenses 
and the optative have third dual in rp, third plural in v. 

Obs. 2. As a general rule, the accent is placed as far 
back as possible. 

(a) But the first aor. infin. and third sing, optative 
(ending in cu, 01, respectively), are always accented 
on the penult. 

(b) The second aor. infin. is perispomenon ; x the par- 
ticiple oxytone. 

(c) The perf. infin. is paroxytone ; the participle 
oxytone. 

(d) The imperatives, sins, svqs, il&e, and (in Attic) 
la@e, ids, are oxytone. 

On the Passive Voice. 

Obs. 1. The principal tenses and subj. have 3 dual 
in ov, 3 plur.inzae : the historical tenses and optat. have 
3 dual in rp, 3 plur. in to. 

Obs. 2. The accent is generally placed as far back 
as possible. 

(a) But infin. of aor. 2 mid. is paroxytone. 

(b) Infin. and part, of perf. pass, have accent on 
permit. 

(c) Infinitives in vai have accent on penult. 

(d) Part, of pass, aorists are oxytone. 

(e) The subj. of the pass, aorists has the circumflex 
on last syllable through the sing., and on penult in dual 
and plur. (it being contracted from eco). 

(/) In imper. of aor. 2 mid. ov is pcrispomenon (ov, 
sa&m) : but in dual and plur. the accent is thrown 
back. 

1 For the meaning of these terms see 34, 35, p. 17. 



90 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



XIX. TERMINATIONS OF 
Lesson 58. 









MOODS. 






Tenses. 


Indicative. 


Imperative. 


Present and 


S. 


w, 


£1?, 


El, 


E, ETOO, 


Future, (the 


D. 




EZOV 


EZOV, 


EZOV, EZCOV, 


latter without 


P. 


o^ev, 


ETE, 


ovai. 


eze, szcoaav 


imperat. and 










or ovzoov. 1 


subj. 












Future 2. 


S. 


w, 


Btg, 


El, 






D. 




ElZOV, 


ElZOV, 






P. 


ovfxev 


, EIZE, 


ovai. 




Imperfect and 


S. 


ov, 


*?, 


e. 




Aorist 2. 


D. 




ETOV, 


EZTjV, 


Aorist 2 




P. 


OflEV, 


EZE, 


OV. 




Perfect 1 & 2. 


S. 


a, 


ag, 


£> 






D. 




azov, 


azov, 


like 




P. 


afisv, 


azs, 


act. 




Aorist 1. 


S. 


a, 


ag, 


«> 


ov, dzm, 




D. 




azov, 


azTjv, 


azov, azcov, 




P. 


UflEV, 


azs, 


av. 


azs, azaxsav 
or dvzmv. 1 


Pluperfect 1 & 2. 


s. 


eiv, 4 


sis, 


El, 






D. 




ElZOV, 


ElZtjV, 






P. 


Etpsv, 


SIZE, 


Eiaav 










or Eaav. 





The figures refer to " Notes on the Active Voice," p. 



ACTIVE VOICE OF THE VERB. 



91 



THE ACTIVE VOICE. 



MOODS. 


Optative. 


Subjunctive. 


Inf. 


Participle. 


oifii, oig, 01. 

oitov, oirrjv, 
oifA-sv, oire, oisv. 


i]Z01', ?]ZOV, 
CO/iEV, 7JZE, (061. 


eiv. 


cov, ovaa, ov, 
ovzoq, ovang, ovzog. 


oifii, 2 oig, oT, 

OIZOV, OlZtJV, 
oiflEV, 0178, OlEV. 




sTv. 


mv, ovaa, ovv, 
ovvzog, ovatjg, ovvzog 


like 


Present. 


A. 2. 
sir, 


Aorist2. 
av, ovaa, ov, 
ovzog, ovavg, ovzog. 


the 


Present. 


ivai 


cog, via, 6g, 
ozog, viag, ozog. 


aifii, 3 aig, ai, 

aizov, aiznv, 
aiftev, aire, aiev. 


Like the 
Present. 


ai. 


ag, aaa, av, 
avrog, dang, avzog. 











92 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



XX. TERMINATIONS OF THE 
Lesson 59. 





Indicative. 


Imperative. 


Present and 
Future. 


S. ojiai, v , (ei), l sTai, 

D. ojxs&ov, 2 sa&ov, sa&ov, 

| P. ofisda, 2 sa&e, ovtai. 

1 


ov, ' «Ww, 
sa&ov, t'adcov, 
£a&s,sa&ataav 
or e'a&cov. 
(Future none.) 


Perfect. 


S. (xcti, oca, rai, 
D. fis&ov, a&ov, g&qv, 
P. (is&a, a&s, rial. 3 


i 

o-co, o-#co, 
a&ov, a&cov, 
o&s, o&oaaav 
or a&cov. 


Pluperfect. 


S. fiyv, GO, TO, 

D. fis&ov, a&ov, a&tjv, 
P. fis&a, o&e, vto. 3 




Imperfect and 
Aor. 2. Mid. 


S. 6fi7]v, ov, sro, 
D. 6fxs&ov, sa&ov, sa&yv, 
P. Ofis&a, sa&s, ovzo. 


Aor. 2 


Aor. 1. Mid. 


S. dfitjv, co, 1 ato, 
D. dfis&ov, aa&ov, da&tjv, 
P. dfxs&a, aa&s, avro. 


aa&ov, da&cov 
aa&s,da&waav 
or da&cov 


Fut. 2. Mid. 


S. otTtat, § (a), sTrai, 
D. ov/xs&ov, sia&ov', sla&ov, 
P. ov/xs&a, sTaOs, ovvzai. 


None. 


Pass. Aorists. 


S. ^, ?7?, jji, 

D. ^70f, ?'j7TJV, 

P. ^£y, ^re, ^(jay. 


j/ifr, ^'700, 

J/TCW, r(ZtQV, 

ijts, qzcoaav. 



The figures refer to " Notes on the Passive and Middle Voices," 
p. 94. 



PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES. 93 

PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES. 



Optative. 


Subjunctive. 
aficu, r;, ' tjzai, 

c6[XE&0V,7]G\^0V,T]G&0V, 

oofiE&a, t]g&£, avzai. 
(Future none.) 


Inf. 


Part. 


oi\ir\v, oio, 1 oiro, 
oifi.a&ov,oia&ov,o(,a&r}v, 
oi(A.e&a, oio&e, oivro. 


EG&ai. 


Ofityog, 

7], OP. 






o&ai. 


Htvog, 

usvn, 

nhov. 










as 


Present. 


A. 2. 
EG&ai. 


AsPr. 

dfiEvog, 
1], ov. 


ai/j.rjv, aio, ttizo, 
ai[i£&ov,aic&ov,ai6&rjv, 
affie&a, aiads, aivro. 


Like Present. 


aG&ai 


oinrjv, oio, oizo, 

Ol'flS&OV, 01G&0V, OIG&VV, 

oifis&a, oig&s, oTvzo. 


None. 


EiG&ai 


ovfievog 
t], ov, 


sirjv, eirjg, sit], 

eirjzov, eirjttjv, 
sitjfisv, eit]TE, eivguv 
or eiev* 


TfZOV, TjZOV, 
apsv, TJTS, OOfft. 


rjvai. 


£ig,ElG<X 


EVZOS 
EV1 


siGtjg, 
r og. 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Notes on the Active Voice. 

1 The dissyllabic termination of the Imperat. 3 plur. is the 
more common in Attic Greek. Care must be taken not to 
mistake it for the gen. plur. of a participle. 

2 Together with this ending the Fut. 2 has also the termi- 
nation otr\v, which is a common optative ending of contracted 
verbs. The futurum Atticum has usually this ending in the 
optative ; which is also occasionally found in the perf. optat. ; 
and in a-/,otr\v Aor. 2 opt. from i'x<o. — 

olr\v, oCfjq, olfj, — oCtjrov, oi^rrjv, — otrj/tfv, o(r\tf, ofrjaav, 
or oitov, ottr\v, olpsv, dirt, oiev. 

3 Together with this ending, another is in use (called the 
JEolic Aor.) in fta. In the second, and third sing, and third 
plur. it is far more common than the other form. — naq, «?, — 
plur. tiav. 

4 The old Attic has also an ending t\, rjq, which is con- 
tracted from the Ionic form ta, ea<;. 

Notes on the Passive and Middle Voices. 

1 The second persons from pat, firjv, are properly aat, ao. 
But when these were appended to the root by a connecting 
vowel, the a was thrown away ; and tacu, for instance, con- 
tracted into y, Attice *<-, which is very common in fut. 2. mid. 
and the only termin. for j3ovlft, oipft, olft, [you — choose; will 
see; think). — So ov is for too: o> for aao : y in subj. for tjoat, : 
oto optat. for otoo. 

2 The 1 dual and plural had an extended form, [.ifaO-ov, 
(ito&u, which is used even by Attic poets. 

3 The terminations vrctt, vro, are unmanageable, except 
when the root ends in a vowel. The Ionians turn v into a. 
rtrvcparat for rirvcpprat: the Attics use the participle with sluC; 
rttvf(fi(vot fiat, rzTVflftfvdt r\aav. 

4 fifv is more common than fCrjactv. There are similar forms 
for the 1st and 2d persons, flfifv, fltf, which are found in Attic 
poets, and also in prose. 



contract verbs. 95 

204. Rules for Contraction of Verbs. 

The contraction is very simple : 

1. ecu. — ss becomes si: so becomes ov, and thee is 
thrown away before long vowels and diphthongs. 

2. dm. — a before an e 1 sound is long a: before an o 
sound, to. 

3. dm. — o before a short vowel is ov : before a long 
vowel, co : and disappears before 01, ov. 

But before si of the indicative, and y (subscript) of 
the subjunctive, the contraction is into 01. 

Obs. (a) Pure verbs with a monosyllabic root (Qsm, 
nvsco) leave the vowels open, except before s and si. 

Obs. (b) £aco, dixpdm, nsivdm, %odo[iai, (live, thirst, 
hunger, use,) contract as into #. 

1 The e sounds in this conjug. are c, v ; the o sounds o, w, ot, ov. 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

XXI. TABLE OF 
Lesson 60. 



(Active 



Indicative. 


Imperative. 






Present xi\i- 








S. 


CC03 


cisig 


CiSl 


as 


alro3 




CO 


ag 


a 


a 


dro3 


D. 




CiETOV 


dstov 


dsrov 


air 03V 






UTOV 


drov 


drov 


drcov 


P. 


do/xsv 


cists 


dovai 


dsrs 


asrcoaav 




COfXEV 


drs 


0361 


drs 


drcoaav 






[mperfect srifi- 








S. 


aov 


asg 


as D. 


dsrov 


as'rrjv 




GOV 


ag 


a 


drov 


drvv 






Present cpil- 








s. 


£03 


ssig 


SSI 


ss 


SET 03 




CO 


sTg 


si 


H 


SIT03 


D. 




ssrov 


ssrov 


ssrov 


EET03V 






sirov 


sirov 


£17 OV 


SIT03V 


P. 


sofisv 


sets 


SOV61 


s'srs 


ssTcoaav 




ovfiev 


sirs 


OVCTl 


sirs 


SlT03CaV 






mperfect iyil- 








S. 


soy 


ssg 


ss D. 


ssrov 


Esrrjv 




ow 


sig 


SI 


SITOV 


sirvv 






Present %qvo- 








s. 


003 


osig 


OEl 


OS 


0ET03 




03 


oig 


01 


ov 


0VZ03 


D. 




oetov 


oetov 


osrov 


OST03V 






ovrov 


OVTOV 


ovrov 


OVT03V 


P. 


OOfAEV 


OSTS 


oovai 


Sets 


oircoaav 




OVfiEV 


OVTS 


ova i 


OVTS 


ovro3aav 




Imperfect fyova 








s. 


OOV 


osg 


os D. 


osrov 


oirnv 




OVV 


ovg 


ov 


ovrov 


ovrnv 



CONTRACTED VERBS. 

CONTRACTED VERBS. 



07 



Voice.) 



Optative. 


Subjunctive. 


Inf. 


Part. 


doifii 

Cpfil 


doig 

cog 


dot 

CO 


dco 

CO 


dyg 

ag 


an 
a 


dsiv 
dv 


dcov 
cov 




aonov 


aoirnv 




CtTjTOV 


aqrov 








anov 


COZnV 




arov 


CiTOV 






aotfAev 


CiOlTE 


aotsv 


acofisv 


arjTS 


acoai 






COflEV 


CpTS 


coev 


COfAEV 


atE 


co a i 






P. dofxEv 


dsrs 


aov 












cofisv 


are 


COV 












EOlfAl 


soig 


SOI 


SCO 


sng 


k 


SEIV 


s'cov 


Olfli 


oig 


01 


CO 


VS. 


V 


ElV 


cov 




soirov 


EOLTWV 




snzov 


svrov 








OiZOV 


OITVV 




IjTOV 


1J70V 






SOljlEV 


SOITS 


SOIEV 


SCOflEV 


SVTS 


sco a i 






oilier 


OlTE 


0LSV 


COfAEV 


vte 


coat 






P. toper 


SETS 


EOV 












OVfXEV 


BITE 


OVV 












OOlfll 


ooig 


001 


oco 


ong 


on 


OEIV 


ocov 


01(11 


oig 


01 


CO 


oig 


01 


OVV 


cov 




ooizov 


OOlTtjV 




onzov 


onrov 








0110V 


oirr\v 




C070V 


corov 






OOljlEV 
OlflEV 


001TE 

oTte 


OOIEV 

oiev 


OCOflEV 
COflEV 


OVTE 
COTE 


ocoai 
com 






P. OOflSV 


oste 


OOP 












ovfisv 


OVTE 


OVV 













nHST GREEK LESSONS. 



TABLE OF 



Lesson 60. Continued. 



(Passive 



Indicative. 


Imperative. 


Opla- 


Present zifi- 






S. do pea an dszai 


dov as'a&co 


aotfinv 


co\iai a dzui 


co dad co 


qj{it]v 


D. ao[x£{}ov ueg&ov dea&ov 


dea&ov aia&cov 


tt01{*£&OV 


c6fxE&ov dadov ug&ov 


daOov do&cov 


cpfje&ov 


P. (toped a dsa&s dovzai 


dsafts aea&coaap 


aoifAE&a 


ojfisOa ua&e covzai 


datie da&coaav 


cpfis&a 


Imperfect izifi- 






S. aopqv dov dszo 


D. aofiE&ov 


CiEG&OV 


COfJ.)JV CO UZO 


COflE&OV 


UG&OV 


Present cpd- 






S. ib'fiai t'i] tszat. 


EOV ESCT&CO 


Eolfinv 


ovftai ij eizcci 


ov Eia&co 


oifinv 


D. softsQ-ov eegQov eeg&ov 


eeg&ov eeo&cov 


£Ol'{l£&OV 


ovfxs&ov Eta&ov eTg&ov 


eTg&ov eiaOcov 


OlflE&OV 


P. e6(i£&a eeg&e Eovrai 


e'eg&e ss'a&coaav 


EOlfXE&a 


ovfj£&a eTg&e ovvzcu 


£ia&£ Eia&coaav 


oifiE&a 


Imperfect iqiiX- 






S. eoftnv t'ov e'ezo 


D. EOflE&OV 


eeg&ov • 


ovjxnv ov sizo 


OV{(£&01> 


ElG&OV 


Present %qvo- 






S. oouui or] oszou 


OOV OEG&CO 


ooffirjv 


ovjxcu 01 ovzai 


OV OVG&CO 


oifinv 


D. oojxsftov oeg&ov osa&ov 


OEG&OV oe'g&cov 


OOlfiE&OP 


ovfis&ov ova&ov ova&ov 


ova&ov ovo&cov 


Ol'[AE&OV 


P. OO/AE&a oea&s oovzai 


OEa&S OSG&COGCiV 


ooifiE&a 


ovfie&a ovg&e ovvzai 


ovcr-ds ova&coaav 


oi'fis&a 


Imperfect e%qvc- 






S. 00(M]V OOV OEZO 


T). OO^E&OV 


OEG&0V 


OV[XVV ov OVZO 


OVjXE&OV 


OVd&OV 



CONTRACTED VERBS. 

CONTRACTED VERBS. 



99 



Voice.) 



-five. 


Subjunctive. 


Inf. 


Parti- 
ciple. 


doio doiro 

CpO 6)70 

doia&ov aoiaOijv 

(OG&OV CpG&ljV 

doia&£ doivro 
qjc&e cpvro 


dcoftai dy dr\rm 
5)\iai a drai 
ao3fi£&oi> drpsftov aijo&ov 
(CfiE&ov da&ov da&ov 

(t(6p£&a dl]G&£ dwvTcu 

03fis&a da&s avrai 


dsa&ai 
uo&ui 


a6}i£vog 
cofisvog 

i 


asa&qv P. a6[t£d-a deo&s dovro 
da&i]v (6[zs&a do&e avro 


so to e'oiTO 
OlO olro 
soia&ov eoio&qv 
oia&ov oia&rjv 
toia&e soivro 
oio&e oTvro 


sw/xai £$ eqzai 
cofiai xi rjrai 
f.co/xsd-ov £Tj6&ov iqa&ov 
w/xe&ov ija&ov r/c&ov 

£O0fl£&a £1JG&£ SCOVTttl 

aps&u rjG&£ avzai 


ha&ai 
ua&ai 


Eopevog 
ov^i£vog 


eso-&rjv P. aofie&cc, ha&e iovro 
sio&tjv ov{A.e&a Eio&e ovvro 


OOIO 00170 

oio oTro 
ooia&ov oota&rjv 
oTo&ov oia&ijv 
ooio&e ooivro 
oTo"&s olvro 


oafiai orj otjrat 
b~j{iai oT corai 
oapEdov 6q<j&ov oija'&ov 

COflE&OV <X)O&0V OOG&OV 

oo)/j.£&a, oqo&E ocovrai 
(6fiE&a ojg&s covrat 


osa&ai 

OVG&CU 


o6(t£vog 
ov(Ji£vog 


os'a&^v P. oo/AE&a oso&e oovro 
ova&fjv ovfxe&a ova&e ovvro 



100 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



205. By applying rules in 121, &c. it will be found 
that the consonants of the perf. pass, will assume the 
following forms before the terminations of the persons : 



p sounds. 


k sounds. 


t sounds. 


v. 


S. [Ifl, \p, 71Z, 

D. nfi, cp&, cp&, 

p. up, q)&. — 




ufi, a, gz, 
o/i, g&, g&, 
Oft, a&. — 


fifi or 6[l, VG, vz, 
(i(i or o[i, v&, v-&, 
[ifi, or G(i, V&. — 



[Of course the 2pers. singular (being a o termina- 
tion) will have the same consonant as the fut.; the dual 
and plur. (& terminations) the same as the Aor. 1. pass.] 

206. So the infinitives will be ydcu, yftai, o&cu, vdm. 

207. " imperatives " ipo, §o, go, vgo. 



Lesson 6 1. 

Give the terminations of the Imperative, (p. 90.) 

208. (1) The moods of the aorist do not express past 
actions, but single actions ; those of the present ex- 
pressing continued or repeated actions. 



(Present.) 

ZVTITS 7V7Z7SZ03 

TVTTTeZOV 7VTlz{z(OV 
7V7Z7E7E 7V7T7S7(0GaV 

or zvazovzwv. 



Examples 



(First Aorist.) 
zvxpov Tvipdrco 
rvxparov rvxparcov 
ZVXpUTS TvxpdzoiGav 
or Tvxpdvzcov. 

(2) Hence the present imperative is generally found 
when a man is ordered to go on with what he has al- 
ready begun; the aor. imperative when what he is 
ordered to do, is not a thing already begun. 

(a) This rule is not always observed, even by the 
best writers. There seems to have been a kind of pre- 
ference for the present imperative, when the action 



SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 101 

ordered was not decidedly a single definite action ; and 
when the completion of it was not the principal thing in 
the speaker's view. 1 

Exercise 41. 

209. Assemble (aor.) the Persians. Make-yourself- 
acquainted with (pres.) the soul. Look (pi.) towards 
the sea. Let him carve the statue. Let them carve the 
statues. Pursue the boys. Write the letter. Soothe 
the miserable. Let them soothe the miserable. Pluck 
the flowers. He gathered the lilies. You were reaping 
the ears-of-corn. Reap the ears-of-corn. Hide the 
raven's wing. Weave a garland. 2 Proclaim the pre- 
servation of the city. Colonize the country. 



XXII. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 
Lesson 62. 

210. (1) In dependent sentences, the Subjunctive 
follows the Principal, the Optative the Historical 
Tenses. 

(a) Hence the Subjunctive answers to the present 
and perfect of the Latin subjunctive : the Optative, to 
the imperfect and pluperfect. 

(2) The Subjunctive, like the Principal Tenses, has 
third dual ov : third plural ai. 

(3) The Optative, like the Historical Tenses, has 
third dual yv : third plural v. 



1 Praesens et aoristus in eseteris praeter indicativum modis eo max- 
ime differunt, quod praesens rem durantem vel scepius repetitam, aoris- 
tus rem absolutam aut semel factam indicat. Inepte dicas yp&xpov fii0\ov, 
si non scriptum esse sed scribi vis, quia hoc longi temporis opus est: 
recte vero, Ads rhv x £ ?P a > quia hoc brevi temporis momento fit. (Her- 
mann ad Viger., p. 747.) 

2 ariipavos. 



102 FIRST GREEK LESSORS. 

(4) The Subjunctive has the long e and o sounds 
where the Indicative has the short ones. 1 

(5) The Optative has always a diphthong for its 
mood- vowel : in the active this diphthong is oi, except 
for the first aorist, which has at. 

(6) Here too the moods do not refer to past time : but 
the aorist is used for a momentary (that is, a single, 
definite) action : the present, for a continued action. 

(7) Examples. 

Recite the Terminations of the Subjunct. and Opt., 
p. 91., (omitting the opt. of second future.) 

Subjunctive. Optative. 

{Present.) {Present.) 

TV71703 rvnr-rig rvntri I rvrrzoifii rvntoig tvtztoi. 

ivmriTOV 7V7tti]toi>\ 7V7ZT01T0V 7V7Z7oi7t]v 

7V7T703fiEV 7V717?]7S 7117170361 | TWlTOipBV 7V7Z7017S 7V7T70IEV 

(Aorist.) (Aorist.) 

zv\fJG> zvip-rig 7vxp-r} rvxpatfii 7vxpaig zvipou 

7VXpTjT0V 7VXp7]70V 7V\pCU70V 7V\plU77]V 

rvrpojfiev 7v\pij7S, 7v\pcoai zvxpccifiEV 7v\pcu7£ 7vipaiev. 

(8) 7zdQsi[ii ha i'doj, I am -here (that I may see =) 
to see. 

7zaQ7]v ha i'doifti, I was-there (that I might see 
= ) to see. 

tva, = (at) that ; in order that. 

n&QEilii, I am-here. 

TiaQr^v, I was-there. 

riy.cn, I am come : a present with a ■perfect- 
definite meaning. 

Exercise 42. 

211. I am-here to chastise the Ethiopian. I was- 

1 Thus: Indie. Pres. Subj. 

<» e-is t-i co ri-n v -i (or j/Sj i?) 

troy c.tov rjrov i\tqv 

opsv ere ovai | uaev tire wo-j. 



SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 1U15 

there to chastise the Scythian. I am come, that I may- 
persuade the good boy. I was-there to persuade (= 
that I might persuade) the wise geometer. He was 
there to steal ( = that he might steal) the artist's axe. 
I am come to sharpen (= that I may sharpen) the axe. 
I am-here to reap (= that I may reap) these ears-of- 
corn. I was-there to pluck (= that I might pluck) the 
ears-of-corn. He is here that he may defend his friends 
(dat.) He was there to flay (= that he might flay) the 
elephant. I am-here to enslave (= that I may enslave) 
the citizens. You will be unhappy. He will rail-at the 
self-satisfied young-men. I was-there to number (= 
that I might number) the soldiers. 1 



Lesson 63 , 



212. (1) To forbid a habit or course of action, use fi/j 
(not) with the imperative of the present. 

(2) To forbid a momentary (that is, single, definite) 
action, use pirj (not) with the subjunctive of the aorist. 

fit] xltrns? ' do not steal? forbids stealing generally. 
Hi] xktyrig, ' do not steal ;' when stealing a particular 
thing at a particular time is forbidden. 

(3) ' Would? ' should? (when used conditionally) are 
to be expressed by o-.v with the optative. 

The Greeks used this form (as we do) to avoid posi- 
tiveness of expression. ' I should think' being a soft- 
ened ' I do think.' 

&eoi£ot[ii av, ' I would reap? or 'should reap? 



1 arpaTKOTris, G. ov. 

2 jin cum imperative- praesentis de omittendo eo quod quis jam facit 
intelligitur ; pn cum conjunctivo aoristi significat, non esse aliquid inci- 
piendum. Sed saspe tamen etiam de non incipiendo imperativus praesen- 

tis usurpatur. Praeterea praesens de re continuata usurpatur, ut pti 

/ffaXXcrs • aor. de re cito praetereunte, ut ph Ba\ris, quum sermo est de una 
teli emissione. (Herm. ad Viger., p. 807.) 



104 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

(4) The optative is also used in wishes. 

sv ■Qvqoitoi.g, ''may you die happily? 

Exercise 43. 

213. O young-man, do not steal the axe. I would 
pluck the flowers. You (pi.) would assemble the old- 
men in (= into, slg) the market-place. Do not (pi.) ad- 
mire false wisdom. From-desire of pleasure, I deceived 
my master. Do not disappoint (ipsvd) the hopes of the 
good. Do not make-yourself-acquainted-with the deeds 
of vice. Do not soothe your soul with pleasure. You 
would leave off. Let not young-men soothe their souls 
with pleasures. Let not the young-men steal. Hasten 
into the forum. Pluck those flowers. O citizen, pluck 
these flowers. O geometer, do not hide your true wis- 
dom. Mayest thou pluck the flowers of wisdom. May 
ye soothe this miserable old-man. May you defend the 
poor. May you ward-off winter from the vines (dat.) 
I should admire the city. You would admire the har- 
bours of Greece. 



XXIII. INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE. 

Lesson 64. 

214. ( 1) The regular termin. of the infin. act. is sip : but 
the first aorist has ui, the perfect svai with acute on the s. 

(2) The regular participial ending for the active is cov : 
but the first aorist has ag, the perfect cog with the acute. 

Pres. Fut. Aor. Perf. 

(3) Inf. rvnreiv zvipsiv rvxpai rezvcpsvai. 
Part, rvntcov rvxpcov zvxpdg rervqxog. 

(4) tCJ 3 The partic. of the aorist (unlike the moods) 
does refer to past time ; zvyag, having- struck. 

(5) As in the other moods, the pres. infinitive is to be 
used for continued and repeated actions, the aorist in- 
finitive for single definite actions. 



INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE. 105 

(6) ov dvvaucu, I am not able. ~) These imperfects 

£h Nm /m m «* assess?; 

feeMco, 1 am going (or about). (instead of the sttf- 
fyeXXov, I was going (or about). J Zafoc *)• 

Exercise 44. 

215. I am going to reap the ears-of-corn. You (pi.) 
were going to pluck the flowers. They were going to 
assemble the old-men in (into, sig) the market-place. I 
was going to write the letter. They-two were going to 
hide the axe. Do not look towards the sea. Do not 
leave off. Do not deceive the hopes of the good. Do 
not admire the self-satisfied. Having-reaped the ears- 
of-corn. Having-plucked the flowers. Going-to-hurt. 
Going-to-pluck the geometer's flowers. Having hast- 
ened. Having deceived the hopes of the good. Having 
turned his eyes towards (agog, ace.) the sea. Having 
admired the city. Having stolen the axe. About to hide 
the axes. About-to-number the horsemen. Having 
admired the horns of the wild-beast. Having-made- 
myself-acquainted-with true wisdom. About-to-leave-off. 
About-to-deceive the old-man. To have admired (perf.) 
Having admired (per/".) To-have-made-myself-ac- 
quainted-with virtue. Having-made-myself-acquainted- 
with the pleasures of true wisdom. To have brought 
the bones of the lawgiver into the market-place. 



Lesson 65. 

(Declension of the Participles.) 

Recite the Participles of pres. and fut. } aor. 1, and 
yer/.(p.91). „,';„. j m 

216. (1) Obs. Root of the pres. part, ends in ovt, ova. 
K " aor. 1. part. " avr, «cr. 
u a perf. part. " or, vi. 
5* 



106 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

(2) Bnt in the dat. plural (since ovrat, avzai, become 
ov6i, iZ6i) the root of the masc. and the neut. is the same 
as the root of the /em. 1 except in the perfect. 

(3) The partic. of both pcrf. and aor. answer to our 
partic. with ' having- ; ' the only difference being, that 
the partic. of the perfect intimates that the thing done 
still exists in its effects ; has had, that is, some perma- 
nent result. 

(a) The aor. partic. is by far the more common ; it is 
to be used in the following exercise when per/, is not 
added. 

,., <j amjl&ov, 2 1 went away. 

^ ' I anuai, he will go away. 

Exercise 45. 



217. Having admired the city, they went away. Hav- 
ing announced this victory, she went away. The-two 
having announced the victory, went away. Having 
soothed the soul. Pleasure having soothed the soul, 
withers it. Boreas, having withered the flowers, will 
leave off. Having polluted the temple of Minerva, she 
went away. The-two having polluted the temple of 
Mercury, went away. Announcing the victory, I soothe 
the souls of the citizens. O citizen, do not proclaim these 
things. Having practised (aor.) virtue. Having prac- 
tised (per/.) virtue. O boy, do not steal the figs. Who will 
give this to Mercury ? Having reaped the ears-of-corn in 
the garden of Philip. He loves to steal. Anchises went 
away. Having seen the eagles, he went away. Hav- 
ing plucked the flowers in the garden of the good judge. 
I have made-myself-acquainted-with the. laws of Greece. 



1 The reason is this : the feminines were originally ovraa and avraa, 
and became ovaa, hoa, by the operation of the same law which converts 
ovrat, avTai into ovai, a.71. 



trriv | Oft, 



£V, CTC. Of. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 107 

Lesson 66. 

218. (1) N. 6 ^(jaTTror, the (person) doing, is used 

for " he who does." 
G. rov nQUTrovTog, of him who does: or, of 

the man who does. 
D. rw nQ&zzovzi, to him who does: or, to the 

man who does, &c, &c. 

(2) So ?] nQccTzovaa, the woman who does, she 

who does, &c. 

(3) dco'croi rovro, I will give this. 

ov dcoaca rovTO, I will not give this. 

Exercise 46. 

219. I will give this to the man who proclaims the 
victory. I will give this to the woman who soothed the 
boy. I will not give this to those who left their rank. 1 
I will give this to him' who is weaving the flowers. I 
will pluck the flowers. Having flayed (per/.) the wild- 
beast, he went-away. Having flayed ( perf) the wild- 
beasts, they went-away. Having brought (perf) the 
gold, she went-away. I will not give this to those who 
are hiding the torch. I will give this to those who hid 
the torch. I will give this to those who have brought 
( P er f-) tne silver. I am come to flay (= that I may flay) 
the wild-beast. 1 would flay the elephant. 



XXIV. ON THE PASSIVE VOICE. 

Lesson 67. 

(Terminations of some tenses of the passive.) 

220. (1) Pres. opai ofitjv, Tmperf. 

Fut. &ri<joficu &t]v, Aor. 

Perf. [tat firiv, Plup. 



1 ra^is. The aor. 1. of Acurco appears here and there in good writers. 
-(B.) 



108 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

(2) The rules for augment and reduplication are the 
same as those already given. 

(3) Of course before the ■& terminations, the p and k 
sounds will become y, % respectively ; and the t sounds g. 

rplP- Tpup-Qriaofiai irplijiOrji' : rw(r)- rvipOfirrojiai, &.C. 

7rX«- 7rAi;£-0ij<7<Yiat inX^Qriv. 

TretO- ncia-Orjaofiai t-rrdaOrjv. 

(pv'Xaao- (follows k sounds) iptAa^-Siytro/iai, &C. 

vofii^- (follows t sounds) vojiLa-Qnoojiiai, &c. 

(4) Before p, the p and k sounds become /*, y respec- 
tively ; and the t sounds g. 

tqi^-, vs-TQifi-fiai : 7i7.su-, ni-nlsy-nai : nsid-, m-asia-fiai. 
tyvlaaa- (= k sound), ne-yvlay-nai. 
vqiiil,- (= t sound), ve-v6{iia-(Jiai. 

(5) The agent after a passive verb is governed by 
vno in the genitive. 

Exercise 4 7. 

ttf 13 The form a ioas defended" is to be translated by 
aor. .- "have been defended" by p erf. 

221. I shall be hurt by the soldier. I was hurt by 
the wild-beast. I was proclaimed. I was chastised by 
the lawgiver. I shall be pursued by the wild-beast. I 
am cherished. I am soothed. I have been hid. I am 
hid. I have been forced by the citizens. I have been 
admired by the Scythians. I was admired by the Per- 
sians. I have been deceived by the base flatterer. I 
was appointed by the judge. I shall be admired by the 
Ethiopians. I shall be chastised. I was admired (im- 
perf.) Vice shall be chastised. I will chastise the ser- 
vants. Who will bring the figs to the boys? Give me 
(your) hand. Write this letter. O iEneas, write the 
book. Look at the eagles and foxes. The wild-beast 
was flayed. Loose the hands of the man. He will be 
loosed. He was bound in chains and brought into the 
house. I will not give this to Philip. O lawgiver, see 
the men. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 



109 



Lesson 68. 



Passive of liquid and pure verbs. — For liquid verbs, 
attend to Rules 163 and 165: and for pure verbs, to 
Rules 173, 175. 



222. (1) Examples 

ayysXXofxai i)yyeXX6[it]i> 
ayyeX&qaOfiai. tjy/tX&tjv 
ijyyeXuai t]yysX[ii]v. 

znXsofiai 

Tslea&^aofiai 



Ti/A.t]&i](!Oixai hr(fi?]&i]v 
zsrifi?][A,ai ite7ifj,t](xi]v. 

iieXsofitjv 

STeXsa&ip 

STSTEXhfXrjV. 



(2) Learn and recite 6 dsTva, [ " such-a-one :" not talis 
or ejusmodi, but as we use " such-a-one," "somebody" 
"a certain" &c, often of a person whose name the 
speaker does not choose to mention. 

(3) 6 aXXog, the other, is used for " the rest," in agree- 
ment with its substantive, as " reliquum opus" in Latin. 

ii aXXij itoqa, the rest of the country. 

(4) avt'jQ rig, a certain man. 

Exercise 48. 

223. The flowers will be withered. The temple of 
Mercury was polluted by a certain young-man. I shall 
be wronged. I was deceived by a certain young-man. 
I shall be reduced to slavery. I have been enslaved by 
pleasure. I was threatened. I was flayed (imperf.) 
I have been flayed by the giant. The judge will chas- 
tise the base young-man. O lawgiver, do not colonize 











1 SeTva, " a certain one." 












Sing. 




Dual. 






Plur. 


N 


6, 


V, TO 


ieiva 




N. 


01, 


al, to. SeTvei 


<}. 


TOV 


rr-js, TOV 


ieivos 


N.A.V. TM, TCI, 70) Set HE 


G. 


T0~>V, 


tujv, tUv oeivoi 


D 


Toy, 


T ih r ~' 


fcXvi 


G.D. toiv, rah', toiv htXvoiv 


b 


TO IS 


tuTs, tois Mai 


A 


TOV 


T'ljV, TO 


tsiva 




A. 


TOVS 


tcis, tgi Mvas 



110 FIRST UKEEK LESSONS. 

the rest of the country. I was ashamed (imperf.) A 
certain young-man counted these things. The strength 
of Boreas will wither the flowers. They have admired 
the poet's flowers. He wondered-at the root of the vine. 
I will give this to such-a-one. He injured the rest of 
the country. 



Lesson 69. 

Give the terminations of the Pres. and Fut., Imper- 
fect, and Passive Aorists, from the Table, p. 92. 

^5= Remember that a neuter plural takes a singular 
verb. 

Exercise 49. 

224. The poet's flowers will be withered. The letter 
shall be written. The beauty of the harbour was ad- 
mired by the Persians. The statues shall be carved. 
The rest of the country shall be colonized. The dove's 
wing was admired by the peacock. The flowers are 
withering (pass.) You (two) are withering. The 
geometer was wronged by certain Persians. The (two) 
Persians were wronged by a certain self-satisfied young- 
man. I have been wronged by this base flatterer. The 
ears-of-corn shall be reaped. The flowers were plucked. 
The ears-of-corn were plucked {-Q-egig). The poet was 
reduced-to-slavery. I was flayed by the wicked (men). 
About to deceive his father, he went away. The swal- 
lows and geese are wondered-at. See the girls in the 
garden. 1 saw a certain man. He gave the fox to such- 
a-one. The torch was hid by the giant who stole 
Anchises' geese ? The father was loved by his daughter 
most-of-all (105). A certain poet was writing a book. 
This (man) was hid in the house. The silver was 
stolen. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 



Ill 



XXV. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT PASSIVE. 

(See 206, p. 100.) 

Lesson 70. 

225. (1) There is some difficulty with the perfect, 
and pluperfect passive, where the initial consonant of 
the termination makes a change of the last letter of the 
root necessary. 

(2) The first persons will all follow the first person 
sing., since they all begin with p. 

(3) The second singular, since it begins with d, will 
follow the first future, because the change of the con- 
sonant before aai will be the same as that before aco. 

(4) The third singular ending in tai, will be preceded 
by the smooth mute of the p and k sounds ; by a, if the 
root ends in a t sound (or £). 

[tCj" m is, of course, to be treated like a p sound ; cc, 
tr, like k sounds.] 

(5) The second and third dual, and second plural, 
will follow the first aorist pass., for the a will disappear 
between two consonants, and therefore the termination 
virtually begins with &. [See 123, p. 61.] 





(6) Examples 




fitftXanfiai 

pefiXdfi/is&ov 

^p.dfijisd-a 


fc'fiXaxpai 

@tfXaq)&ov 

fttfiXaq&e 


fitfiXcmTai 
PtfXacpdor 
[(3e(jXd/.t[A.eroi, tiai 


fi*§Qsyiiai 

fisPyzyfte&ov 

^^Qtyfinda 


^e^qe^ui 


fitpQEXTUl 

ptpQEX&ov 
\fit($QEyiavoi iter/] 


rjvvofiai 

IJVVGflE&OV 


ijvvoou 

TjVVG&OV 


ijtvarai 

yvvodov 
[t/1'vafiEt'Oi eigI~\. 


ZaqsaXnai 

iacpdX[XE&ov 

ioqdX[.iE&a, 


EGcpaXaai 
sacpaXOov 
eoqiaX&a 


tocpaXzai. 
EGqiaXOop 
[EGrpdX^sroi «W]. 



112 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

Exercise 50. 

226. The city is admired. This city will be admired. 
The temple of Minerva has been admired. The country 
shall be colonized. The land was colonized by the 
Greeks. The rest of the produce 1 has been reaped. You 
have been flayed. The victory was proclaimed. These 
things are done. These things shall be done. The 
horns were brought. You {pi) have been assembled 
into the city. The city has been proclaimed. These 
things were proclaimed. They will be proclaimed. The 
base flatterer was chastised. The laws shall be ap- 
pointed. You are appointed. You-two have been ap- 
pointed lawgivers. The temple of Minerva was polluted 
by the Scythians. The flowers were withered. 

Exercise 51. 

227. The axes were blunted. The temples of Mer- 
cury will be polluted by these base Scythians. The 
Scythians will pollute the temples of Minerva. This city 
has been reduced-to-slavery by the Greeks. Ye have 
been admired. They-two have been threatened. The 
earth was moved. The earth will be moved. These 
Things shall be dared. Virtue has been practised. The 
axe was stained-with-blood. The viper's head will be 
stained-with- blood. The axes will be blunted. The 
lion's head has been stained-with-blood. The flatterer 
shamed his race. The Scythian polluted the temple of 
Minerva. He admired the dawn. The beauty of the 
dawn has been admired. The axe has been blunted. 
The soul is blunted by pleasure. The desires of the flesh 
will blunt the soul. The garland 2 has been woven. 
Ye were hid. The geometer has been deceived. The 
geometer had been persuaded. The city had been 
adorned 3 with harbours. 



napnds, b. 2 artyavos. 3 Koajda. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 113 

XXVI. THE MOODS OF THE PASSIVE. 
Lesson 71. 



: 228. (1) 

rV7ZT-0[lCU 

Tvcp&rjG-ofiat 

izvcp-&nv 

riivfifiai 



Imper. 


Opt. 


Subj. 


Infin. 


-ov 


-oifinv 


-copai 


-eadat 


{none) 


-Olfi.TjV 


(none) 


-ea&ai 


-&TJT1 1 


-&EITJV 


-&w 


•{rijvai 


TSTVXlJO 


part, with 


part, with 


Tszvqi&ai 




El^V 


CO 





Part. 
-Ofxevog 
-ofisvog 
-d-sig 
rezv/xfisvog. 



(2) The subj. takes the terminations of the principal 
tenses (p. 86) with the mood-vowel go for the first persons 
and third plural : r\ for the other persons. But in the 
second sing, a is dropt, and vai contracted into %. [-m-[xcu, 
Xi (for n-aat, tj-ai), v-rai, &c] 

(3) The opt. follows the historical tenses (p. 86), and 
has oi for its mood-vowel, dropping a in the 2nd sing. 
\oi-\ir\v, oi-o (for oi-ao), 01-70, &c] 

(4) The terminations of the pass, aorists must be care- 
fully learnt. 

(5) In the perf. the a of c&ai in the infin. is dropt 
when the root ends in a consonant : so that the termi- 
nation is then virtually -&ai. Hence @i-@Xa<p-&ai, ni-n%£%- 
&cu. (See 123, p. 61.) 

Exercise 52. 

229. Let him be proclaimed. Let them be admired 
by the citizens. Be thou soothed. Let it be written. 
Let it be written (aor.) Let it be written (per/.) Let it 
be carved (per/.) I am come, that the flowers may be 
plucked (aor.) The image is going to be carved. I am 
come, that I may be persuaded. Be thou scourged. 2 
I was there, that I might be persuaded. Virtue, having 
been practised, sharpens the soul. The letter is going 



Drop the augment. 



2 jiaaTtyd-a. 



114 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

to be written. I will give this to those who are left 
(perf.) Those who were left {aor.) went-away. I 
wonder-at the things written {perf.) in the soul. 1 A cer- 
tain young-man stole what had been written. Having 
written the laws, the lawgivers went away. These 
things are written {j)res.) in the soul. I am come that 
the letter may be written. Be it written {perf.) Doing 
this, he would be hurt. I will defend that which has 
been hurt {aor.) I am going to be hurt. Having been 
forced {aor.) they went away. I should be ashamed {aor.) 



Lesson 72. 

0° The case absolute in Greek is the genitive. 

Exercise 53. 

230. The letter being written {perf), he went away. 
The boy, having been scourged, will cry-out. O boy, 
do not wail. The statue having been carved, the artist 
went away. These things having been done {aor.), the 
lawgiver will chastise those who did (them). Do not do 
this. The artists, having persuaded the citizens, went- 
away. The artists, having been persuaded, went-away. 
Having been injured by the citizens, they went-away. 
The young man about to be injured, went-away. The 
boy, being injured, cried out. The poets, having been 
deceived, brought flowers to the temple of the Muses. 
O Minerva, give this to the son of Xenophon. Xeno- 
phon, having been deceived, defended the letter. Who 
stole the girl's nightingale? A certain (fellow) came to 
the house and persuaded the father to strike his son. 
The city, being adorned with temples, is very beautiful. 
Philip is a base (fellow). 

1 Say — ' the (things) in the soul written.' 



MIDDLE VOICE. 115 

XXVII. MIDDLE VOICE. 

Lesson 73. 

Give the terminations, 131, p. 62 ; and 132, (4), p. 62. 

231. (1) The middle voice expresses an action that a 
man (1) does to himself ; or (2) for his own advantage, 
&c. ; or (3) that he gets done for himself, or his own 
advantage. 

(a) Many are simply deponents. 

(2) diddcxw, teach ; diduaxoftat., have- a person taught. 
Xovco, wash another. 

Xovopcu, wash some part of myself : also (wash 
myself = ) bathe. 

(3) diddcy.oficu idtdaaxofxrjv Xovofiou iXovoprjv 
didd^o/xat idida^dfiijv Xovaofxai iXovad/iTjv 
dsdi'Sayfxai idsdiddyfA.rjV Xt'Xov/xai eXeXovptTjv. 

(4) The only tense with any peculiarity of termina- 
tion is the first aor. mid. 

a\ir\v a ' aro 

afie&ov aa&ov aa&rjv 

afiE&a aa&e ccpto 

232. Vocabulary 26. 

Guard-myself; defend-myself yvXaaaofxca 

Let : mid. cause to be let to myself; 

hire 

Provide myself with araga-oxevd^ofiai 

Stop (trans.)] mid. stop (intrans.), 

cease 
Deponent. 

Force, compel $id£opah 

Exercise 54. 

233. I was defending myself. I shall defend myself. 
The Persians were defending themselves. I have hired 

1 For aao (ao=aj). 



[iia&c 



116 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

the garden. He stopt. I have stopt. I shall lament. He 
was lamenting. He lamented. I have stopt (177). I have- 
pro vided-my self- with this axe. I shall stop. He hired 
the garden. They will hire the garments. The boy 
has lied. I was bathing. They have washed them- 
selves. He forced the poet to bring flowers to the temple 
of Minerva. The man who proclaims (218) the victory 
defended himself. Philip is a little (fellow). Give this 
to him. Is Anchises in the city? I will compel the 
geometer to pluck the flowers. He who does this is a 
base (person). O daughter, provide yourself with 
strength. I am come to write (that I may write) a letter. 



Lesson 74. 
(Active verbs with future middle.) 

234. Many active verbs have a fut. of the mid. form. 
Of these, tfavfid^a), (iuonder-at, admire) ; xola'Co), 
(chastise); olficot,o3, (cry • out) ; tfyQaco, (hunt); 1 have 
been given in the Vocabularies. 2 

Exercise 55. 

235. The boy will hunt the hares. You-two will 
admire the beauty of the harbour. You (pi.) will punish 
the boy. The boy will cry-out. You (pi.) will pursue 
the hare. You (smg.) will admire the dove's wing. 
The other Persians will pursue the wild-beast. Who 
in-the-world will pursue the wild beast? Who in-the- 
world will chastise the base flatterer? Who in-the- 
world built the temple of Minerva ? O lawgiver, do not 
admire the false wisdom, of the Scythian. 

1 ciicoKu, pursue. 

2 From this time 0<w/nd£ctf, KoMfa, (which have sometimes fut. act.) 
are to take fut. mid. 



FIE ST GREEK LESSONS 

PART II. 



VERBS IN fit, ANOMALOUS VERBS, ETC. 



Obs. In this Part the Pupil is to accentuate his Greek. See Questions 
on Accentuation, at the end of the Volume. 



PART II. INTRODUCTION 



PRINCIPLES OF WORD-BUILDING. 



I. VERBS FROM SUBSTANTIVES AND 
ADJECTIVES. 

1. Verbs derived from substantives and adjectives de- 
note the b eing, having, making, or furnishing with, 
what the root expresses. 

2. dco, t'co, evco, (and sometimes oWco or ojztoo, d£co and 
/£a>) denote being or having. 

3. oca, %a>, vvo3, aivco, denote making, making into, or 
furnishing with. 

4. Obs. Those in «£co, /too, from proper names, de- 
note adopting the manners, party, or language of the 
person or nation : as, sXXrjviteiv, piidi&iv. 

(a) Other terminations are (1) desideratives in eko, 
from root of future, and in taco, «w from substantives ; 
(2) inchoatives in cxco: (3) frequent atives in «£<», i£oj, 

II. SUBSTANTIVES FROM VERBS. 

5. Endings to mark the man who does, are these : 
evg, 7t]Q, 703Q, and (of first declension) rrjg. 

In compounds og, and sometimes ag or jjg. 

6. The feminines of evg are tcrcra, eia. 

But ttiq and rao give re/^a, 7(k?, and tqiu. 
rt]g rQia gives, — remember this, — 
Not jQia only, sometimes rig. 



120 FJEST GREEK LESSONS. 

7. eiov, from name of man in avg,- 

Is th' instrument the man doth use, 
Ox 'place in which he works : rga, tqov, 
(From z);g and rag) with ztjoiov, 
Have the same meaning, which is meant 
By eiov : avov, 1 too, is instrument. 

8. (iog, (xr\ — and fia 
Whose genitive is tog, 
cig, aia, t\, or a, 

And (mas. or neuter) og, 

Are nouns from verbs ; and by them is exprest 

The doing, or the thing quod factum est. 

Remarks. 

9. The sigma terminations naturally follow the 
future ; and the mu terminations the perfect passive. 
The vowel terminations change e of the root into o, like 
the perf. mid. 

10. (iog generally becomes cpog, when added to 
pures. 

11. fly, fia, do not always take this sigma, even when 
the perfect has it : but they generally retain the long 
vowel of the future when they do not. 

12. nog denotes properly the doing (but often the 
thing done) : fia, the thing done : fir t fluctuates between 
both meanings. 

13. aig, (G. sag), aia ( = Eng. itig : Lat. io) denote 
the doing : though sometimes (as the terminations ing, 
io) the thing done. 

14. In some compounds cia denotes a permanent 
property. 

15. i] or a have not so distinctly marked a significa- 
tion, but the abstract notion generally prevails. Most 
of them are oxytone. Those in sia, from verbs in svoj, 
have the a long, and are paroxytone. 



From verbal roots. 



AVORD-BUILDING. 121 

16. Masculines in og are generally dissyllables with 
o for the vowel of the root; 1 neuters in og never take 
the o. Masculines in rog are longer forms, generally 
oxytone. 

III. SUBSTANTIVES FRO?tf ADJECTIVES. 

. 17. la, rtjg (G. rrjrog), avvrj. 

(a) A final t generally becomes a before ia : but not, 
if the termination of the root is at. 

IV. ADJECTIVES FROM SUBSTANTIVES, VERBS, 
AND OTHER ADJECTIVES. 

..n {iog (Eng. like, ly, en, &c.) ) mark belong- 

\ i-Aog (Eng. tive, sive, ic,&c.) \ ing, relating 

to, or proceeding from, consisting of, &c. 

(a) The termination tog coalesces with a final a, e, o, 

into aiog, eiog, oiog, qiog. — eiog is often from the name of a 

person (Eng. ic, ean). A final z often becomes a before 

tog. 

19. tog, tvog (Eng. y, en) denote the snhstance or ma- 
terial of which a thing consists. 

(a) Some in tro? are from words- of ike ; and some 
from other substantives and even adjectives (ulyeivog, 
ahj&ivog). 

20. Qog 2 (egog, t]Qog), als'og, eig {iqeig, oeig, leig) and cadyg, 
generally denote fulness, abundance (Eng. y,ful, ous). 

21. ifiog and mog denote capability, fitness, &c. ; 
those in. ifxog, both transitively and intransitively ; 

•'those in ixog only in a transitive sense. 

22. 6g, vog, log, calog, nog, and ag, also express the ver- 
bal notion as adjective ; most commonly in a passive, 
but sometimes in a transitive sense. 



1 Either as coming from roots with o, or by changing e into 
3 Observe the accents wherever they are given. 
G 



122 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

23. (io3v denote the possession of a habit or feeling, 
expressed by a verb. 

24. Teo? = part, in dus. 

25. tog = past participle; but often ^ or 'proper to 
be, (fee. (ihilis.) 

V. ADVERBS. 

26. co?, added to the root of adjective. 

27. cW, crs express maimer, place, &c. (from sub- 
stantives). 

28. &i=in a place: also the old datives, oi, tjai, 1 or 
(after i or p) aai : and (chiefly from pronominal adjec- 
tives) %ov, xn- 

29. &ev =from a place. 

30. 8s = to a place. 

31. cW, 8t]v, (fee, denote maimer (from verbs). 

32. t, a, rt, r«, fit?, are other adverbial terminations, 
denoting manner, circumstance, &c. 

33. cm is from national names. 

VI. PECULIAR CLASSES OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

34. Diminutives. — iov, Siov, i8iov, aqiov, aaov, vdgiov, 
vXXiov, vlXig, ig, ioxog, tout], &c. 

35. Amplificatives. — av, a|. 

36. Gentilia. — og, wg, ivog, uvog, qvog, izyg, iatr\g, cot?/?, 
evg. 

37. Patro- \ idijg (G. ov), tear, poet. G. (icovog 2 ) ) 
nymics. [ a8rjg (from r t g, ag, log) ) mas. 

ig, ag, tovq, ivi\ fern. 

A in Composition has three meanings : 

38. (1) a (= avsv, without), not, un-, (fee, negative. 

(2) a {= ayav, very much) strengthens the mean- - 

ing. 

(3) a (= ana, together) expresses the connexion 

between two objects. 

l Not w«. B. a Seldom uvog. 



ACCENTUATION. 123 

Table of the less obvious meanings of Prepositions in Composition. 

39. dfiyi, on both sides. 

40. dvti, against, marking opposition; in return 
for, &c. 

41. dvd, 1 up ; back again. 

42. 8td (dis) marks separation ; taking apart or 
aside. 

43. iv, often into. 

44. Hard, 2 down; it often implies completion, and 
hence (2) ruin, destruction (answering in both to per). 

45. fisra (trans) marks transposition, change, shar- 
ing. 

46. naqd sometimes signifies (like prceter) missing 
or doing amiss. naQafiatvsiv, to transgress, &c. 



ACCENTUATION. 3 

I. SUBSTANTIVES. 
(1.) First Declension. 



1. a, Gen. yg. Accent as far back as possible. But 
Roman names in Ira are properisp., and Greek names 
in 8a, &a, paroxytone. 

(a) Hence those in sia, from adj. in r\q, are proparoxy- 
tone, since they end in «. 

2. ga, accent as far back as possible, except verbal 
derivatives, which are oxytone. 



1 With 0aivtiv, &c, dva, vp, and Kara, down, mean respectively into 
the interior, and doion to the coast. 

a Hence Kara is sometimes equivalent to up in English : Karafyayuv, 
to eat up. 

8 See Questions on Accentuation, after the Appendix. 



124 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

3. vvt], paroxytone. 

(The other terminations can hardly be reduced to 
rule, from the number of endings and exceptions.) 

4. Stjg, aSyg, are paroxytone. 

5. TTjg from verbs, generally oxytone, except those 
that in the poets appear likewise with the termination 
r]Q, as xpdXzijg, xv§SQV)]Z7]g, nXdozrjg, y.Xmztjg, ipevcztjg. 

(2.) Second Declension. 

6. Here, too, words directly from the root (whether 
with or without the change of e into o) are paroxytones : 
those with peculiar syllables of formation (as pog, tog, 
&c.) are oxytone. 

7. Observe : xdXaf.tog, xoffjxog, oy/iog, olpog, oXpog, oQiiog, 
TToXeixog, n6z\xog, 3>\iog, and others in fiog, not being ob- 
viously derived from existing verbal roots, have the ac- 
cent as far back as possible. So ddvazog, y.ivdvrog. 



8. Qbs. vofiog, law 
Xovzqov, bath 
fii'og, life 
Sijixog, people | 



vopog, pasture-ground 
Xovzqov, water for washing 
fiiog, bow 
8rj[Acg, fat. 



9. ddeXqog, &eog, xgidg, Xaog, vaog, viog, with many 
others that are not abstract nouns, are oxytone. 

10. Neuters are accented as far back as possible. 
( — l sQnuTGv, £vyov, TirsQov, (oov, and the adjective sub- 
stantives qivrov, fiozov, QVZOV.) 

11. Diminutives in iov are paroxytone when they 
form a dactyl {naibiov) : when not, they throw the ac- 
cent as far back as possible. 
12. Of other diminutives, 

(a) ianog is paroxytone, vaaviaxog. 

(6) clqiov, i8iov, vXXiov, vqiov, propar oxytone. 



(minus) means ' except' : -f- (plus) means ' together with. 



accentuation. 125 

(3.) Third Declension. 

13. Monosyllables with accented a are oxytone. — 
nag. 

14. Monosyllable neuters, and those with nom. -g, 
ace. v, are perispomena. — Kkeig,mg', lis (but ace. iiXsiv, xlv, 

Xiv). 

{Polysyllables.) 

15. (a) Neuters throw the accent as far back as 
possible. 

(b) The following terminations (of mas. and 
fern.) are oxytone ; the others throw the accent back as 
far as possible. 

av, svg, oj 

ag,fem. + 6 avdqiag, i^dg. 

?]v — some proper names and adjectives. 

ijq. mas. + r\ yuorrjo. 

ig, ace. a — dyXig, dt'XXtg, [xsQ/xig, oQvig. 

ag — aXag, ydXoig. + 6 svQmg, idQcog, zacog. 

vg — fioTQvg, yivvg, yy]Qvg, 'iy%eXvg, d-Qrivvg, 1'tvg, 

xoqvg, xojftvg, vixvg, nsXsxvg, nrj^yg, nlxvg, 
TZQsofivg, atd%vg, yJXvg : — and some proper 
names, as FoQzvg, (PoQxvg. 

tov,fem. — yXfyav, pyxcov. + many proper names (as 
nacpXaycov, MaxsStov), the names of the 
months (raptjXtmr) all in soar) and dycov, 
ayxwv, alcor, dlexzQvar, rjys[i(av, xtjds^cov, 
xavwv, XsificSv, %nG>v, and a few more. 1 

16. Feminine names of persons in ig are accented on 
the same syllable as tbe 'masculine form from which 
they are derived : — if, however, the masculine was pro- 
paroxytone, or a dissyllable barytone, the fern, in ig is 
oxytone. 



' So words denoting a place lohere things are kept : e. g. 
(granary), &c. ddovs, tooth, is oxytone. 



126 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Thus avXt]T^Q, Znaqzidzi\g, but IItQ(Si]g, ai%[uilo3Tog. 
avbjTQig, Znuoziazig, IJegaig, alfflicskiOTip. 

II. ADJECTIVES. 

17. Simple adjectives (except those that are used 
substantively, as epilog, a friend, &c.) generally have 
the accent on the last syllable : compound adjectives 
not. But to this rule there are many exceptions. 



I. 

Oxytone. 

■dog, nog, log, i>og, 
7Tog,Qog,aog,ozog. 1 
aog when there is 
no kindred form 
in song. 
$19, G. sog. 
ag, G. adog. 
vg. — Verbals in 
tog. Dissyllables 
in oiog, coog: and 
aiog from sub- 
stantives. 

Exceptions. 



II. 

Paroxytone. 

tlog, vlog, Isog. 

Verbals inzsog. 

ag when G. not 

adog. 
sig, cov. 
Multiplica- 

tives in oog. 
rjg, G. Tjtog, 
with the word 

oliyog. 



III. IV. 

Proparoxytone. Properispom. 

iog,eog,}iog, Polysylla- 
and poly- bles in oiog 
syll. in siog q?og : aiog, 
(when these from subst. 
endings are Dissyllables 
simply ap- in aiog. 
pended to 
the root). 



alolog 


rjlixog 


psftjlog 


nrjlixog 


dtjlog 


ZljMXOg 


extjlog 




v.6log 




lalog 




oiog 




cpavlog 





Exceptions, 
aiovlog 



Exceptions. Exceptions. 



fialiog 
de^iog 
Tzolwg 
oxoliog 



aoaiog 
yeqaiog 
dqvaiog 



rjfiaiog 

xgazaiog 

nalaiog 



fiefiaiog \dixaiog 
§iaiog \fidratog 



ivavziog 8silatog\ 



fiovog 



sm^ogopmog /^.^ 
izafiog yeloiog ) 



1 When adjectives with these terminations are formed from simple 
roots. Of course fa, $0s come under aos. 








ACCENTUATION. 


I. 




III. 


axgog 




dvdQEiog 


yavgog 




yvvaixHog 


yliapog 




haigsTog 


ilev&SQog 

Xafipog 




tj'&sTog 
ft£ya7>eTog 


navQog 




olxHog 







b&vslog 


I'oog 




rzatdeTog 


fiioog 




naq&svuog 







cnovdsiog 


All in vvog 







. 




Those in 


Those in ivog 




eog, where 


from simple 


>proparox. 


the e is an 


roots,denoting 




Ionic in- 


a substance or 




sertion, 


species. 




are oxy- 


■ 




tone ; as 


ntfgrjg 




xeveog, &c. 


ijfuavg 






drilvg 






fiQEofivg. 







127 



(Compound Adjectives.) 



18. og. — Accent as far back as possible, except in 
those compounded of noun, verb (in that order) with 
long penult and transitive meaning ; which are oxy- 
tone. 

19. Exceptions. — Those in aQ%og, ovlog, are pro'par- 
oxytone : so are those in egyog, that express a worker, 
not as one who follows such an occupation, but as one 
who is of such a character. These become properisp. 
if a contraction takes place ; as, xaxd-eoyog, xaxovoyog. 

20. When the penult is short, those with a transitive 
meaning are paroxytone ; those with a passive or in- 



128 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

transitive meaning, proparoxytone : ^zgoxzovog, mother- 
killing : fxtjTooxTorot,', killed by his mother. 

21. Exceptions. — Compounds with short penult 
whose first factor is a preposition, a {privative ox inten- 
sive), dvg,ev, aei, ayav, agi, agzi, zgi, r/pi, £«, nav, nolv, are 
proparoxytone : so are many in o%og (from t^o?). 

22. Verbals in zog become proparoxytone in the com- 
pounds, when they are declined with two endings : not 
otherwise. 

23. tjg, G. eog. Those are oxytone (1) that have short 
penult, and a verbal root as their last factor ; as, lo^ucp^g. 

(2) Those ending in alyijg, ay&rjg, ei8rjg, ovgjyijg, 
nlti&Tqg. 

(3) The compounds with the words enumerated 
in 21 ; as, azegm\g, &c. 

24. The neuters of ygr ( g, ojdijg, are properisp. yjgeg, 
cod eg. 

25. The others in rjg, eog, throw the accent as far back 
as possible ^bneQiieyedijg, neut. vnegneye&eg). 

26. Those in ag, G. ov, are paroxytone. 

27. Those in rjg, G. ov, with penal t long, are oxytone 
(except those in n<olt]g) : those with penult short, par- 
oxytone. 

28. If, however, the last factor is an unaltered sub- 
stantive, the accentuation of that substantive is retained. 

29. All in nh% qc6%, zgoj%, Gq,a$, are oxytone. 

III. NUMERALS. 

30. Numerals throw the accent as far back as pos- 
sible. 

31. Exceptions. — (1) snra,6v.zo3,hv£a, exazov. 

32. (2) Adverbs in dmg {paroxytone). 

33. (3) Ordinals in oazog {oxytone). 

34. (4) Multiplicatives in oog, ovg. 

35. (5) Substantives in ag: [Aonig,zgi,ug,<fc,c {oxytone). 



VERBS IN fit. 129 

IV. ADVERBS. 

36. cog from oxytones in og is circumflexed : from 
barytones, paroxytone. 

37. co? from tjg is oxytone ( — those in tf&cog). 

38. cog, from vg, cor, eig, and participles, is paroxytone. 

39. ftsv 1 (1) Those in o&ev, o&t, oas, are paroxy- 
&i V tone ; except those from nag, dllog, ohog, 
rrs 3 hdov, and g'xro'?, 1 which are propar oxytone. 

(2) With any vowel but o before the termination, the 
accent remains on the syllable that has it in the original 
word: dgyjj&sv from dg/jj ; uvco&ev from dvco. Except 
txa&sv from sxdg, Altice iy.ag. 

40. 8e is enclitic, and treated as such ; rzohvSe, ohov- 
8e, Msyagcids. 

41. d8r t v is paroxytone : dor, rfiov, oxytone. 



Lesson 1 , 
VERBS IN 



1. This is a peculiar, but. small class of verbs and 
parts of verbs, which do not add the terminations by a 
connecting vowel (as o-[aev, e-te, &c), bnt immediately 
as in the perf. pass, (fiat, aat, &c.) 

2. Their peculiarity belongs only to the pres. and 
imperf. of all the voices, and to the aor. 2 act. and mid. 

3. They have some peculiar terminations, as [At, oi, 
for the^rs^ and third persons of the present active ; di 
for 2pers. of the Imperat. ; 2 or sometimes g in the second 
aorist. 

4. They form the rest of their tenses from simpler, 
generally monosyllabic, pure roots. They lengthen 



1 Remember these words by their meaning: "Every other house, 
within (and) without." 

2 As in the Passive Aorists. 

6* 



130 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



the vowel of these roots, and prefix i with the initial 
consonant of the root (the smooth being of course used 
for the aspirate), where it is possible. Sometimes vv or 
vvv is added to the root, which is then left without re- 
duplication. 
Thus: &e aza do deix axEda 

ri-&ri-fii i-OTtj-fii di-da-pi dEiK-vv-fii oxsdd-vvv-pi. 

5. The optative has the termination qr, and adds it 
to the short vowel of the root by the connecting vowel i. 

6. Terminations of Moods : 



Indie. 


Imp 


[il 


&l 


lo?\ V 





Opt. 



Subj. 



Infin. 
vai 



Part. 
rtg 



7. (1) For the present these forms are to be added 
(except in the indicative) to the root with its final vowel 
shortened (ti&e, lata, dido). 

(2) For the Aor. 2. they are to be added (except in 
indie.) to the short root from which they come (&e, aza, 
do). 

(3) The vowels will form a diphthong with i in the 
optative ; and be contracted into cu in the subjunctive. 

(4) But the infinitive of the second aorist has a long 
penult : s, a, o become respectively si, r\, ov or «. 

(5) "Ectrjv also retains t\ in the Imperative : and ri&?j- 
fti, fyfii, didcojii, take Aor. 2. imperat., &Jg, s'g, dog. 

(6) In the participle svrg, avzg, ovzg, vvrg 
become, of course, eig, ag, ovg, vg. 

8, Terminations of Tenses : 

[Yowel shortened 1 before term, of Dual and Plur. ex- 
cept in hti]v.] 



Pres. in 
Imp erf. \ 
Aor. 2. \ v ' 



Sing. 
g, ai, 



g, v thrown away. 



Dual. 
70V, 10V, 

zov, zijv, 



Plur. 
per, is, ■ptgi. 

fxev, is, aav. 



The n of iot^u, as coming from da, must be shortened into S. 



VERBS IN [11. 



131 



Obs. — In plur. 3. evzgi, uvtgi, ovzgi, wzgi, 
become, of course, eigi, dot, ovgi, voi ; 
or, eocgi, oaoi, vdoi. 1 







Lesson 2. 






9. 




TENSES. 








Sing. 




Dual. 


P 


iural. 


(#£-<») 


ri&rjfu 


ijg tjoi 


etov ezov 


ZflEV €ZE 


Eioi (Eaai) 


(ozd-co 


) IGZTjfll 


Tjg tjgi 


dzov dzov 


dflEV UlE 


aai 


(8o-co) 


8i8-co[ii 


cog COGl 


ozov orov 


OfUV OZE 


ovot(6a6i) 


(deix-03 


) 8stXV-V[Xl 


vg voi 


vrov VZOV 


V/ilEV VZE 


voi (vaai) 


Imperf. 


itid--ijv 


f]S tj 


ezov eztjv 


EflEV EZE 


eoav 




IGT-TjV 


rjg rj 


azov dzqv 


dflEV UTS 


ugccv (av) 




£8l8-cov 


cog co 


ozov OZ7JV 


OfiEV OZE 


oaav 




sSsixv-vv 


vg v 


VTOV VZ1JV 


VflEV VZE 


vaav 


Aor. 2. 


e&-tjv 


tjg tj 


ETOV £T?]V 


SflEV EtE 


eoav 




egz-ijv 


ns n 


TjZOV TjTT]V 


tjflEV 1]TE 


T\aav 




eS-cov 


cog oo 


OZOV ozov 1 


OfiEV OZE 


oaav 


(None from deixwpi.) 









10. 



MOODS. 



Ind. 



Pres. 
ri&Tjfii 
lazr/fii 
8i8cofu 
Sstxvvpu 
Aor. 2. 

E&1JV 

eaztjv 
eScov 



Imperat. 



(zi&EZi) 
(iGza&i) 
(8180&1) 
(8eixrv6i) 

&eg 

Gziq&i 

Sog 



Opt. 



Subj. 



ti&eiijvzi&cq (fjg, foe.) 
lataitjv lazco (yg, 2 foe.) 
8i8oh]v 8i8a (cog, 2 foe.) 



&E11JV 

azairjv 
Soitjv 



&co (fig, &c.) 
area (fig, foe.) 
Sco (cog, foe.) 



In fin. 



zi&tvai 
iGrdvai (a) 
SiSovai 
Stixvvvai (v) 

&EIVCU 
GZTJvai 

Sovvai 



Part. 



ri&sig 
iGzdg. 
8i8ovg. 
8siHvvg 

■&£t'g. 
ozdg. 
8ovg. 



1 The forms in aai are employed exclusively by the best Attic 
writers. 

a Observe that ay is here contracted into ?j (not ?), and drj into u 
(not 01). 



132 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

11. Obs. Is There is no difficulty in going through 
these tenses. Imper. e&i, eza>, &c. -Ot'g, oog (as if from 
Shi, do&i), dha, dorco.- — Optat. obrjv, oiijg, &C. 1 (as in p. 
94, note 2.) 

— alrjv, aujg, airj I atrjrov, aiij'ztjv I ait][XEV, aiijTS, alqaav 
or J alrov, airtjv \ ai^iev, cuts, uTev 

Subj. as subj. of passive Jlorists, except those whose 
root has o (as dtdatfn), which keep co throughout. 

12. Several persons are formed as if from n&eco, h- 
rcico, Mow. This is particularly the case with the 

( Imperfects, ki&ovr, ioloovv ; but not in larr\\ii : ideix- 

< wov, from the form in v<x>. 

( Imper at. ri&st, larij, didov, deixvv. 

So in the present, ti&ktg, lazag, &c, but this form is 
the least used in the present by the Attics. (B.) 

13. In compounds of tW^m, aru is used for azij&i. 



Lesson 3 . 
(Passive and Middle.) 



14. The terminations are those of the common con- 
jugation without the connecting vowel; that is, the ter- 
minations as given for per/, and pluperf. passive. 

g in 2 sing, generally remains; in imper at. go it is 
often thrown away, and the vowels then contracted : 



driv, as Opt. of passive Aorists: see Table p. 92, and note, 4 p. 





VERBS 


IN /«. 




133 


Imper. 


Opt. 


Subj. 


Infin. 


Part. 


£00 (ov) 


UfATjV 


03[t(U l 


eodcu 


t'/xwog 


aaoj (go) 


aifujv 


mjxui 


aadai 


dfxcvog 


oao (ov) 


Ol/XIJV 


OOfiUl 2 


OO&ttl 


6[i£vog 


vao 








vo&ai 


v[.i£vog 


(ego) ov, 


no, &.C.] 






(ugo)co, 


aro, dcc.j 






(oGo) OV, 


070, &c] 






(vao, 


vro, &C.] 






Imper. 


(Qp*. 


Subj. 


Infin. ! Part. 


(&£Go)Qov 


■Qnnqv 


■Qa/Aai 


ftsadui 


■ds/Aevog 


OT(i.OO,GTa> 


araip.rjv 


armfiai 


atuadat 


GrdfjiEvog 


[86ao)dov 


Soifiqv 


da/Aai 2 ■ 


doti&m 


dopevog 



Pres. 

IGT-UfAUL 

dtd-ofuu 
dti'y.r-vfxai 

^ Lnperf. 

£7l$t'[Aip> 
lG7U{Jt]V 

£Ol86fAljV 

ideiy.vvfx)])' 

Aor. 2. 
£-d{'[.l!]V 

soTajxrjv 3 ; 

toouijv 

15. The other tenses of these verbs are formed as if 
from i)£(o, ardco, 8oco, deixat : but 

(1) rrOtjfu, tijfii, didcofii, make anomalous Aor. i. with 
vm : thus Aor. 1. £\h]xa, 4 rjita, £do3xa. 

(2) In the two first of these verbs, the perf. is distin- 
guished hy a change of vowel sound; viWrna, uxa, — 
pass. Ts&etfjai; eiftai: 

(3) In the Aor. and Fut. passive, these verbs add the 
termination to the short vowel : £7£-&ijv, iard&tjv, ido&tjv. 
In tatrifAi, oiocnui, the perf. and plup. have also the short 
vowel : sfftapui, 8t'8of.iai. 



1 The Attics form Opt. and Subj. of n%ai, 'Ujxai, 6i8:<pai, exactly as 
if from verbs in dfiai, the accent being thrown back, and 01 in the Opta- 
tive : 



&c. 



TiQmpai (not ri&w/jal), tWo'ito, wpoaQrifai 

This analogy, as far as regards the accent, is followed by the other 
verbs in pi, wi-'pn, ivvano, &c. 

2 SiSufiai, o'Zjiai, keep the a (fipai,^, C>rai, &c.) throughout, as in the 
Act. 

3 This tense, and its moods do not really occur; they are stated 
here because some other verbs have them ; e. g. er-a^i/. (B.) 

4 This tense is confined to the indie, mood, and almost to the sin- 
gular and 3 pers. plural. 

The Aor. 2. (which is not used in the singular, R.) is used for the 
dual and two first persons of the plural. 



134 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



(4) In Act. of 'ktifui, Aor. 2., Per/., and Plup. have 
the intransitive meaning (stand) ; the Per/, with 
meaning oipres. (I stand). 

In Pass, the meaning is, Ho be \ilaced] throughout. 

In Mid. " " ' p lace myself;'' and also, 

place, erect. Aor. 1. Mid. has only the trans, meaning. 

Obs. Plur. 3. of Aor. 1. and 2. Act. must be distin- 
guished by their meaning, as they are alike inform. 

16. Hence the remaining tenses of Ti&rtfit, loztjfjii, 8i8co[xi, 
irjm are these : 



Jet. 


Mid. 


Pass. 


(u&tftu) Perf. ri&eixa 




TE-&ei[jiai 


Plup. iis&eixeiv 




ize&si'fjiijv 


Fut.l. &nam 


tfrjOOfiui 


ze&rjvoficu 


Aor. 1. e&7]na 


idijxdfxqv 


EZE&TjV 


(iaMjpit) Perf. hrrj'/M 




{■Gtafictj, 


Plup. iaz^nmv or ) 

UGZiqXElV ) 




i(jidfii]V 


Fut. 1. GZt'jOCO 


ctfjoopca 


aza&^(JO[xai 


Aor. 1. earrjaa 


i<jzTjGd[A.r i v 


iazd&tjv 


(8ida>[u) Perf. 8i'8<axa 




8f.8ofxai 


Plup. ideSaxsiv 




iSeSopqv 


Fut.l. dcooo) 


8c6(JO{i(U 


SodljGOflUt 


Aor. 1. tSmxa 


i8(axd[i?]v 


iSodrjv. 


(Irjfit) Perf. eixa 




eifxai 


Plup. etjfew 




siftrjv 


Fut. 1 . yam 


"]60\iai 


sQijaonai 


Aor.l.rjxa 


ijxdfiqv 


S&rjv 



PASSIVE VOICE. 135 

Lesson 4. 

(tlfll, e!(XI, \l]\Xl, qpJ/jMt.) 

17. (1) dfil, lam; 1 slpi, I shall go (pres. with fat. 
meaning). 

Imperat. Opt. Subj. Infin. Part. 

, , \ slut, i'o&i, (htm, &c.) e'i'tiv, w, slvai, wv. (am.) 

Moods. < 4 ' » a ' )» k„ v A * ' » ,, >> }~„\ 

I Eipi, i&i, (izoo, &c.) wipi, ica, isvai, icov. (go.) 

Present. 

elfii, (alg)e2, lazi{v) I lazov, iazov, I iaftt'v, laze, siai (v). am. 

eIui, (fig) el, eht, (v) | i'zor, i'zor, \ i{iev, ire, iaai (r). go. 

Imperfect. 



TjZOV, 7JZ7JV, 

i)azov, rjotijv, 

1jElZ01>,rjElZt]V 



ripev, { ' rjaav. {am.) 
ijei[iev,t]eiz£, fjsaav, 



\ iff ' 
yzov, \[Zi]V, I ijfiEV, fjze, {yaav). 



rp, (Jig) 7jc-&a,(y) ijv, 

%etv, ijsig, fjH, 
Tja,Att. iqEia&a,rfiiv, 

Future. 

'iaoixai, (sarf) saei, (eaerai) 'iatai, \ iaops&ov, &c. . . . (am.) 

18. irifii, to send forth (a verb in pi, like ti&ripi). 
Pres. Irjfii, (Js&i) tsi, Isiijv, too, levai, Isi'g. 
Aor. 2. [tjv] eg, e'itjv, cq, eivai, eig. 
Imper. fyv or tovv. 

Aor. 1. t]y.a. Perf. eha. 

19. q>wi, ( sa V)- 

Moods, gi^/, qsctiJi, (pairjv, qcc5 (Tjg), cpdvai, cpdg. 

Pres. qp»/p, cpi'jg, cfijai, &c 3 pi. cpaoi. 

(not cpyg) 

Imperf. scprfr, kprjg, eg??/, &c 3 pi. 'iyaaav. 

icprjG&a. 
Fut. (firjao). Aor. Ecpqaa. Mid. l^dynqv. Pass. nEqida^to, 
TiEqaofiEvog. Imperf. has meaning of Aor., and therefore 
cpdvai is used for Aor. infin. 

1 Many forms of these verbs are liable to be mistaken. Imper. 'ladi, 
from sipi, must not be mistaken for ia8i, from olSa. Infin. tivai, in tijil 
and JijjM, and ievai in ilfxi and irjpt, are distinguished by the breathing : 
but this distinction is lost in many compounds, e. g. vpoasTvat. So of 
Opt. and Subj. 



136 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

Lesson 5. 
[ri&i][u. See pp. 131, &c] 

Vocabulary. 

20. Word-buildi?ig.] — To put-down (aata-Ti&rjfii, 
W. 1 44). To put-to; to add (nQoa-zid-tmi). To place- 
round ; to put-round (neQi-ri&ijfii.). To put-up (avu-zi&tjpi, 
W. 41). That which is put up ; a votive-offering ; offer- 
ing (ava-d-riiia, n. W. 11. A. 15, a). That which is fixed 
(dsa/xog 2 = institution, ordinance, statute. W. 12. A. 6). 
A placing (dsaig, f. W. 13. A. 15: of laws, enacting: 
of names, giving). A placer (dkijs, g. ov. of names, a 
giver, W. 5). 

Stone (h&og, m. A. 6). Name (6vo{.ia, g. azo?, A. 15, a). 

Exercise 1 . 
In what number is the verb after neuter plurals? 

21. He puts-down the silver. Put-clown the money. 
I have put-down the gold. I am come to put-down the 
silver. He has put-up a votive-offering in the temple of 
Minerva. A votive-offering will be pnt-up in the temple 
of Mercury. O Neptune, beautiful votive-offerings will 
be put-up in the temple. A certain beautiful offering 
was put-up in the temple of the gracious god. Do not 
put-up the offering in this temple. I was there to put-up 3 
the offering. The giving 4 of names is something 
clever. The axe having been sharpened, the artist went- 
away. May the axe be sharpened. 5 He wondered-at 
the placing (pi.) of the stones. He was-going to put-up 
the beautiful offering in the temple of Minerva. He ad- 
mires the giver 6 of names. The giver of names was 
wise. He was putting-up the offering in the temple. 



1 A. = Rules for Accentuation. W.= Rules for Word-building. 

2 In Athens, Oca-fids was one of Draco's, yfyes one of Solon's laws. 

8 That I might put up. 4 Say, placing. 5 As a wish. 6 Say, placer. 



VERBS IN (ll. 137 

Lesson 6 . 

[81800/(1. See p. 131, &e.J 

Vocabulary. 

22. Word-building.']— Act of giving ; giving (Souig, 
f. W. 13. A. 15)., Gift (do^a, W. 11. A. 15, a). To give- 
away (dno-didmpi., give<ip, render). To give a share of 
({isTOrdidafu, W. 45, imparl). To give-in-retum («j>7(- 
8iSm(ii, W. 39). One-who-gives-forth (rrgo-doTije, W. 5, 
A. 5, proditor, traitor, betrayer). To give away from 
myself (cx.ho-5oc>{)hi,, mid. to se/Z). To suffer punishment 
(to give justice, fy^? 8i8w t ut). 

Exercise 2. 

23. The gods gave us 1 sleep. Give- us 1 -a-share of 
the gold. The unjust citizen will suffer punishment. 
He is-going to suffer punishment. O unjust judge, you. 
will suffer punishment. Give-a-share of your good 
(things) to the poor. He was giving-up the silver. The 
gifts of the poor are sacred. The base traitor has suf- 
fered punishment. The bad have suffered punishment. 
I am come to put-down a the silver. What will you give- 
me-in- return? She is going to sell the dove. Who in- 
the- world has given us these things? 



Lesson 7. 



How are the comparative and superlative degrees 
formed? (p. 55.) Repeat Vocabulary 19 (p. 55). 

(1) The comparative in the Greek governs the geni- 
tive. — aocfojiegog tov St8a<7xdlov, loiser than his teacher. 

(2) To express "he is too wise to do a thing," the 
Greeks said, '-he is wiser than so-as to do it." 

ooqcoTEQog i<STiv i] ghste noinv zovzo. 

1 Dat. of person. 



138 first greek lessons. 

Vocabulary. 
jy, than, mare, so as. 

24. To get or acquire (xzaonai: per/. I have got = I 
possess). A possession, from root xza (tiry-fiu, W. 11. 
A. 15, a). Act of acquiring ; acquisition : possession 
(xz n -aig, W. 13. A. 15, b). 

Exercise 3. 

tCf 3 What adjectives in og have only two termina- 
tions ? [Compound adjectives in og (except nog), and the 
terminations ifiog, wg, swg, aiog, are mostly of two termi- 
nations. See p. 43.] 

25. He gave-a-share of the gold to the very-clever 
poet. He will wonder-at the very-pious old man. O 
most pious old man, do not give-a-share of the silver to 
this most-hateful flatterer. He sold the dove to the Per- 
sian. The eagle is blacker than the dog. The wine is 
very sweet. Nothing (is) more hateful than a flatterer. 
Having-done very-base things, he went-away. Do not 
pursue the very-strong wild-beast. May you suffer pun- 
ishment, O basest man. He is admiring the very-broad 
river. The Nile 1 is very broad. The voice of the night- 
ingale is sweeter than that 2 of the peacock. He is too 
just to steal (say, juster than so-as to steal). No posses- 
sion is better than virtue. The possession (xzqaig) of 
virtue is alone secure. 



Lesson 8. 



[taztjut.] 
(1) Tenses with the intrans. meaning, "stand." 
Pres. iazafiai, ) Really pres. and imperf. pass. I am 
Imperf. lazd^v, ) placed = I stand. 

1 Ksftoj. 8 Say, than-the. 



VERBS IN fit. 139 

Fut. crrjaofiat, (really, fur. mid.) shall (place myself 

= ) stand : but also, shall erect. 
Jior. farqv, aor. 2. act. 

Perf. iGzt]Y.a, ) perf. and pluperf. act., with the 
Plup. eatfaiv, 1 ) meaning of pres. and imperf? 

Vocabulary. 

26. To stand-by {naQa-atijvai, 3 Accent on penult). 
To stand up {ava-aTtivai). To change my standing ; re- 
move, intrans. (fiera-aTijvai). To stand-away; revolt 
{ano-ar-qvai). To stand-round (nEQi-azijpai). Act of 
standing-away (ano^cx aaig, revolt. W. 13. A. 15, b). 
Removal (fistaaraaig). Act of standing-up (avaaruoig, 
resurrection). That which is placed between ; interval 
(diaarijfia, W. 11. A. 15, a). Act of standing (ctaoig, 
used for sedition*). Stand-apart; separate (dia-ozijvai). 

Exercise 4. 

27. He removed from the country. He will stand-by 
his friends (dat.) They stand-by their friends. Mayest 
thou stand-by thy friend. He is going to stand-by his 
friends. The resurrection of the body soothes the pious. 
The revolt of the island injured the city. He wonders- 
at the seditions of Greece. Seditions injured Greece. I 
will remove from this country. He rose up from (s'jc, 
gen.) his bed. 5 The Medet 6 revolted from the king. The 
Medes were-about to revolt from the king. 1 wonder-at 
the removal of the geometer. O geometer, rise-up from 
your bed. The geometer wondered at the intervals be- 
tween the chords {say, of the chords). Give (me) where 
I may stand. Those who stood-around wondered-at 
the strength of the fire. Those-who-have-revolted. 

1 Or uarfiKCiv. 

2 But in some of the compounds, the perf. has a real perfect meaning. 

3 The compounds of tarV/jui are here given in the infin. aor. 2. 

4 Of which Plato says, it might be better called <5ia-<n-acnj, " stand- 
ing apart." B K\ivrj. e M^Joj. 



140 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Stand-up, O lawgiver. Those who were hurt stood- 



apart. The Persians were 
your friends (13, p. 132). 



stan ding-apart. Stand-by 



Lesson 9, 



Transitive forms of iaf$u: 



Act. 
Pres. i(TZ7]f.a 
Imp erf. tazijv 

Pill. UTtjOG) 


Pass. 

lGZU(.tCU 

lazd(.v]v 
Gzadijao l uai 


f Mid. 

lard^utjV 
oztjoojjai 


Aor. 'iazijaa 

Per/. 

Plup. 


lazd&qv 
tazaixai 

k(3zd[l7\V 


EatrjaufDjv 




Vocai 


5ULARY. 



The mid. is divided 
between the meaning 
place myself, and that 
*" of place, erect (e. g. 
a monument). Aor. 
mid. has only the lat- 
ter meaning. 



28. To make to stand-up; raise (dv-iazijfit: also, to 
expel a body of men from their country ; that is, to make 
them rise up and quit their homes). To make to stand- 
away (dcp-iozijfjt, to make to revolt). To remove, change, 
trans. ((isd^-tazr^u). 

Obs. As 'abeo visums 1 is ' I go to see 1 , so the fat. 
part, in Greek may express a purpose. %y.co, lam come, 
imxovQrjoav, to administer-aid, efce. 

Exercise 5 . 

29. I am come to (p 1 ) make- the Scythians -revolt. 
He made- the Medes -rebel from 3 the king. I am come, 
that I may make- the island -rebel from the Persians. 
tie was there to expel (say, that he might expel) the 



1 A p will be placed after the ' to,' when it is to be translated by a 
participle. 

2 From after revolt is gen. or dn6 with gen. : to is Ttpfe with ace. 



VERBS IN (11. 141 

Lydians. 1 The dogs (p. 34) will put-up the bares. A 
trophy 2 will be put-up. I am come to (p) change the 
constitution. 3 The lawgiver changed the constitution. 
The soul shall be removed from this country. The soul 
having been removed (aor.) from 4 the earth, is happy. 



Lesson 10. 



30. Some contracted forms of fdnffti occur in the perf. 
and pluperf., of which the following are the most com- 
mon: 

Perf. dual, 'iatarov. plur. ixszausv, eczute, iazaai(v). 
Pluperf. 3 pi. egzuguv. 5 Inf. iaiavaf Part, sGtag. 
Part, iozcog, sazooaa, iozcog (or sazog). 
Gen. sazwrog, sorma^g, sGtmrog, &c. 

Exercise 6. 

31. The king will punish those who have revolted. 
The king of the Persians punished the island which- 
had-revolted. (It is) a terrible thing to revolt 6 (perf.) 
Those who-have-revolted shall be punished. We have 
revolted to the king of the Persians. Do not put-down 
(aor.) the silver. They were going to put-down the 
gold. Ye were there to (p) put up the offerings in the 
temple of Ceres. Do not stand-by the bad. (13, p. 132.) 
He is too pious c to revolt from the gods. 



1 AvSos. 2 rpijfaiov-. 3 i; n-oXiYa'a. 4 « with gen. 

5 tvTdfiev, &c. from pluperfect, hardly occur in prose. hrriKivat is 
perhaps not in use at all — caraQi, harainv, are poetical: of the subj. lorw, 
the forms with n do not occur. 

6 Express the article. 



142 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

Lesson 11. 
\l n( ii, p. 134, 135. 16, 18.] 

Vocabulary. 

32. To send or throw away (.acp-iypa, dismiss: let 
go : hurl, shoot). To send-together, i. e. put-quickly- 
together = understand (aw-ii][ii). Intelligence (avv-s-aig, 
A. 15, b). Dismissal (acpeaig). 

Missile (fielog, n. A. 15, b. — dart, javelin, arrow). 

Exercise 7. 

33. The soldiers hurled their javelins. I will let- you 
-go. The darts being hurled hurt nobody. The boys 
are shooting their arrows. I am come to (p) shoot-off e 
my arrows. O boys, you will shoot-off your arrows. 
Let the dart be hurled (imperat. of perf.) The darts 
were hurled. They were-about to hurl their darts. 
Having shot-off his arrow, he went away. Having shot- 
off these arrows, I will go-away. A certain boy had 
shot-off an arrow. The boy understood his father's 
words. You understood what (o nent. of rel. 1 ) I was 
saying. The geometer was astonished-at the intelli- 
gence of the boy. Do not say what you do not 2 under- 
stand. If we understand {say, we understanding : gen. 
absol.), they will be silent. 



Lesson 12. 

(Contracted verbs in eoo.) 

Repeat Rules, p. 95. Art. 204, 1 ; and Vocab. 24, p. 80. 
Obs. In present tense we have si, ov, for e, o. 

1 See Appendix, § 4. 2 M. 



veres in dm. 143 



Exercise 



34. Ye are injuring the good citizens. Do not injure 
the good citizen. Do not threaten. He was there to 
threaten {say, that lie might threaten) the base flatterer. 
What in-the-world are you threatening me with {say, 
are you threatening tome)? The self-satisfied young- 
men were threatening the just judge. Ye were injuring 
the just artist. The two young-men were injuring the 
pious old-man. Ye were counting the seditions of Greece. 
Practise virtue. The Persians practised {imp erf.) this 
virtue. The citizens were-unfortunate. Do not move 
the stone. The boys were moving the great stone. Do 
not rail-at your father. The artists were putting-up the 
offering. The boys were giving-a-share of the flesh to 
the wild-beasts. The boys were shooting-off then; 
arrows. Do not add {pres.) this. 



Lesson 13. 

(Contracted Verbs in «<».) s 

Vocabulary. 

35. Word-building.'] — Deceit {anarri). To have or 
use deceit ; to deceive {dnaram). Deceitful {dnarrilog, 
W. 22. A. 17). To laugh {ysXam,fut. yelaaofiai, see p. 
84, 193, a). To be inclined to laugh {ysluaHm, W. 4, a). 

{Model Sentence.) 

hdv 7i sxMfiev, bcooofxEv : if we have any thing we will 

give it. 
nuv (= xui av, Hal idv), even if; even though. 

1 In these and the following examples, use the contracted imperfects 
of ri%« and V- See P- !32, 12. 

2 See p. 97. 



144 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

In a conditional sentence with ' if use lav with the 
subjunctive when the verb of the consequence is in the 
future. 

Exercise 9. 

36. Having been deceived (aor.), he went-away. He 
is going to deceive his father. If you deceive your fa- 
ther, the gods will chastise you. The boy is deceitful. 
The race of flatterers is deceitful. 1 The citizen was rail- 
ing-at him who-had-deceived (him).* Ye are deceiving 
your mothers. He was daring (to do) this. Who iu-the- 
world dares to do this"? Do not deceive (sing.) If you 
dare (to do) this, you will be chastised. Who in-the- 
world erected the trophy? I will chastise him who-is- 
daring f this. Do not hunt (pi.) this hare. O Apollo, 2 do 
not injure this city. I will give-a-share of the milk (p. 
34) to the boys. Whoin-the-world (pi.) built this temple 
to Mars ? 3 He wondered at the laughter 4 of the deceitful 
(man). Even though you laugh, you shall be chastised. 
The boy was laughing. I should laugh. He wounded 
(p.anx) the Scythian with his spear. 5 O boy, you are 
inclined-to-laugh. 



Lesson 14. 

(Contracted Yerbs in ooo.) 

Vocabulary. 

37. Word-building.] — To make accurate, from 
o$Qi@tjg (ay.Qjftoca, to know accurately ; to observe accu- 
rately ; keep accurately). Accuracy (ay.QTfieia, W. 17, 



1 Begin with the adjective. 2 P. 32, 6G. Obs. 2. 

E "Af>7??, "Apcos i^'Apsais) "Ajsci, &c. (see Appendix; § 5). 

4 yz\ws, ytXcoros, &.C. (App. § 5). 

5 SSipv, T 6 (App. § 5). 



VERBS IN 003. 145 

A. 1, a). Accurately (axoTficog, A. 37). To enslave, 
strengthened from dovlooj (xaia-dovlooj, W. 44). 

Both ts, 1 after its word. 

Jupiter Ztvg, Aiog, Ad, Ala, Voc. Zsv 



Hero 



1]QCOg, COOi, 



T hales Qalt;g, Galea, &c. 

Hair #0t£, V> "^Q^og, &c. 

Head xaqti, -/.Qarog 

Key aleig, tj, xlsidog, &c. 

Mess, porridge xvxeav, 6 

Stone laag, lag, 6, &c. 

Witness pdorvg, [idgTvoog, &c. 2 

Exercise 10. 

38. You are staining- the boy's hair -with-blood. He 
was there to enslave a the islanders. 3 You know- the 
name -accurately. Do not accurately-observe this. The 
Persian was accurately-keeping his rank. The geome- 
ter will wonder-at the accuracy of Thales. O Jupiter, 
do not observe-accurately these works. The Greeks 
built this temple to the great 4 Jupiter. He admired the 
hero. The hero's hair (pi.) was-standing on-end (say, 
straight, dg&og). I was wondering-at this kind of hair 
(pi.) You will wonder-at both the hair (pi.) and the 
claws of the wild-beast. I will give the key to this ser- 
vant. He wondered at the mess. I will give the mess 
to these witnesses. The boy admired the dogs of the 
Greek. 



Lesson 15. 



$Cj=- Repeat the present and future tenses of the verb 
to be, p. 135. 



1 This is the weakest 'both.' kcu before its word is stronger. 

2 See Appendix for these Irregular Nouns, § 5. 

3 Islander, from vrjaos (vrjcriWDys)- * p. 53. 

7 



146 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 





Vocabulary. 


CEdipus 


Oldinovg, Oldinodog and Oldinov, &c 


Ear 


ovg, to 


The Pnyx 


Hvv^, Uvvxog, &c. 


Neptune 


TJooEidcov, covog, &C. 


Water 


vScoq, vdaTog, 70 


Hand 


PJQ, WiQos, &c. 


Son 


l>IO£, WOV, &C. 1 




Exercise 11. 



39. Nature has given great ears to asses. 2 I will give- 
a-share of the water to the bird. O Neptune, do not hurt 
this city. You will not deceive Neptune. They were- 
going to pollute the temple of Neptune. They were-not- 
able to deceive Neptune. The old man will assemble 
the wise Greeks in (dg) the Pnyx. You (pi.) will ad- 
mire the swallow's wings. He has two sons. 3 He has 
(say, there are to him) beautiful daughters. O boys, ye 
are deceitful. Ye will be wise. It will be just. The 
woman will give this to her husband. 4 



Lesson 16. 

tO^ an-eifii, ' I will go away ' (see conjug. of slpi, 
p. 135). Repeat the tenses of octzeiju. 

40. The radical vowel of this verb is i, lengthened in 
some forms to si. 

41. el(ii = will go : the other moods whose nature 
allows it, have also this future meaning, which does not, 
however, appear in dependent and secondary sentences, 



1 See Appendix, § 5. a tivos, ov, b. A. 6. 

3 There are to him two sons. Express '■ two' and use the dual for 
sons.' 

4 dufip, p. 42. 



JErOND AORIST. 147 



in which they are generally employed. — Obs. lav with 
accent of an aorist participle. 

Exercise 12. 

42. The citizen having-been wronged (perf.) will 
go-away. Having-been wronged, yon will go-away. 
The poor (man) will go-away empty. Let him go-away. 
We will not go-away empty. O most empty of flatterers, 
go-away. If you go-away you shall be punished. Hav- 
ing threatened the very-base old man, we went-away 
into the city. Let us go-away (subj.) to deceive the 
very-wise old-man. 



Lesson 17. 
(Second Aorist.) 

43. (1) Comparatively few verbs have the second 
aorist in the act. and mid. ; but more have it in the 
passive. 

Some verbs that have aor. 2 act. : 

fiaXh "/.gat- (short root y.Qay) cpevy- lurt 

cast, hit croak fly '; fly 'from leave. 

Some verbs with aor. 2 pass. : 

ZU6G03 (Taj) GHOiTZTOa QC171TG) 1 XQVTZT 1 OTEIQ 

arrange dig sew hide sow 

44. Very few verbs have both aorists in use in the 
same dialect: xQvnra and §lanra have (in the pass.) 
Such verbs may be compared with dig, &c. ; which 
have two forms for their perfect, digged, dug. 

Vocabulary. 

45. Word-building \— Act of arranging; order, rank, 
post [ray-Gig = rahe, W. 13. A. 15,6). Act of digging, 



4 For the short root of these verbs, see 136, p. 65. 



148 FIRST GREEK LESSON. 

from ay.anr, to dig; short root, cy>aq> (exwapi], W. 15). To 
dig-down (xara-oxanico = to raze walls, &c.) Act of 
razing (aaraaHaqiy, W. 15). To stitch or sew together 
(ovQ-Qa7tzo3 ] ). That which has been dug (axa^-pa, foss ; 
trench, A. 15, a). A digger [paannqQ, W. 5). From to 
sow, GTzeiQ-G), form that which is sown ; seed (cneQuu, 
A. 15, a). 

Exercise 13. 

46. The Scythian left his rank. Why in-the- world 
did the Persian leave his post? He was hit by a great 
stone. The raven croaked. The young-man fled into 
the city. The wise words were put together 2 by the 
flatterer. The citizens will both dig and sow. That- 
which-was-sown f withers-away. The Greeks fled 
towards the walls of the city. Vice will wither the soul. 
I do not accurately-know the name of the seeds which 
ye sowed. I did not accurately know the name of the 
seeds which were sown. I am come, that I may raze 
the walls. By whom were the walls razed ? I am come 
to raze b the walls of the city. They were lamenting 
the razing of the walls. They are too wise c to fly from 
their friends. 



Lesson IS. 
(Perf. 2. Seep.S2. Attend to 185.) 

Vocabulary. 

47. Word-building.~\— T To break-to-pieces (xaTayvvpi. 
See Appendix, § 8). Pitcher (x^' T Q a )- A potter (^vrgevg, 
A. 15, b). To have wealth, to grow or be rich, from 



1 The cvp is vw with its final consonant assimilated : it will appear 
again as aw before the augment. 

2 Aor. 2 from aiSdpdirrbi. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN a. 149 

nlovrog, wealth (nlovz-eco). Wealthy (nlovaiog, W. 17, 
A. 17). To send-up (avujfxi : also to dismiss, relax, 
slacken). Relaxation, laxness (av-e-aig, A. 15, b). Slave 
(dovlog, A. 6). Act of flying, flight, from cpevy (cpvy-r h 
W. 15). A fugitive (cpvy-dg, G. ddog, deserter, exile). Act 
of lamentation (odvgpog, W. 10, A. 6). 

Verbs with per/. 2 : Xelnco, cpevyco, &c. See Voc. 25, p. 83. 

Exercise 14. 

48. All have fled. I will pursue those who have 
fled. f I would-not-fly-from g the pleasures of virtue. 
The boy broke- the pitcher -to-pieces. The pitcher is- 
broken-to-pieces (per/. 2 act.) I lament my father's 
flight. I shall lament the evils 1 of old age. What in- 
the-workl is the lamentation ? I will put-a-stop-to this 
lamentation. I would not leave (ctor. 2) my post. We 
have not left our post. Wealth is sent-up out-of (ex, gen.) 
the earth. The potter, having-gfdwn T wealthy } will re- 
move out-of the country. The potters are wealthy. 
They will punish the deserters. He did not-understand 
the slackening of the strings. The strings were slack- 
ened. 



Lesson 1 



(Irregular Yerbs. Learn the Irregular Verbs in a. Ap- 
pendix, § 8.) 

Obs. 1. aiQHOJ, take : in mid. take to myself; choose, 
elect. 

are the Attic forms of vavg, 
ship. Thucyd. has dual 

VEOIV. 

Obs. 3. 'A\xaor<xvK> with gen. is to miss (an aim, &c.) 
'AlQto (assist: with ace. ward off) is in mid. 
ward off from myself; repel; revenge- 
my self -on. 

1 Neut. pi. of (ca/ros, as mala in Latin. 



Obs. 2. vavg, t'scog, vrjt, vavr, 
vlfig, vsmv, vaval, vavg, 



150 first greek lessons. 

Vocabulary. 

49. Word-building.} — Form from aiQs- 03 , subst. to 
express the act {aiqeaig, choice, A. 15, b). From otgazog, 
army, aym, lead, form one who leads an army, general 
{aToarrjyog, A. 18). Form from aiQs-vjiat, adj. to express, 
capable of being taken, or fit to be taken {aiQerog, eligible, 
desirable, A. 17). From 8ovlog, slave, form to be a slave 
(Sovlevco). From d^aQts, shorter root of ccfictQi dice, form 
subst. a sin committed {auaQzij/xa, error). — Sin {a^aQila). 



Worthy {d&og, A. 17). Death {dararog, A. 7). Aim, 
mark {axonog). 

Exercise 15. 

50. The general took the town. Pleasure has taken- 
prisoners (aloe) many men. Let not him who has-been- 
chosen f (aor.) go away. Those who-had-been chosen/" 
lamented {imp erf.) I wondered-at the generals, whom 
you elected. 1 would not choose g (aor.) this. She led 
the boy' by the hand. The mother was leading her 
daughter by ' the hand. I did not perceive the boy {gen.) 
The city was taken. If the city be taken 1 {aor.), I shall 
lament. The city is-going to be taken. All the ships 
were taken. Having been taken {aor.) they will be- 
slaves. This life would not be g desirable. What do 
you order concerning 2 the choice of generals? If you 
hide these things, you will sin. He sinned (things) 
worthy of death. He has missed his aim. Whosoever 
{og av, with subj.) has sinned {aor. subj.), shall be pun- 
ished. The boy having committed {say, having sinned) 
great sins, the father was lamenting. You will miss 
every thing ( pi.) You would miss s your mark. If any 
one sin {aor.), he shall be punished. Sin blunts the soul. 



1 See Lesson 13, p. 143. a rrcpi with genit. 



IRREGULAR VERBS IN (3. 151 

Sin having blunted your soul, you will commit (say, sin) 
great sins. Justice increases cities. True wisdom will 
increase the city. I am come to revenge-myself-on b my 



Lesson 20. 



(Irreg. Verbs in $. See Appendix, § 8.) 
Vocabulary. 

51. Word-building .] — To go from (aaofiaiva = turn 
out, of events, &c. : also to disembark). To go up (ava- 
^aivca, from the coast to the interior of a country: also to 
mount). To go down (xaTa-@aiva>, to the coast from the 
interior). Act of going-up (ava-paaig). 

To come together (avfi-ficuva), happen). 

To throw away {ano-fcdlm). The act of throwing 
away (ano-fiolrj, W. 15). A thrower away (uaofiolevg, 
A. 15, b). To be thrown-away, as adj. (uno-filqtog). 

To eat down (xaTa-fiipQcaaxa) = eat-up : see 43.) 

When? note ; 

Exercise 16. 

52. When will the general disembark ? I will look 
towards the things that-will-turn-out. f I wonder-at the 
throwing-away of his arms. Who in the-world threw- 
away (aor. 2) his arms? The very-base man has 
thrown-away the silver. The horns of the stag were 
thrown-away (aor. 2). Having disembarked from (ex) 
his ship, he left the city. Those who-have-disembarked 
from the ship, will go away. 1 wonder at the things 
that-are-turning out/ The thrower-away of his arms 
has injured the city. Having-mounled (aor.) his horse, 1 



1 Say, on his horse ; mi with ace. 



152 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

he will pursue the wild-beasts. He is going to rmunt 
(on) his horse. I have gone on board. 1 The general 
disembarked from his ship. Cyrus 2 went-up against 
(£m, ace.) the king. I was wondering-at those who- 
Avere-about-to-go-up f against the king. Ye will go-down 
towards the harbour. The quail was-going to be eaten- 
up. The generals were going to disembark from their 
ships. Many evils had happened. The trees grew 
(^laaravta). 



Lesson 21. 



(Learn Irregular Verbs, y, d, App. § 8.) 

sin e%oi[u, dortjv uv. if I should have any thing, I would 
give it. 

53. When in a conditional sentence, both verbs have 
should, would, both are in the optative: the conditional 
verb without ai>, the other with it. 

Vocabulary. 

54. Word-building.'] — From root yvo form act of 
knowing, knowledge (yvaaig, A. 15, b). To know some- 
thing against a man (xaza-yiyvwayM = to condemn). To 
run-away (uno-bt8Quay.a). 

Exercise 17. 

55. The lion shall become a horse. The slaves will 
become masters. If the slaves should become masters, 
the change would be just. If the slaves become masters, 
they will punish the citizens. I wonder-at the things 
that-have-happened f (part. per/. 2 of yt'yro/nai). Some- 
thing of-that-kind (roiovzog) was going to happen (aor.) 
They will become better. 3 (It is) a hard thing to know 
the soul. Being gods, ye know the affairs of-men (adj. 

1 Say, have gone-up into the ship. 2 b Kvpos. 

3 Drop the v from 0e\rMv, and contract. 



IRREGULAR VERBS, £. 153 

av&Qoamvog). Let-us-know (aor.) if you speak true 
(things). Nothing (is) better than knowing' these things. 
I wonder-at-those-who-know (aor.y these things. The 
dog will bite the boy. The dog would bite the boy. 
The boy having-been-bitten by (vno. gen.) the dog, was 
crying-out. The Ethiopian having-been-bitten 2 (aor. 
1), ran-away. The city was built by the Greeks. 
Those-who-built f (aor. 1. mid. regular) the city, ap- 
pointed the laws. Who in-the- world taught the boy? 
I will have- the boy -taught the arithmetical 3 art. If 
these things should be 4 so, I shall run away. If these 
things should be so, I should run away. The slaves, 
having run away, shall be punished. 



Lesson 2 2, 



(Irregular Verbs, s. App. § 8). 

Obs. 1. eysioa, awaken, stir-up ; rouse-up : iyQtjyoga, 
I am awake. 

Obs. 2. (Eng.) The rhinoceros has a very hard hide. 
( Greek.) The rhinoceros has the hide very 
hard : Ttjv dogav layvoordrriv £%ei. 
Obs. 3. Add to the Irregular Verbs : 

iXavvco, drive ; iXdoco (iXa, ag, a)} 
iXijkay.a, strikapai, Tjld&rjv. — Drive away (un- 
sXavvco). 

Vocabulary. 

56. Word-building.] — Am asleep (xa&evdm). Oppo- 
site (ivavziog, A. 17). Immediately (d&vg). That which 



1 ei with indie. 

2 Aor. 1. pass, and perf. pass, are regular from Sr)K. 

3 From dpiO/ie form adj. to express relating to counting {UpiQunTtKog, 
17, arithmetical). 

4 Aor. of ytykOftw : SO, oiircjf. 

7* 



154 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

is eaten, from ids (tdeapa, W. 11). Proper to be eaten 
(idsorog, esculent, W. 24). A finder (evQEtr^, W. 5. A. 
5). A thing found (nvoijua, W. 11. A. 15, a. invention, 
discovery). From dvpog, ??iind,form to have the mind 
on (im {^vu-e'co, desire, governs gen.) Form easily from 
Qadiog, easy (gocdicog, A. 36). 

Exercise 18. 

57. Do not wake the base desires of the soul. He will 
stir-up a sedition in the city. Ye have stirred-up the 
desires of vice. The boys having been-awakened (nor. 
1. pass.), will go away. You immediately were-awake j 
(perf.2). Being-asleepJ is opposite to being-awake. j I 
will give the keys not to those- who-are-asleep/ but to 
those-who-are-awake. f Do not eat 1 things 2 not (fit]) 
proper-to-be eaten. He said this. Let us follow this 
(man). 2 His friends were following Thales. Ye will 
follow the just judge. 2 Let us go to (nQog) the things- 
which-follow f these. I will praise 3 those-who-follow f the 
law. You did not follow the geometer's wise words. 
If he were {optat.) wise, he would follow the laws. 
Following- 1 the laws is (the part) of a good citizen. I 
have come the opposite way (ace.) I came to announce 3 - 
these things to the citizens. You will not find (aor.) 
more beautiful things than these. If you find (aor.) the 
silver, you will-give-a-share (of it) to the poor. I have 
found a certain treasure 4 of wisdom. You will not easily 
find a greater city than this. 5 If we find (aor.) the 
road, we will run away. The arithmetical art was not- 
yet (ovneo) discovered. These things have been found- 
out. The discovery is wise. Let him have this nature. 
If you have this (pi), you will have all (pi. oianag, p. 



1 egBlm to be used. 2 Use the article, omitting thing. 

ETT-aiviu. See App. § 6. 4 drjrravpo;. 

5 When man or thing is omitted, the article is not to be used with 
ovtos. 



IRREGULAR VERBS, t, O, I, X- 155 

54). A certain woman had (imperf.) a goose. He had 
(aor.) many names. It (is) hard to boil (aor.) a stone. 



Lesson 2 3. 

(Irregular Verbs. £ &, i. App. § 8.) 

Exercise 19. 

58. He is not-yet dead (per/.) It is better to die 1 
(per/.) than to live. Let the unjust man die (per/.) 
Let some-one bury the body of the dead man (per/. 
part.) Every thing that-lives is-born 2 from that-which- 
is-dead f (perf. part.) The souls of those who-have- 
died, f still live. O basest man, thou shalt die. 3 Even- 
though we die (aor.), we shall live. Dying is not for- 
midable 4 to the good. Let us sit down (pres. mid.) 
The king makes- the horsemen -sit-down. We will- 
make- the boys -sit-down. He arrived to teach a the citi- 
zens. You have arrived here (dtvgo). No-one has 
arrived thence. 5 Ye will arrive here. Philip drove- 
away the ambassadors. 6 The man was not deceived. 
The woman, having been deceived (aor.), deceived her 
husband also (xai before the article). This wise man 
has come to boil a a stone. 



Lesson 24. 
(Irregular Verbs, x. App. § 8.) 

(1) Use the Attic form, x«w. 

(2) I will not do it, nqiv av sldijg, before you come. 



1 Use the syncopated forms of Qvfaicw (note, App. § 8) as well as the 
regular ones. 

2 Pres. of yiyvopai. 3 Use fut. redvfi^ojmi. 4 Qofepos. 
e Meteev. 6 Trpscflvs, A. 15, b. 



156 first greek lessons. 

Vocabulary. 
To fear (qoftsopcu.) 

59. Word-building .] — Act of burning; burning (huv- 
oig). That which is burnt-up; heat (xavpa). Burnable 
(xavGinog, A. 17). To burn-down (xuzaxaco, burn = 
consume hy burning). Act of mixing, mixture, ming- 
ling (y.QU6ig). Choose (iOsXa). From oQ&og, right, 
form rightly (oQ&cog, A. 36). High (vxptjlog, A. 17). 

Exercise 20. 

60. He fears being-burnt. j Burn the letter. He fears 
the heats. The boy was fearing the burning of his body. 
I will not go away before the letter is burnt (aor. 1. pass.) 
The wood having been burnt-down (aor.) the slaves ran- 
away. Do you call any-thing right? When I call (say, 
I calling), lie does not choose to come-in. 1 I called the 
boy. The boy being called (aor.), does not choose to 
come. The judge has been invited (say, called) to din- 
ner. 2 He will have been rightly called (fut. 3). Virtue 
would be rightly called g (aor.) by-this name (ace. with- 
out prepos^) The mother was calling her daughter. 
His body suffered (y.n/nrco 3 ) from-disease. I shall never 4 
be-tired of praising him (say, praising him). The souls 
of those who-have-fmished-t heir-labours 5 still live. 1 
will not cease before I am tired (aor.) The cup has 
been mixed. I will not go-away before the cup is mixed. 6 
(aor.) I fear the mixture of opposite things. He hung 
from (ano, gen.) a high (place). The mountains hung 
over (vtzsq, gen.) the city itself. They hang timidly 
(say, fearing) on (hi, gen.) their horses. 



1 ela-ziyii, 2 eiri Senrvov. 

3 Kapvw, to labour : to suffer (from disease) ; to be tired. 

4 oijiroTc. 5 Ferf. part, of K&piiw. 6 cxpddijv and i<ipaaO^, Plat. 



IRREGULAR VERBS, X, fi. 157 

Lesson 2 5. 
(Irregular Verbs, X, p. A pp. § 8.) 

Xai'&ctvEtv tivu, to escape a mail's notice. 

61. (1) When the my, thy, his, their, &c are em- 
phatic, they are to be translated by possessive pronouns 

Your slave, 6 obg Sov'Xog. 

(A slave of yours, obg dovXog.) 

(2) The possessives of the third persons (og, Gcpezsoog 1 ) 
are hardly ever used; the gen. avvov, avtmv being used 
for ' his,' 'their ;' savrov, suvtojv (or avzov, avtwv), for 'his 
own,' l their own.' 

(3) (Eng.) My' friend and my father's. 
[Greek.) 6 ifibg qitXog y.al 6 rov narpog ['my friend 

and the of my father' [friend understood)]. 

Obs. When the possessive pron. is emphatic, it will 
have an accent over it (thus, my'). 

Exercise 21. 

62. You have received (as your lot) a wonderful na- 
ture. Ye have received (as your lot) this land. He re- 
ceived (as his lot) both your' city and this. Having 
received the island fas his lot, aor.), he went-down 
towards the sea. Having taken (perf) the silver, I will 
give-a-share (of it) to this lame man. The Greeks have 
borrowed (say, taken) many names from (naQa, gen.) 
the barbarians. 2 I will not go-away before 1 I have taken 
(aor.) the city. They will not go-away till the city is 
taken 3 (aor. 1). He entered 4 secretly (say, having-lain- 
hid, aor.) into the city. The road is very narrow. I will 
take (some) of the flesh. I have escaped-his-notice. 
You did not escape-the-notice-of the gods, when you 

1 aysTipos is found (at one age or another) for all the persons of both 
numbers. 

2 /jap/japoi. 3 Reg. from \ij/?/ 4 ela-tp^ofiai. 



158 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

wronged (say, wronging) the poor. You would not es- 
cape-the-notice-of g the gods, if you injured [say, injur- 
ing) the poor. I shall learn many things from (nagu, 
gen.) the very wise geometer. Ye had learnt many 
things from your fathers. You have either 1 learnt or 
invented many names. Water has been mixed with the 
fire. Iron being-mixed (aor. 2), what in-the-world will 
it become ? They say that you (ace. with infin.) do not 
remember. He is too-wise c to mix opposite things. He 
had (imperf.) both his own dog and his friend's. (See 
61, 2, 3.) I will give (some) of the bran to the hares. 



Lesson 26. 

(Irregular Verbs, o. App. § 8.) 

Vocabulary. 

63. Word-building.'] — Slippery, from dlio&e (olia- 
Gtieog, W. 19). A slip (oXia&rjixa, W. 11. A. 15, a). The 
power of smelling, from boyge (6oq,Qt]aig,'W. 13. A. 15, b). 
Home = to home (ot'xaSs). From borne (olxodtv, A. 39). 

(1) £■«'&> (live, am alive), nsivaa (am hungry), 8iipdco 
(am thirsty, thirst), iqaoyicu (use), contract as into q in- 
stead of a, and asi into y. 

(2) iQor.oy.ca governs the dative. 

(3) Use dnollvfxi, instead of the simple oiXyju. The 
perfi un-dXcoXa = I am undone. 

(4) Translate to-be-profitable-to, to benefit, by otivyfu; 
and to receive benefit-from, by the pass, of that verb. 

(5) iych oljiai occurs as iycpfxai: ag iytyftai, as I' think. 

Exercise 22. 

64. I have seen the city living and being-awake. I 
think that-you ( pi. ace.) think the truth (say, true things). 

1 Either — or, v — »}. 



IRREGULAR VERBS, 71. 159 

If we were-to-think this," we should be wrong. 1 I did 
not think (imperf.) that the city was takeable. The 
flatterer is gone. I shall be off home {fut. of oi^o^ai, 
with participle of an-eitu). You will slip. The old man 
slipt. I fear the great and slippery stones. I am un- 
done (3). Seditions destroy the city. Yice was destroy- 
ing the young-man. The sedition destroyed the city. 
Having ruined {unollvfn) the city, he is gone. We are 
undone, if we be-known {aor. 1 pass.) He has arrived 
here from-home. I think that-you [ace.) have heard. 2 
You will destroy 3 {Att. fut.) the whole p race. You 
sw«j-e false oaths. 4 My tongue 5 has sworn. My mind 
has sworn. If you' do not swear," T will not swear. 
Justice is-profltable-to states. Others, seeing these, re- 
ceive benefit. By doing this {say, doing this), you will 
benefit your friends. Looking towards these, you would 
receive-benefrt. s If you follow the laws {say, following 
the laws), ye will receive-benefit. The soul is not seen. 
I had not-even {ov8i) seen Thales. If you were-to-see u 
these things, you would laugh. You are leading him 
where 6 you will see him. No-one has seen him walk- 
ing (|3a5f;oo), nor will see (him). No-one, as I think (5), 
of those who-were present/ said 7 this. The gods gave 
us the power 8 both of seeing- 1 ' and smelling.-" What is 
owing {pass.) to you? 



Lesson 27. 

(Irregular Yerbs, n. App. § 8.) 

Vocabulary. 

65. Word-building.] — To fall-into {iu-mnteiv. i(i 
will again become iv before the augment). A fall, from 

1 hpapr&w, 2 App. § 6. 3 188, p. 84. See note 1. 

4 opKos. 5 y\Qaaa. 6 oirov. 

? Irreg. Verb, App. § 8. s S{ :vai n<;. 



160 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

nro (nrcoixa, W. 11. A. 15, a). To drink-down (xata- 
mvia = swallow). Drinking, from no (noaig, A. 15, b). 
That which is drunk, drink (napa, W. 11, A. 15, a). 
That which is eaten, meat, from @qo, simplest root of 
@i@Q0d<jy.(o (fiooofia). Often, from noil (nollaxig, A. 32). 
To Athens (Adtjvuts for "Adrivag-Sa). It seems (doxei. 
The third persons of the other tenses, except imperf, 
are to be formed from don. 86%ei, sdo%s : perf. Sedoxzat). 
Relating to art (rspmog, W. 20). In a scientific manner, 
scientifically (zsyvutwg, A. 36). 

Exercise 2 3. 

66. I do not know what in-the-world he has suffered 
(indie.) They will play with 1 each-other. I have not 
suffered greater things than -these. They often suffered 
what they thought that they should do (fut. i?ifin. with- 
out pronoun). If you suffer any thing, u I will stand-by 
(you). The Medes will suffer less (evils) than the Per- 
sians. What do you think that-you shall suffer (omit 
pronoun) ? The wild-beast has swallowed (aor.) a bone. 
I am come to fix ( partic.) the centre 2 of the earth. The 
water was congealed (aor.) All p the wine is congealed. 
We saw the slave both drinking and having drunk. 
You have fallen into (elg, ace.) a wonderful discourse. 3 
The old-man slipt and fell (say, having slipt, fell). He 
is going to receive-benefit from 4 the work. Being fright- 
ened, they are-off. Having run-away (aor.) to (im, ace.) 
the sea. Do not drink much wine. The horse having 
been sold (aor.), I shall be-off to Athens. Whoever is 
caught 5 shall be sold. 6 The city would not have fallen 11 
such 7 a fall. We' prevented them from falling (say, to 
fall ; aor. inf.) The boy fell from (ano, gen.) a certain 



irpds, towards, ace. 2 Ktvrpov. 3 \6yog. 

otto. 6 Scrns av with aor. Subj. of aXinKoi. ° TTSTTpdiTSTai. 

Use the art. before such. 



IRREGULAR VERBS, Q, 6, T. 161 

ass. The rhetorician, struck (aor. 2.) by what-had-been- 
saicl (aor.), f was-si!ent. The young-man having been 
struck (aor. 2) by the old man, was chastising him. It 
seemed to all that the man was struck: l and he (6 5') 
fell scientifically. I would inquire 6 (aor.) I will not go 
away before 1 I have inquired. He sends a man to in- 
quire (partic.) e I will inquire what I ought" to do. 
The letter, having fallen into the fire, was burnt. You 
have asked what you ought to do (omit you). Fly-from 
the desires about (nsgi, gen.) meats and drinks. 



Lesson 28. 
(Irregular Verbs, q, a, r. App. § 8.) 

Vocabulary. 

67. Word-building.} — That which flows, as thing 
(oevfia, stream). Fountain (nrjyi]). Pure (xa&aQog, A. 17). 
To make pure (xa&aiQa 2 or xa&aQitw). To be pure, to 
preserve one's purity (ya&aQsvm). Purity (xa&ayoTrjg, G. 
ijtog, A. 15, b). To break-down (y.aTUQt]yivija: use pass, 
for break-down intrans.) To drag down (y.aza-andco). 
Scimitar (ay.iva.nrjg, G.ov: a of penult short). Cutting, 
from %z\i (to\ir\, W. 15; or, from ifxn, rfiqaig, the word for 
laying-waste). 

(1) The aor. 2. ia$r\v (like satr^) is intrans. I am 
extinguished. 

(2) Aor. rnid. ondaaa&ai is to draw a sword, &c. 

Exercise 24. 

68. There is flowing a fountain of pure water. There 
are flowing fountains of pure waters. Their desires 
have flowed towards these things. It happened that a 



mrXtiyivai. 2 Use 



162 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

portion of land (say, something of land) was broke n-off. 
Labours extinguish insolence. The city was terrified 
at (ttqos, ace.) the tidings. 1 The wall broke-down (aor. 
2. pass.) They thought that-the place 2 was already 
taken. The couch was spread (perf.) We will lay- the 
country -waste. The country having been laid-waste, 
the Persians marched-into-the-interior (dva^alva). The 
physicians use both cutting and burning. Do not cut 
the tree. He fears cutting and burning. If you cut" the 
tree, you shall be punished. The gods gave us the 
power both of seeing* and of being seen. j The bridge 
broke-down (pass.) The mother has borne a son. 
Wealth begot insolence. He is lamenting the death of 
her-who-bore-him. f I will give-a-share of the silver to 
those who-have-been- wounded f (aor.) O woman, do 
not wound your husband. The laying-waste of the 
land injured Greece. He ordered the boy to run and 
announce this (say, having run 3 to announce). The 
others had run-down to (tig) the harbour. Do not 
pollute the purity of your soul. Cyrus was dragged- 
down from his horse. He drew his scimitar. I will be 
pure (from) base desires (gen.) 

Vocabulary. 

69. Word-building. .] — To cut-down (xaTa-rs/xKo). 
Harp (xi&aQa). To play-on-the-harp (m&aQiZco). 

Exercise 25. 

70. Having come thither, you must" die. The (crops) 
that-h ad-been cut-down, had-sprung-up. 4 He being- 
struck (aor.) by some man, went-away and died (say, 
having gone-away, died) immediately: and he who- 
struck f him escaped (diacpsvyco). The boy hit the mark. 



1 iiyye)Ja. 2 rd xupiov. 8 Aor. 4 P\a 



IRREGULAR VERBS, Cf), #. 163 

They happened to have drunk 1 the mess. boy, you 
will hit the mark. O boy, do not strike the slave with 
your whip. The whole race was extinct. 2 He rushed 3 
{say, sent-himself) against 4 him. The very faithful 
servant saw Cyrus fallen {perf. part.) The servant 
threw-himself-on 5 his master's body. The bridges broke- 
down. (Men) say that the harp was an invention of 
Minerva. He purified the temple of Minerva. Having- 
added this, he was-off. 



Lesson 29. 
(Irregular Verbs, <p, y. App. § 8.) 

Vocabulary. 

71. Word-building.']- — Possible-to-be-taught, from 
dida%- {didaarog, W. 24). To burst-asunder {dictQQijpvpi, 
pass, for intransitive ' burst'). 

qitge ( = the Latin age), come ; come now. 

Exercise 2 6. 

72. I am-seen 6 to know {say, knowing 7 ) nothing. 
They carried- him -out, as-if 8 dead {perf.) ; but he had 4 
suffered nothing. Virtue would appear 8 {aor. 2) to be 
possible-to-be-taught {neut. omit to be). The number 
was greater than that-which-no\v-appears f {aor. 2). 
I should bear {aor.) s old-age cheerfully {say, easily). 
Come now, let us see what follows {say, the things fol- 
lowing) these. 2 You will bear-off (fut. mid.) greater 

1 Say, having drank (aor.) 2 Use diroaPwi/vjii. 

3 MidofIi,«. 

4 £-i : cut off i before the vowel of avrov, and mark the apostrophe. 

5 Say, fell-around, from vepi-irnrra, with dat. 

6 Use faivo/jai. 7 mSa, 'iarOi, eidsiriv, tiSui, eiSivai, dSui;. 
8 a>f. ° » , from u)u, with part. perf. 



164 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

honours than the others. Wherefore, 1 think you (sing.), 
does he bear reproach? They arrived at (efe) the city 
before us (say, 'they anticipated us, having arrived at 
the city'). I will disembark before you (say, ' I will an- 
ticipate you, having gone out from the ship'). I shall 
rejoice to remember 7 this true pleasure. Philip was dri- 
ven-out from (4g) Euboea. 2 I am-seen to have received 
(say, having received 3 ) favour. Even-though some of 
these men should burst-asunder. Philip was driven-out 
by me. He swore that-he would go-away (inf. of an- 
eipt, without pron.) 



Lesson 3 0. 
Vocabulary. 



73. Word-building.] — Form thing with which one 
is bound, from 5e- (de-a-fxog, chain, bond: W. 10. A. 6). 
One who is bound ; prisoner (Szofxodrrjg*). Prison (dsofim- 
ti]oiov, W. 7. A. 10). Belonging to the people ; public, 
from drj/Aog, people (8r L uoatog, A. 17, iii.) Praiser, from 
incuvEGo, to praise (inaivhrio). 

Exercise 27. 

74. The prisoner has been bound with strong chains. 
Having bound the slave in the public prison, he went- 
away. Let the unjust judge be bound (perf. imperat.) 
The prisoner threatens 2 those/ who have bound him. 
The wild-beast having been bound (aor. 1), the stags 
rejoice. 5 He was praised 6 by the good. The praisers 
of the good are praised themselves. The boys will 
laugh. 7 Reverence 8 the god. If you reverence the 



1 (5(0 ti, out, &C. 2 Ei'/?oia- s Tvyx&va. 

4 From the verb, Sc^Sco. 5 X ai P w - 6 See 193 (2) p. 85. 

7 See App. § 6. 

" Aor. 1. pass, (in form) of nuViuai. .See p. 85 (1), e. 



165 



gods, you will be happy. The water is very hot. He 
will give (some) of the bran to the hare. I shall rever- 
ence the gods. You ought" not to bind (aor. 1) your 
(own) father. The Greeks took 1 the island, by a strata- 
gem ; 2 and sold 3 the islanders. O Apollo ! 



Lesson 31. 



75. (1) Necessity [must, should, ought) is expressed 
by the verbals in zs'og, which thus answer to the parti- 
ciple in dus. 

(2) If the verb governs the ace, this ace. may become 
the nom. to iazi, with the verbal in agreement: as daarj- 
zia iazi aoi ?} dgezrj {colenda est virtus), ' virtue should be 
cultivated,' or ' we should cultivate virtue.' 

(3) But even then we may say, damjztov iozi aoi zijv 
uqsti'jv : whereas i colendum est virtuteni' is not used by 
writers of the golden age, with the exception of Varro. 

(4) If the verb governs the gen. or dative, the verbal 
in zeos will be in the neut. gender, and govern the sub- 
stantive in the case of its verb. 

(5) [a] ini&v^rt'ov iazl z?jg doEzyg, we should desire 

virtue, 
(b) im^EiQtjrsov iazl zo) egyep, we should set-about 
the work. 

Vocabulary. 

76. Word-building .] — From y,o7.atcx>, chastise, form 
chastising, chastisement (xolaaig, A. 15, b). Verbal in 
zEog,from q>evy-co,fly-from (qevxzeog, A. 17)— from quleco, 
love (cpityzeog, A. 17)— -fromnlixw, weave (nXsmsos, A. 17). 



See Appendix, § 8 (3). 2 dirdrri, deceit. 3 Lesson 6, p. 137. 



166 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Exercise 28. 

(Several of the verbs used have fut. mid. See App. § 6). 

77. Let them be chastised with the same chastise- 
ments. They will all praise the same old man. We 
shall suffer from (dat.) the same disease. O Apollo, I 
am undone ! The boy will walk towards the city. The 
daughter will sing more-beautifully 1 than her mother. 
I will panegyrize the just judge. If" you bid 2 them, 
they will be silent. If you had bid 2 them, they would 
(now) be silent. We must weave the garland with the 
same flowers. We must not fly-from labours. 3 We 
should-love our father. Fathers should-love their daugh- 
ters. We should desire the pleasures of virtue. 



Lesson 3 2. 
(Correlative Pronouns.) 

Demonstrative. Relative, 

roaog, so (or as) great, 4 oaog, as (tantus, quantus). 
roTog, such, 5 olog, as (talis, quails). 

. , V so (or as) old, 6 rilUog, as. 
7 ^ og } so (or as) great, 
(1) The pronouns of the demonstrative series are 
strengthened to express just, exactly, as great, &c, by 
the addition of 8s or ovtog : those of the relative series by 
the prefix of on-. 

(rovog, zolog are seldom used in prose.) 



(2) zoaoads 
roaovzog 
roaavrrj 

T0G0V70(v) 



0710- 

aog 



TOioade 
roiovTog 

TOiaVTT] 

TOlOVto(v) 



zqXixoode 
onoT- i rijh-AOvzog 
og < TTjlixavrt] 
( zi]hxovzo(v) 



bni]li- 
y.og. 



1 KaWiov, neut. of compar. adj. 2 /fsXrfco: express the pronoun. 

3 7rdj/oj, ov, b. 4 Or, of-suck-a-size. 

5 Or, of -such-a-kind ; of-this-lnnd. R Or, of-such-an-age, &c. 



CORRELATIVE TRONOUNS. 1G7 

(3) But a strengthened demonstrative may be fol- 
lowed by a simple relative : and vice versa. 

(4) The — the, ogc? — togovzoj. 

(5) Utrum — an, noztoov — rj. The forms with on pre- 
fixed are also dependent interrogatives. 

Vocabulary. 

78. Word-building, .] — From rol^a, boldness, form 
to-be-bold (rolfxaa). Form verbal from zol^idco, to dare 
{roliitjTEog, A. 17). From xovQsvg, barber, form barber's 
shop (y.ovQtTor, W. 7). Bold (zolfiijQog, A. 17). Bold- 
deed; daring-action (to^p/,u«, A. 15). Daring, subst. 
(rolf/.rjGig, A. 15). To run-through (diargtym). To sail- 
round i (tteqi-tzXhco. Aor.mlsvGCi. See 193 (3), p. 85). To 
take-up (uva-!an§dvw). 



1 asked (^o'^j'). 

Exercise 29. 

[The strengthened forms are to be used when there is 
an accent (such').] 

p^ Remember that in dependent sentences the opta- 
tive follows the past tenses. 

79. The power of the gods is such' and so-great'. Say 
as-much (pi.) as' (is) agreeable 1 to you. Is he such' (a 
person) as the barber? Is the steward such' (a person) 
as the baker ? Is the baker as-old as the barber ? Such 2 
(men) dare all things. These men indeed 3 are such'. 
I should not dare to deceive my father. We must dare 
to speak the truth. 4 Let the boy, being of-such-an age, 
learn these things. O boy, being so-old, do not admire 
flatterers. The more pious (they are), the more happy. 
Is he pious, or not ? I asked how-old the boy was. He 



1 0(Xo ? . E Use the article before 

3 uev. 4 to aXrjQes-, neut. adj. 



168 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



asked ofwhat-kind the thing was. Honour is something 
of-this-kind. From (ano,gen.) this daring-action he was 
praised. Having lost some few' men (men), he con- 
quered the Persians. Brasidas ran-through the Athe- 
nians. The ships having sailed-round, took them up. 
The soldiers went-on-board the ships. The old- women," 2 
being of such-au-age, died. They will praise the daring 
of the boy. 



Lesson 33, 



(Correlative Pronouns continued.) 

80. (1) The interrogatives are of the same form as 
the relatives with n prefixed ; but for dependent inter- 
rogatives, the forms with on prefixed are also very com- 
monly used. 

(2) The indefinites (of any, or some, kind, size, age, 
&c.) are the same in form as the inlerrogatives: but the 
accent of two of them is moved to the final syllable (no- 
aog, noiog), but remains in nrjXixog. 

(3) Hence the whole series is 





Interrog. 


Tndef. 


Demonstrative. 


Relative. 


(size) 
(quantity) 


TZOOOg 


noaog 


roaog 

zoaoads 
ToaovTog 


oaog 
on oaog 


(quality) 


noiog 


noiog 


toiog 
70i6ads 
TOiovrog 


oiog 

bnoiog 


(age) 
(size) 


nqXixog 




Ttjh'xog 
TqXixocde 
rrjXtxovTog 


rjXiHOg 
brniXwog 




1 b\iy 0i . See A. 17, ii. 






s h ypav;, 
PI. ypaes, yp 


ypa-6 s , -i, 

avs '. ypativ 


ypavv, ypau 
ypavcrl, ypavg. 





CORRELATIVES. 



169 



(4) Obs. ttoToq is very often followed by rig : nolov ri 
iariv ; 

(5) nodanog is of-what-country? — which has 6no8a- 
nog for its compound form. 

Exercise 30. 

gjr' Remember that in dependent sentences the opta- 
tive follows the past tenses, 

81. Of-what-kind is the affair? He asked pf-what- 
kind the harbour was. How-old are the old-women? 
They asked how-old the old-women were. Of-what- 
size are the mountains? The geometer asked of-what- 
size the mountains were. What-kind-of produce do 
they reap? Of-what-kind is the life of bakers? He 
asked of-what-kind the -life of bakers was. Of what 
country is the geometer? 1 will ask of what country 
the geometer is. Of-what-size is the giant? I will ask 
of-what-size the giant is. 



Lesson 34. 
The adverbs have also a correlative series. 



Indef. 


Demonst. \ 


(Enclit.) 




7IOZS 


f 
TOTS 


710V 




7101 




Tza-d-ev 


(joOiv) 


7ic6g 


(*«k) 


7ir\ 


(*»)• 




tqvixa 



Relat. 
Simp. Camp. 

OTS 



01 

oOev 
ag 

r 

V 



07ZOTS 
07TOV 

onoi 

bnoOev 

ontag 

om\ 



Interrog. 

77076 when ? 

nov inhere ? 

not whither 7 

no&tv whence?, 

7i 03 g how ? 

7i ij in what direc- 
tion ? how ? 

nyvixaat what time 
of the day? 

Vocabulary. 

82. Word-building.] — From-heaven, from oiQcaog 
(nl-Qavo&tv), A. 39). Home (oi'y.ade), To-At hens, from 
8 



fivmcc ontjnxa 



170 FIKST GREEK LESSONS. 

*Ad-7]vai (A&tjva^s for 'A&i'jpao-de, A. 40). At Athens 
£ Ad-fa-qai, W. 28). Every where (navzaiov). At home 
(okoi). There (kei). Thither (eWije). Thence (iaeT- 
&sv). At-Olympia (Olvpmaoi, W. 28). At Megara 
(MeyaQOi, W. 28). 

za n olid, for the most part. 

Exercise 31. 

H3 13 Remember that in dependent sentences the opta- 
tive follows the past tenses. 

83. The messenger came from-heaven. When did 
the soul receive 1 this knowledge? 2 I asked when the 
soul received this knowledge. He went-away thither. 
He is come thence. He is setting-out 3 for- Athens. He 
lives 4 for the most part at-Athens. Does he live 4 at- 
Athens or Megara? I asked whether he was living 4 at- 
Olympia or at-Megara. Whither is the old-wornan, 
being of-such-an-age, setting ont? When will you do 
what you ought ? 5 Whence are you come ? Where is 
the wise geometer living ? I will set-out thither. 



Lesson 35. 



84. (1) Of two the interrogative is nozEoog ; the rela- 
tive and dependent interrogative, onokeQog. 

(2) One (or the-one) of two is 6 zzegog: neither of the 
two, ov8heoog or [M]8e'z£Qog. 

(a) [i)]dsT£Qog (like ^) with the imperative, and " if" 
" in order that," &c. 

(3) The forms of k'zeQog often coalesce by crasis with 
the article when it ends in a vowel : after crasis the 
vowel is always a. 

(4) Thus atEQOg for 6 ezeoog : tfartoov, fiazsow, for rov 

SZEQOV, zq> EZtQCp. 

1 \an@avb}. 2 iiriarripri. 3 Troptiojxai. 4 StaTptfJaj. 8 3 £sT. 



verb old a. 171 

Exercise 32. 

tCf 3 Remember that in dependent sentences the opta- 
tive follows the past tenses. 

85. Of- which -kind (of the two) does it happen 1 to be 
{say, being)? The messengers happened' to be present 
{say, being-present). Which of the (two) boys happened 
to be present {say, being-present) ? Neither. Let nei- 
ther of the boys go-away. We must fly-frorn one of 
these (two) things. Of two beautiful (things), one is the 
more beautiful. Of-what-country are the boys ? Which 
of these things is the more true? 



Lesson 31 



86. (1) ol8a, properly a perf. from st'Sco, see. I have 
perceived = Iknoiv. 

Moods. — ol8a, ia&i, siSstyv, eidco, elSsvai, sidcog. 
Plup. ydsiv. Fut. Eiaofiai {eldjoco). 

Perf. ol8a, ola&a, olds \ i'azov, i'azov | la/xEv, i'azs, 'ladai 

{from ta-rifu). 
Plup. S. 7j8eiv, Ait. '%8q (from ij8sa). 

%8eig, commonly rjSsia&a, Ait. fiSijo&a. 
ySsi, Att. ydew, and y8rj. 

P. %dii(isv, and yapsv. 

%8eIZ£, 1]<7ZS. 

ffiEoav, yaav. 

(2) tt^T Obs. xMtztw, 7ze'[a.7zg), and some others, change 
s into o in perf. act. 

Exercise 33. 

^C^ Remember that in dependent sentences the opta- 
tive follows the past tenses. 



172 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

87. I do not know whither he is setting-off. Do you 
know what I am-going to do? I know what («) I learnt. 
I will soon know where he lives (p. 170, n. 4). I will soon 
know whether he is living at-Athens or at-Megara. We 
ought" not to know base 1 (things). Do you know, or 
not? Know that (on, with indie.) he brought-up two 
sons. We know these things. I am-come, that I may 
know the truth. Who in-the- world has stolen the axe ? 



Lesson 37. 



(Fut. 3. pass.) 

88. (1) The fut. 3. generally expresses a future ac- 
tion completed and continuing in its effects. 

(2) It is obviously the natural fut. of those verbs 
which from marking a continued state, are equivalent 
to a present with new meaning: as, yJxiqficu, IjJossess ; 
fit'ixvrjfxai, I remember. 

Exercise 34. 

Use fut. 3. in the following Examples, 

89. The prisoner shall be bound. 2 The thing shall 
be done. The Scythians shall be bound in the public 
prison. I shall remember this injustice. I will not re- 
member the insolence of the very base Ethiopian. I 
shall possess those most beautiful things. How-many 
and what-kind-of things will be left behind? These 
things shall be wept for. 

1 Use the article. 2 Slw keeps the long vowel in fut. 3. 



APPEEDI X. 



§ 1. Jldject 


ives o/ tfAree 


terminations. 


m. 


/-, 


n. 


, 1. N. aorpog, 


(Togr^, 


aoqiov, wise. 


G. aoqtov, 


<TOg%, 


ffoqpow. 


N. alu^Qog, 1 


aiaxQci, 


aiGVQov, base. 


G. ala^gov, 


alaiqag, 


aidxQov. 


2. N. p'Aa^ a 


fieXaiva, 


fxtXav, black. 


G. iDilavog, 


[xeXairrjg, 


[it'luvog. 


3. N. %ccQieig, 3 


Xaoieooa, 


Xagisv, graceful. 


G. %aQi'evTog, 


ftUQiioarig, 


%aQiEvrog. 


4. N. t«'io^, 


rtQUva, 


ts'qev, tender. 


G. rt'QSvog, 


reQeipTjg, 


TEQEVOg. 


5. N. ytei;?, 4 


yXvy.ua, 


yXvxv, sweet. 


G. ytawe'o?, 


yXvxei'ag, 


yXvxsog. 


6. N. fixco^, 


sxovaa, 


sxov, willing. 


G. sxovtog, 


ixovGTjg, 


EXOVTOg. 


§ 2. Adjectives of two terminations. 


[Compound adjectives in o? (except nog), and the ter- 


minations 1/j.og, tog, eiog, aiog, are mostly of two termin.] 


m. f. 

7. N. '/.oGfiiog, 


n. 


orderly. 


G. XOOftlOV. 






8. N. Ev8ut[A03V, 


evSaipov 


, happy. 


G. evdaiftovog. 






9. N. alijdi'jg, 


aXq&t'g, 


true. 


G. aXrj&Eog (ovc 


) 




10. N. aoaqv, 


aQoev, male. 


G. aposvog. 






ii. n. ;<v*-> 


<"5(H, knowing. 


G. i'dQiog. 






12. N. &£(»>?, 


lie 03v, g 


'acious. 



G. Uem (after Attic decl. See p. 25). 

13. N. (tsyakrjta3Q, psyaXqtoQ, magnanimous. 
G. [ibytiXijZOfJog. 

14. N. di'jzovg, diaovv, two-footed. 
G. dinodog. 

1 os pure and pos make fem. a ; but oos (when not poos) makes fem. ij. 
s V. m. p£\av. 3 V. m. X a 9 ltv - ®. pi. ^apiso-i. 

4 Neut. pi. yXvKia, not yXvxfj. 



174 § 3. Cardinals and Ordinals. 



1 

2, 

3, 

4, 

5 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 

11. 

12. 

13. 

14. 

15. 

16. 

17. 

18. 

19. 

20. 

21. 

22. 

30. 

31. 

40. 

50. 

60. 

70. 

80. 

90. 

100. 

200. 

300 

400 

500, 

600 

700 

800 

900. 

1,000 

2,000. 

10,000. 



i'8exa, 



els, 
8vo, 

. TQstg, 
. zt'aaaQEg, 

. 7TEVZE, 

. inzd, 
. oxzco, 

Ivvia, 

dt'xu, 

erdsxa, 

dcoSsxa, 

TQiGxaidsxct, 

ZSGGCiQEGXCilfi 

TTEvzexaidexct, 

ixxaidsxa, 

enzaxaidsxa, 

oxzcoxaidExa, 

irvEuxaidsxa, 

E'lXQGl, 

e'ixochv sig, 
e'i'xogi 8vo, &C. 
zQidxovza, 
zgidxovza slg, 

TEGGaQUXOVTCC, 

nEvrrixovza, 

ihjy.ovTU, 

E^dofit'jxovta, 

oydoijxovza, 

EVEVTqxovra, 

ixazov, 

diaxoGioi, ai, a, &C. 

TQICIXOGIOI, 
ZEGGaQttXOGlQI, 
TTEVraxOGlQl, 
E^UXOGlOt, 

S7izaxoGioi, 
oxzaxocioi, 

EVVV.XOGIOI, 

%ihoi, 
8«j%i'hoi, &c. 

[tVQIOl. 



1st. TTQCOTOg, 

2d. 8Evz£Qog, 

3d. TQiTog, 

4th. zizaqzog, 

5th. 7iE\inzog, 

6th. exzog, 

7th. epdopog, 

8th. oydoog, 

9th. hvazog, 
10th. dsxazog, 
11th. Ivdixazog, 
12th. doidsxazog, 
13th. zQiGxaids'xazog, 
14th. zEGGagaxatdzxazog, 
15th. TzsvzsxaidE'xazog, 
16th. exxaidt'xazog, 
17th. mzaxaidt'xazog, 
18th. bxzojxatde'xazog, 
19th. EvvsaxaidExarog, 
20th. sixoGzog, 

21st. ElXOGZog TTQWZOg, 

22d. sixoGzog dsvzEQog, 

30th. 7£«a>coff?o£, 

31st. TQiaxoGzbg nQtozog, 

40th. ZEGGUQGCXOGZOS, 
50th. TTEVZTJXOGZOg, 

60th. E^ijxoGzog, 

70th. sfidopyxoGzog, 

80th. o/So^xooto'c, 

90th. IvEviqxoGzog, 

100th. sxoczocttoV, 

200th. diaxoGioGzog, 

300th. rQiaxoGioozog, 

400th. ZEGGUQCXOGlOGZOg, 

500th. TZEvzaxoGioGzog, 

600th. g|«KO(7tOCfTO?, 

700th. inzaxoGioGzog, 
800th. oxzaxoGioGzog, 
900th. it'vaxoGioazog, 
1,000th. yikioGzog, 
2,000th. S((Tx<^o<7ro£, 
10,000th. [xvoioGTog. 



APPENDIX.— PRONOUNS. 



175 



N. 



<7< 



G. fftov, or [xov 
D. ifxoi, or fiot 
A. ifis, or fii 





§ 4. Pi 


•onouns. 








1. Personal. 








'Eyco, I. 






ng. 

[tOl 


I 

of me 


Dual. 

N. vmi, contr. va we two 
G. vmi'v, " yep?' of us two 


tot 


to me 


D. »'co?V, 


" 


i>qrv to us two 




me. 


A. *coi", 


" 


V03 us two. 


N. 
G. 

I). 


Plural 
fang 

riulv 


we 
of us 
to us 







A. 



rjliag 



us. 



Sing. 
N. at; 
G. GOV 

D. (jo/ 
A. as 



2v, thou. 



thou 
ofthee 
to thee 
thee 



Dual. 

N. acpon, contr. ocp<6 you tw 
G. cepcoi'v, " oyqw of you 
D. Gcnaiv. " acc&p to vou 



N. vfisig 

G. V/A.Q3V 

D. ^wr? 

A. ^ac, 1 



G. acpmv 
D. crqpcoiV, 

A. Gcpw'i 

Plural. 



you two 
of you two 
cqscpv to you two 
agjoo you two. 



you 
of you 
to you 
you. 



Note 1. — Dative plural of the third person is some- 
times ocpiv, acpt; and accusative <rgie [used by the Attic 
poets as accusative singular also]. \iiv Ionic, vlv Doric 
and Attic [both enclitics], are both singular and plural, 
Mm, her, it, and them. 

Note 2. — In the sing, of third person, hardly any 
form is used in Jlttic prose but ol. In phir. erg mv, acpag, 
are used in the reflexive meaning; GcpiGi (v) in both the 
reflexive and the simple personal meaning. 



176 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Sing 
N. wanting 
G. OV 



D. <H 

A. S 



of him 
to him 

him. 



ov, of him. 

Dual. 
N. aym, they two 
G. oqmv, of them two. 
D. Gqcaiv, to them two 
A. oqoos, them two. 



Plural. 

N. aqieTg, neut. ayt'cc, 

G. ffopwr, 

D. acfiGi, 

A. ag/as:, neut. cgota, 



nog 

og or s-6g 

yf&STSQOg 

vptTXQog 

cyiztQog 
vmusQog 
aqmittQog 



2. P 

n 



\ :■ 



-OV 

aov 
ov 
-ov 
-ov 
-ov 
•ov 
-ov 



they 
of them 
to them 
them. 



mine 

thine 

his 1 

onr 

your 

their 1 

of us both 

of you both. 



3. Reflexive. 
ijiavTov, of myself. 

Sing. Plural. 

N. (fj'fc> avzog) (f'j'co ctbriq) N. rjfisTg avzoi 

G. Fuavrov ffiavT^g G. ijiiav avrav 

D. ((AUVTtij ffiavzri D. rjpTv avroTg 

A. i[4UVT0v SfiaviijV A. ijfiug avrovg 



ijfAFig avrai 
ijljimv (ivzoov 
Tjfuv avrmg 

■tj/xag avTug 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



asavzov, of thyself. 

Sing. 



(o~h avtog) 
aeavtnv, or gkvtov, 
asavrw, or GJxvtm, 
aeavrov, or oavzov, 



(ah avrij) 

Geavztjc, or aavzrfi 
csuvtT], or aavrrj 
aeavr/jv, or aavT/jv. 



1 Not much used. 



APPENDIX. PRONOUNS. 



177 



Plural. 

N. vfisTg avtoi i'fisig avtai 

G. ifiojv avtmv vf^av avtav 

D. vfiiv avzotg vfiiv avzaig 

A. vfiag avzovg vpdg avzdg 



N. (avzog) 
G. savzov or avzov 
D. savzm or avzm 
A. savtov or avzov 

N. (acpsTg avzol) 
G. savtav or avtmv 
D. savtolg or avtoig 
A. savtovg or avrovg 



savtov, of himself . 
Singular, 
(aitij) 

savtrjg or avttjg 
savty or avry 
savtov or avtijv 

Plural, 
(ocpsig avtai) 
savzwv or avtav 
savtalg or avtaig 
savtdg or avtdg 



(avto) 

savtov or avtov 
savtco or avtq} 
savto or avto 

(cqisa avta) 
savzwv or avtmv 
savtoig or avtoig 
savtd or avzd 



avtog 
avzov 



avtr\ avto, 

avzjjg, <fcc 



4. Definite. 

he himself, she herself, itself. 



5. Demonstrative. 
ovtog, this. (See p. 74.) 

6. Relative. 

og, who, which, what. 



Sing. 


Dual. 


Plur. 


N. og rj o 


N. ol 


a'l d 


r-^ ? t * 

\j. ov rjg ov 


N. A. co a co 


G. eov 


COV Wf 


D. m % o) 


G. D. o'tv aiv olv 


D. oig 


aig oig 


A. ov ijv o 




A. ovg 


ag a 




oazig, whoever. 




Sing. 


Dual. 




N. oazig tjtig 


on 


N. A. mzivs drive 


corn's 


G. ovitrog ijozivog 


ovtivog 


G. D. o'irzi- aivzi- 


oiizi- 


D. OJTtVl ftTlt'l 


(pun 


VOIV VOiV voiv 


A. ovtiva iqvtiva 


OZl 









s* 



178 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



N. oiT (v eg 
G. ojvnixav 
D. oi(j7i(n 
A. ovozivag 



N. «ff 

G. ztroV 

D. T(W 
A. 7WCC 



Sing. 
r}g 
rivog 

till 

nvd 

N. rivsg 
G. yn'coy 
D. tiai 
A. zwaV 



Plural. 
airivsg 
avriveov 
alanoi 
aarivag 

7. Indefinite. 

rig, any. 



arivcc 

WVTIVCOV 

oiariGi 
uriva 



Dual. 



ri 
rivog 

TlVl 

ri 



N.A. 
G.D. 



Plur. 

rive'g 

nvav 

rial 

nvdg 



TIPS riVS 

rivolv riVOlV 



riva 

riVWV 
7161 

nvd 



11VS. 

rivoiv 



dsiva, a certain one. (See p. 109.) 

8. Interrogative. 

rig, who ? 

(Declined like r)g indef., the accent merely being 
changed.) 



dXXrjXoiv 
dXXrjXoiv 
dXXtfXm 





9. Reciprocal. 




Dual. 


N. (wanting) 




G. dXXiqXoiv 


aXXr\Xaiv 


D. aXXrjXoiv 


aXXi]Xaiv 


A. dXXJjXat 


aXXrjXa 




Plur. 


N. 




G. aXXrjXcov 


dXXrjXoav 


D. dXXqXotg 


aXXtjXcug 


A. aXXtp.ovg 


dXXtjXag 



aXXqXoov 
dXXrjXoig 
dXXtjXct 



APPENDIX. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 179 

§ 5. Irregular Nouns. 
Rjt K. means Root. 

utjdcov (i)), nightingale. G. uijdovg (for dijdovog). V. uqdot- 

aval;, livaKz-og, king. V. ava (but only when a god is in- 
voked). 

'AfioXXwv, covog, Apollo. Ace. ''AnoXXca. Y/AnoXXov. 

Agijg (Mars). G. Agsog (uncontr acted) and sometimes 
Agsag. D.'Agei. Acc. Agtj and "Agr\v. Y.Ageg. 

ydXa (to), milk. R. ydXanr. 

yt'X-ag, ojzog, &c. (6) laughter. Acc. ysXoora and yeXwv. 

yovv (to), knee. R. yovar. 

yvvr\, woman, wife. R. yvvaix. Y. yvvai. 1 

dsvdgov, tree. D. pi. devdgsai. Also pi. 8sv8gscc. D. dev- 
dgeoig. 

dogv (to), spear. R. dogar. 

sin-cov, ovog (tj), image. G. dxovg. Acc. axoo. Acc. pi. 
eixovg. 

Zevg, Jupiter. Ai-6g, Ad, Ala. Y . Zsv. 

ijg-wg, coog, hero. Acc. j/ow. Acc. pi. ijgcog (forijgma, "jgrnag). 

Ou/Jjg, Thales. G. QdXsu. D. QaXy. Acc. QaX^v. 

•&gi'$ (>)), hair. G. rgij-og, &c. D. pi. &gi%t. [R. #£>«£•] 

ndgu (to), head. G. xgmog. D. xquti and xdga. 

xXsi'g (fj), key. xXaidog, xleidi, xXeida and more commonly 
xluv. Plur. Nom. and Acc. (Att.) xXetg. 

kv'aecov (6), mess ; porridge. Acc. xvx£a>,for xvxeava. 

y.vo3v, dog. R. Y.VV. Y. xvov. 

Xdag, Xdg (o), stone. Xdog, Xd'i, Xdav and Xdv. PL Xdsg, 
Xdcov, XdecKJi. 

[idgTvg, witness. (xdgTvg-og, i. Acc. a and (less com- 
monly) (A.dgTW. D. pi. (.tdgTVGi. 

Oldlnovg, (Edipus. Oldinodog and Oldinov. D. OlSlaodi. 
Acc. Oldmoda and Oldinovv. Y. OiSlnov. 



1 With accent on the ult. of G. and D. ywaiKos, &c, but ywai«a 
ywaua-?, yvfaiKUf. 



180 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

OQi-ig (o, //), bird; fowl; oort&og-, &c. Aec. oQnOa and 

o(jnv. Pi. regular, and also oortig, oQvtmv. I). o(jnai(v) 

only. 
ovg (70), ear. R. car. 
Tlvi^ (>}), the Pnyx. G. Ilvxvog, &c, m7A transposition 

of the consonants. 
UogsiScov, Neptune. Ace. IIoceidcQ. V. Iloaeidov. 
vSmq (to), water. R. i>5ar. 
X&Q (;%)> hand ; jpe/^o?, &c, fo^ x E Qf or root °f (*< an d &• 

Dual, and D. pi. 
%£h8c6v (!]), swallow. inhSotog, but V. %£h8oI. 
vlog, son. G. vlov, reg., 6?<£ also the following cases 
from vkvg. G. vUog. D. wet (Ace. visa). Du. viae, 

vltoiv. PI. I'tefi,', vitcor, vUaiv, vliag {yltlg). 



§ 6. Fer&s wu^A Future Middle in Active Signification. 
(Those with asterisk have also ftit. act.) 

*dyvoica, dyvoijoo/xat, do not know ; am ignorant of. 

aSa>, uoayau, sing. 

ay.ova>, axovadfiai, [perf. «xc/xo«,'J hear. 

anolaim, anolavaofiai, receive from ; reap (good or evil) 

from. 
anavtdco, anavrqeofuu, meet. 
ciQnd^co, aQTidaoficu, snatch, seize. 
(tuSiXm, (iudiovpai, go ; walk. 
fii6a), ^loiaofiai, live. 
*p)Jnco, pJxpOfxm, look. 
finda), poi'iaofica, cry out ; shout,, 
*8ioy/.co, Stoi^o/tut, pursue. 
yeXdca, ysXdqofiai, laugh. 
yr^daya, yrjodoofiai, grow old. 
*eyy.03[iid£co, eyy.ofAidoo.uai, panegyrize. 
*iireupttoj inaipsaoftai, praise. 



Perf. pass, with a, r .id without redupl. 



APPENDIX. VERBS WITH FUT. MID. IN PASS. SENSE. 181 

imonxem, imoQktjGOfiKt, forswear myself. 
*duv t ut<.£«), Oav/idaofjiai, wonder at ; admire. 
ly^, Qr iQ aao^a,, hunt chase# 

xufAvco, xafiovficu, labour ; suffer from (disease, &c.) 

y.}Jnrco, xlJipOficu, Steal. 

*aoXdCo3, xoldnofiai, chastise. 

*%co l ud£o3, go iii festive procession ; revel. 

*of//Go£oo, otuw^onat, bewail. 

nijSuco. nrfiqaopKu, leap. 

nvi'yco, 7Tii'£ofi<u, choke ; strangle. 

*noflf(B, 7zods&o[iai and nodtjooficu (.fee p. 80), desire. 

*7TQO(TAVli:(X), 7TQ0GXVVI]60fl(U. 

otydco, viyijcoficu (tacere), to utter no word; hold my 

tongue. 
aimnda, GiaTzijooftai (silere), to make no noise : be silent. 
oxco?7T(o, Gxwipofuu, mock, scoff. 
Gnov8uL03, c>7iov8ci(7f>ixai, hasten ; am in haste. 
ov(>i'Lw, avof^o/ua, whistle ; pipe. 
T(o0<i£(o, 7 co da o fiat, jeer. 
q>i-vy(x), cf£i>So/.un, fly. 
*%caQm, %K>Qii<joixat,, have room ; contain ; go, &c. 



§ 7. Verbs with Fat. Mid. in Passive Sense. 

a6r/Ja, injure : ddixf { <so(icu, shall be injured. 
dnalldrtto, free from : dnalld^Qfiat, shall be freed from. 
dliaxa), take: dlwao/Aat, shall be taken. 
d^qiin^>]it'o3, dispute; contest: uixcptofiqTrjaeTai, will be 

contested. 
pidnzoo, hurt: p.d\po;mi, shall be hurt. 
Q]Hir><», punish : t/^rcofro^af, will be punished. 
ofinlnytcx), confess: ofioloyijcJEzai, will be confessed. 
7ifidco y honour: ripijaofmi, will be honoured. 
cfvXdiTco, guard: yvld^ojxai, shall be guarded. 



182 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



§ S. Catalogue of Anomalous and Defective Verbs. 1 

1. ayvvpi, break. — ay, dyvv. 

ayvvfii, «§oo, eaya (am broken) : sa'^a, iayrjv. Horn. ?j<~a. 

2. ayco; lead. — ay, ays '. ay ay. 

ayco, a^o), fya, i'jysy.a, aytjyexa ; Dor. aytjo%a : rflayov, 
T}yay6p\v. 

3. aiQtw, take. — uiqe — eh 

aigsco (t]ao3, ijxa) ; rjQedrjv. — eiXov, EiX6fii]v. 

4. ald&avofiai, perceive. — ala&, ala&e : ala&av. 
aio&dvopai-, ala&ijoofiai, ycrffifttai, rja&opqv. 

5. alfta), ward off. — alsx, aXst, aXe£e. 
aXt%od, dXt^oco. Aor. infin. dXi^aa&ai. 

6. aXiay.ofiai, am taken. — aX, als, dXioy. — aXo. 
aXioy.of.iai, alcoGOfiui, sdXcoxa. Aor. edXav or qXcov. 

Moods. — dim, uXoiijv, dXoovai, dXovg. 

7. afxaQtavco, err ; sin. — dfiaqz, af.iaoTe, dfiaQrav. 
a/xaQTavco, apaQTtjGopui.. rmuQTijy.a : rjfiaQZOV. 

a > s- ' S day, ay, as£ 

8. avlavoi, increase. — I , " /' ,% , t , t 

I ay, avy, avS,, avts, avt,av. 

A ' r av^aco, -oopai, rjv&jfiai, i]v<z>i&i]v. (Aor. aE<-E, 

a >™' ( kilaxo, Horn.) 
av^avco, ) J 

9. fittivco, go. — /?£. /3a, /3aw, £//3a. 

§aiva, fi/jcofiat, fiefitjxa, eftyv; — ^Vco (will cause to go), 

10. /3«a;.w, throw.— pel, fioXe :—paX, $Xa, fiaXX, §a\le (pXe). 
@dXXa>, §aXm and fiaXXtjaco, fitfXrjxa, efiaXov, i@Xi]&r]v, §s- 

fioXrjpai, Horn. 

11. @i(jQm<jxa), eat.— @qo, Prfigo, §i$qcogx. 
fitpQcoGxa, @Qc6ao3 : sftooav. 

12. pXaozdva, sprout. — fiXaar, fiXaozs, fiXactav. 
fiXaazdvw, fiXaGzyoco : tfiXaoTor. 

13. ylyvofiai, become. — ye, yer, yevs '. ysysv, ysyv, yiyv '. yeiv. 
yiyvofiai, yevijooftai, ysyivquai and yiyova : iyero/tyr, iys- 

1 From Thiersch, 



APPENDIX. ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 183 

j'fr;o^af,ambori] (poet.): aor. iyeivdpqv, begot, bore. 

14. yiyvmaxco, know. — yvo, yiyvo, ytyvcoax. 

yiyvcoaxco, yrcoaofiai, 'iyvcoxa, eyvcoufiai, tyvcov ('iyvcov, 
yvcoOi,, yvoirjv, yvco, yvcovai, yvovg). 

15. 8 u-av co, bite. — Sax, St]x: Saxv. 
Sdxrco, 8/jl-ofiai., 8t'8i]][a : iSaxov. 

16. da/mco, subdue. — S« ( u, Spa : Sapv, Saj/va : Safia. 
da/Aua, Safxaaa, St'Sfitjxa, St'Sftrjpai. zSfAij&qv, idufzqv. 

17. SagOdvco, sleep. — 8ag&, 8ga&: 8ag&s: Sag&av (12). 
8ag0drco, Sagdrjoofxai, SsSdgdqxa. eSagOov (eSga&ov 

poet.), iSdg&qv. 

18. St'fxco, build. — 8ep, Sps. 

8t\uco, 8t8[Aijxa, 8t'8/^7]fica, s8/iy&r j v. 

19. StSdaxeo, teach. — 8a%, 8i8a%, 8iSa%ox, SiSaox, Sidaoxe. 
SiSdaxco, SiSd^co. — opai, SsSiSaxa. i8i8a!~a (Hesiod, 8i- 

8d(JX>]-(JEp). 

20. SiSgdaxco, run away. — 8qci, 8i8ga, SiSgaax. 
8idQa<JXG), Sgdoopiai, SiSgaxa. eSgav. 

(eSgav, 8gd&i Sguvai, Sgdg.) 

21. iysigco, wake. — sysg, sysig: iyg, iygs. 

iysigco, iy/jyegxa (trans.), iygrfloga (illtrans). rjygof^Tjv. 

22. t8a>, eat— i8, i8s : io&i. 

s8oj and ia&lco, (iSffiexa) i8y8oxa, l8^8eafiai. tjSiad-^v. 
A very anomalous future, iSo/xai. 

23. slnov, I said. 

utiov (sine, &c.) Less commonly ; Una, slnov (not 
sinov, B.), eindrco, &.C. 

24. mm, am busied with. — m, ean, 

t'nco, aor. fanov (anelv, cncov poet.); in compounds 

stnov (Steinov). 
tno/xai (follow), Expo/xat, unopriv (imperf.), iano^v 

(aor.), GTiov, ansa&ai, onopsvog. 

25. ?gxo[A,cu, come. — ig%. iXevd; iXv&, iX& : iXv&, iXovft. 
zgyoixai, iXsvoopai, iXrjXv&a (eiXijXov&a Horn.) %Xv&ov, 

rjX&ov. 

26. evgt'axco, find, evg, svge, evgiax. 

evgi'oxco, evg^oco, evgi]xa, svgrjfiai. evgov — ofxrjv, 
Verb adj. svgszog. 



184 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

27. I^co, have, hold. — ?y, ia%, and lax, * a X E > a l s i a X s & 

s%g>, e<;<x> and gx>']go3, 'iayjixa. Imp. dypv : aor. sayov, 
iayj&riv. [foftov, ?/4' ( a X e m compounds), g%oitjv, a^ca 
{affitj, &c.), o-^tV, cr/coV.] Also, infin. and part. 
oxn-Q-eiv, o%e&03v. Verb. adv. ixzog, o%ez6g. 

28. Expoo, boil, in, ixp, sips. 

ixpoi, sxpfiooi. Verb adj. iy&og, ixpTjzog, iipijziog. 

29. &ptjGxco, die. — -&ar, &va, fivijox. 

■&rr\axo3, ■Qavovfiai, vi&vijxa. 1 s&avor. Verbal adj. 
■&v7]Tog (mortal). 

30. (too, sit.— id, a£: & »&, &** 

£^co, seat ; f£ca; sit ; t£ayeo, seat awe? sit ; t^<rw. 
xadi^oj, xa&Mti, exd&iaa, ixa&iGd(H]V. xa&it,o(xai, xa&- 
edovfiai. 

31. lx civ 03, come. — w, tx«y : ixvs. 

ixdtco and Ixrt'ofiat, i^o^ai, iyfiai. i%a, ixofiqv. 

32. xat'oo, burn. — xa, xai, xav. 

xaio3 (xdo3 Att. uncontr.), xavaco, aor. sxija. Pass. 
xt'xavf/cu, ixav&rjv, ixaijv. (non-Attic.) Verbal adj. 
xavaiiog, xavatog, xavrog. 

33. xa)Jo3, call. — xal, xals : x?.«. 

y.alto3, xaliao3 (Att. xcdra, xalovficu), xexlqxa. ixdXeaa, 
ixXq &7]v. 

34. xa\xvm, labour. — xa/i, xfia: xafiv. 
Kafir a, xafiovfiai, xixfiijxa. exa/ior. 

35. x8(>do3, mix. — x?q, xeqa, xqa. xsgva, xigva. xsga, xeoarrv. 
xgdaj, xtgdrrvfit and xigvdo3, xeguGoa, yJxguxa, xs'xQUfitti, 

ixoddyr. Also xextgaafiat, ixsgdaxtrjv (ixeg6{ii]r, Horn.) 

36. XQifidirvfii, hang. — xgc/i, y.geua, xgafiawv. 
y.Q£[idvrvfii, hang (trans.) xg?ixaoo3 (xgtfia, Att.) 
xQtfidi'Wfiai, am hanged. Mid. hang myself ; xgefiao- 

■OijGOftai, ixQefiaG&)]r. 



1 In perfect, the following abbreviated forms (from Ova) are very 
common : 

TiQvajicv, are, dm. ridvadi, teOi/cl'div, TtQvavai, redvecos. Plup. iredvairav. 

From riOvma arose in Attic fut. re0v>j|a> or TtBv^ofiai. 



APPENDIX. ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 185 

HQtfiauat, hang (intrans.), XQSfiijaoiActt, exQe[A.da&t]v. 
(xQf/i&paij y.Q?/.iG3[.iat, xQtfxutfx/jv and oi'/.it]v.) 

37. xvrtm, kiss. — xv, xvv, xvvs. 
xvvt-co, y.iJaco, xvvt'jao/xai : txvoa. 

38. Xuyyuroj, get by lot. — Xty, Xay, hjx : 7.£v%, Xey% : Xu%, 

Xayy^av. 
7.ayyi/.vo3, h'l'S.onca, siX^a and Xt'7.oy%a. t'Xayov, siXrijfxai. 

39. Xa/^dvco, receive.— Xaft, Xrfi: Xap§, Xappuv. 
la[*fidvG), Xi'jipofxai, ci'Xijqia, sXafiov. 

(Ion. Xu/Aipofiai, XtXa/x/xcu, iXdfxqiOijv, and XsXd^tjaa.) 

40. Xav&dvoj, am hid. — Xa&, Xt]&: Xav&av. 
Xavddroa (Xt'jOco), Xr/oca, XtX)]&a. tXadov. 
XavOdvo(iai (mid.), XrjvofAai, XtX?j<j[Aai. iXa&6fi7]v. 

41. 7-oiG), wash. — Xo, Xoe, Xnv. 

Xova. Ftfom this verb the Attics use contracted forms 
from Xooj. Imperf. 3 sing. tXov : so Xowftat, Xovfxevog. 

42. fiurddvoj, learn, [au$, fit]{i : (ia&e: fiav&av: 
fCavdaixo, yiad'rj'ffbfiai^ //nfidOijxcc. tjAadov. 

43. {4t{{>nuai, receive as one"s share, fxsg, (tag: /j.oq: [*eiq. 
fieiQOfiai, peif. tfj[woa. HfiaQtm, it is determined by 

fate (sfifioQov, Horn.) 

44. fji'pv;n, mix. — f,ay, (j.cyvv: (.nay. 

[ih'vvfit ((Ai'oyco), fji'^oi. Pass. fA^nyuai, t[ti'%&i]i>, ^n'ytjv. 

45. (Ufirrjay.03, remind. — pra, fAvt]<7x, /Jifii'Tjax. 
fHftrtj(TX(o, [trf/fico — 

fUfxirjdxn/Aat, I bring to mind ; mention ; firrjaOrjanfiai, 
FfArijaOijr; and perf. [ityvrifiai (as new pres.), I re- 
member ; fiffirijanfxni. 

46. o"Cm, give forth a smell ; smell. 68, 6"C, 6£e. 

olcq, dCi'icioj (offcroo), odcoda (with meaning of the pres.) 

47. b/'V«f, think, — 6't', ol, ok. [Sing. 2. o<k] 

oiouai and oifiat, ou'jcsoftai. Imp. cooper, bpprqv. cprj&qv 
(nuj07 t vai). 

48. or/nuui, am gone, oty, oiye, oiyo. 
pfyfifLtu, oi%t]GO[itti, dr/r^ai and or/mxa. 

49. oXinOai'roj, glide. — 6Xta&, hXtaOz, oXiaftav, oXffi&tuv. 
6Xiffd-atv<o and 67.taOdr<o, oXtaOijaco, coXiaOrjxa. ojXio&ov. 

50. oXXvfxt, destroy. — 6X, bXe, 6Xv. 



186 FtKST GREEK LESSONS. 

oXXi\ui, bXecjco, bXa, bXaXexa. d)Xeaa. 

oXXvf.iai (am undone), dXovpcu, oXwXa. mXo^tjv. 

51. ofivvpi, swear. — bfi, bfie, bfio: b^vv. 

Ofi.vv(ii, bfjtoi'fitti, b[ACQ[ioy.a, bfiw(ioafia.i. mfioaa, oo[xo&tjv. 
(a dropt in the rest of perf. p. bfiwfiozai.) 

52. ovivrjfii, profit. — bv, ova, briva. 

cvvvi\u.i, bvijaco, avrjaa. (as tffrrjfii in pres. and imperf.) 
bviva/xai (receive benefit), avtjjirjv (tjao, &c.) or oW^v. 
[from wvdfiqv, bvaliiijv, bvaa&ai.~\ 

53. oqo.03, see. — Filled up with tenses from on (in bxp, bn- 

og) and eld. 
ogam, b\pO(xai, eoogaxa, iagd^ai (oo/tytca), d>qid'7]v. Imp. 
emgcov. For aor. eWov {ids, &c.) and eidoptjv (Idov, 
&c.) Yerb adj. bgariog, ogazog, bnrog. 

54. b<j(pQai'vo/.icu smell (trans.) baqg, bcsyge : baxpga, bacpgaiv. 
bo~q>gaivo[.iat,, bsqiQijaofiai. coaq)QO[it]v (cbacpgdfiqv, cbagigj]- 

atx'fjrjv). 

55. bcpelXa, owe. — bqieX, bcpeil, bcpeiXe. 
bcpeiXo}, byetXijaco, acpeXov (as a wish only). 

56. bcpXtaxdvco, owe. — bcpeX, bq>X, bqiXe, byXiax. 
bcpXiGxdvco, bcpXrjaco. ojqiXov. 

57. naiQoa, sport. — naiy, ncud, naiC,- 
tzui^co, nai^ofxat, nenaicsfxai. enaica. 

58. TzeccT/co, suffer. — 7ie&, nad; Tztjd-: 7iev&: aa&, na&6%, 

7Za6%. 

ndGjp, neiaofiai, Tzenov&a. ena&ov. 

59. nerdrvvixi, spread out. neza, nra : neravvv. 
3xetdvvv[M, nerdaco, &c. P. pass, nenrayiai, inezda&ijv. 

60. 7ierofA.ru, fly. — Tier, neza, nza : enr, triz : noze. 
riizpfiai [neri]Go\iai), nztjooftai. Aor. enzb\ir\v (nzia&ai). 

There are also two other aorists : 

enrdfMjv (from mrafiai), nrda&ai, nzdpevog. 
enrtjv (from the obsol. act.), nrrjvai, nrdg. 

61. mgda, lay waste. — neg&, nag&, nga& '. nog&e. 
mgOco, negcm, &c, aor. enga&ov. Horn, {nog&eco, a col- 
lateral form.) 

62. nfy.vvfii, make fast, hard, congeal.— rcay, nqy, nr\yvv. 
nrjvvfu, 7zrj%oo, nenrjya (intrans.) indyqv. 



APPENDIX. ANOMALOUS AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 187 

63. aiveo, drink. — ni, rav. no. 

nivoo, (irr. fut.) nio^ai, nmotxa, ntnopai. imov, ino&rjv. 

64. nMQUGX03, Sell. 7T()a, TZtTZQU, mnQCCGX. 

7ZlTtQ(iGX03 (110 flit.), 7T£7TQCCXa. inQa&^V. 

65. 7T17ZTG), fall. 7ZE7, nEG '. 71E7I8T, 7T17TT '. 7TTS, 7170. 

Jiinrca, nEGOvfiat, Tzmzcoxu, etiegov. 

66. nhjoGG), strike. — nkay, nhjy, nltjGG. 

nhjGGoj (reg.) Aor. 2. pass, inlqyijv. Perf. 2. ninltjya. 

(Horn., &c) In the compounds, ixntfamta-, &c. (to 

terrify) : Aur. iaXuyqv. 
(naiuGGa used in the active by the Attics. 

67. Tzvv&dvopat, inquire. — nv&, nsv& : nvv&av. 
nvv&dvofiai, nsvGOfiai, Tzmvofiat. invtfofMjv. 

68. qsXco, do (poet.) — Qsd, fay: eqo, sgy: gs£. 

qs^co and eq8o3, qs^cq and eq%03, eogya, sgyftui. £Q%ct, 

69. QS 03, flow. QE, QEV '. QVj QVS. 

QE03, *QZVGOfJLai aild QVTjGOfiat, SQQV^Hd. *£QQ£VGCi, SQQVrjV. 

[The forms with asterisk are un-Attic] 

70. Qrjyvvpi, break. — gay, grjy, qrflvv : Qcoy. 

qi[yvv\u, q>']<;g3. — iQQuytjv, tQQwya (am broken to pieces). 

71. G@tvvv[ii, extinguish. — g^e, g^evvv. 

G^EVVV^l, GpEGCQ, SG^Xa, SG^EGfiat, £G^£G&1]V, EGplJV (waS 

extinguished). 

72. ofidca, smear. — g^cc, Gfiij, G\ir^. 

G\ido3 {dsig, yg), GfnqG03, <fcc. EGpfyd-tiv. 

73. GtoQEvvvfxi, strew. — gtoq, gtoqs, gtoqevvv : gtqo, gtqcovvv. 

GrOQEVVVfJll, ) G70QEG03, EGIOQEGO., £G70Q£G&T]V, aild 
GTOQVVjil, > G7Q03G03, EGTQCOGa, EG7Q03&t]V. 

GTQbivwfii, \ Verb. adj. argonTog. 

74. ii\ivGi, cut. — TEfi, rap'. t£[av, rctpep: x\ie. 
■ze'/avco, rf^ca, Tstfitina. srsfiov (hapov), IzyirftYiv. 

75. rixTco, bring forth, bear.— zex, texz, nxz. 

71X703, (t^Co) 78^0/Aai, TETOXa. E7EX0V, EtexSjl^V. 

76. 7i7gdo3, bore. — 70a, 7gav, tqo.iv, zEzqaiv. 

(ll7Qdo3, TQaiV03) 7S7QUIV03, 7QiqG03, TS7Q1JXa, tSTQ^fiai. 
E7E7Q7]Va. 

77. 7QEJ03, run. — &Qe%. — dQEft, dga^, dgufis. 



188 FIRST GREEK LESSORS. 

TQz'yco, (-&Q^o^iai) dqafjcovfiai, SsSQa^xa (SsSgofia, Ep.) 
(£&QStza) IdQafiov. 

78. rgcoyco, eat. — zgcoy — TQcty. 
TQcoyca, iQco^opai. 'irqayov. 

79. ttvyco, ) rvy, rvy, rvys. rvy, tsvy, 
zvyydvco, happen on, hit, \ and rvyyav. 

zevyco, poet., zev^co, rhevya, rszvyfiai. Verb. adj. tsvx- 

rog, ivKiog. 
rvyydvco, 78v^o/xai, zeTvyqxa. 'itvyov. 

80. zvnzco, strike. — zvn, zvnz, zvnze. 

zvnzco has generally zvnziqoco in Attic: kvTZtjv. Yerb. 
adj. zvnzr\ziog. 

81. cpalrco, show; appear. — yet, yav, cpcuv. 
qiaivoa, cf,avco, niq/qva '. ecftjva. 

cpaivouai, cyavovpai (cpavt]60[zai), ntcpacixai, icpdv&qv, 
iydvtjv. 
The passive has the intrans. meaning [appear, 

shine), which belongs also to the perf. 2. of 

the active, and sometimes to the pres. and 

imperf. 
But nt'qiartfxut, icpdv&qv have also a strictly passive 

meaning. 

82. cpi-'pco, bear. — cpFQ. — oi — hex, irevx. 

qt'fjco, o'cjco, tvyvoya. Aor. 1. qveyxct ('/jveixa, Ion.) 
Pass. fVe^th/crofeect and ola&qoonai, ivrjvsyfxcu, 'rjvtj&i]v 
(rjveiydrjv, Ion.) 

Verb adj. oiaztog, oirszog. 

83. cpfldvm, anticipate (neu.t.)— cpOa, cp&av. 

qiddrco, cpOuoco or q.Oi'^oixca, ecp&aku. iqi'&d&a, icp&Tjv. 
(eq>0}]v — cp&afi]v, cpOco, qj&JjvUi, cp&dg.) 

84. yaloco, rejoice. — ya.Q, yaiQ, yaiQS : yctQF. 

yainco, yaiQijOco (xtyuyr/xu), xtyaQrifxai (xt'yctQuou, Poet.), 
fyaotjv. 

85. yjm (ytvoco), pour. — ys, yrv, yy. 

yt'co {ytvaco), xt'yvxa, yjyvuai. [tysva, Ep. tyta — syij&qv 
(Fut. Mid. ytofiou. Fut. act. yt'co, yng, yti.) 



APPENDIX. WORDS WITH PENULT LONG. 189 

§ 9. Words with Penult long. 

1. Certain general rules may be first stated. 

(a) All diphthongs and contractions are long. 

(6) Short vowels before two consonants or a double 

consonant become long by position : but 
(c) A mute before a liquid does not make a vowel 

long by position, unless it be a middle mute {§, y, 

8) before I, p, or v. 

Hence the penult in arsxrog, dvanoTfiog, xaodSna 
is short, 
nmliryfxai, evo8(xog, fiift.og is 
long. 

2. The following words have the penult long : — 
(a)oq>lvaQog\d]e talk. 1 xofialog knave. 

avtaoog vexatious. axQazog pure, unmixed. 

7i(tQ,% tiara. veavlg young woman. 

onudng attendant. civani mustard. 

avdadrfi self-satislied,proud. aiaywi'(rj)ia.w. 

(b) Together with those in ayog from ayco or ilpvfti : 



loiayog 


captain 


vavayog 


shipwrecked per- 
son. 


(c) xufiivng(rj) 


stove.- 


o^ilog(o) 


crowd. 


Xahvog (6) 


bridle. 


OTQnftiXog 


cone of a pine. 


cthvov 


parsley. 


TZh'dtloV 


shoe. 


KVfllVOV 


cummin. 


%£hdon (t)] 


swallow. 


avxdfnvov 


mulberry. 


sgi&og 


labourer for hire. 


cvxldfiivov 


cyclamen. 


axgifirjg 


accurate. 


. dmrivi] 


gift. 


dxonrov 


aconite. 


a%ii% 


axe. 


vaqiftog (to 


) salt-fish, &c. 


QljtlVtj 


resin. 







Or, idle talker. 



ndnvoog 

Xdcpvpov 


(>/) papyrus, 
booty. 


nitv'QOV 

dyxvpa 


bran, 
anchor. 


ysqivpa. 

6XvQU 

xoXXvqo, 


bridge. 

spelt. 

sort of cake. 



190 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

(d)alr>xvt'V shame. 

Ev&vrr] examination. 
xudwog (6) danger. 
§6dwog (6) pit. 
Xdyvvog flask. 
!tQ£a^vrrjg old man. 
ipifxvdog(d) white lead. 
ntXvqiog{t6) husk, pod. 

3. (a) Adjectives in vgog have generally the penult 
short; as, fyvpog, byvpog, (from £/co): but i6%vp6g (from 
loyvm), strong. 

(6) The penult of the following words is sometimes 
short ; but it is safer to pronounce them long. 
pvQixq tamarisk. xopivq club. 

nhjfzfivQig flood, tide. zoqvvij ladle. 

(c) The following proper names have the penult long : 

(a) ^zvfiyuXog, (pdpciaXog, Ilplanog, Apatog, Jr^id- 
patog, 'A^dz^g, Mi&piddzrjg, Evq,pdzi]g, Ni(pdrt]g, 
Qsavw, 'Idawv, "Afiaaig, Zdpamg (Serapis). 

(t) Evpinog, 'Evmtvg, JZeptxpog, ( Doivr/.}j, rpditxog, Kd'i- 
xog, "Ooipig, Bovaipig, 'Ay%iaqg, Aiytva, Ka^idqiva, 
Aqpodir?], 'AfiqjiTQizrj. 

(v) Aiovvaog, 'Aficppvaog, Ka^i^varjg, 'AQ^vzag, Kowv- 
zog, BijpvTog/Afivdog, Bi&vvog, TIdjvvov, KeQxvga, 
or Kopxvpu. 

4. The following have the first syllable long : — 
ipdog bare. 
liXog (6) fodder. 
Xii*6g{6) hunger. 
Qivog{ri) skin. 
Xizog simple, plain. 
-dvpiog (6) mind, passion. 
gvfiog (6) pole of a carriage. ~£vppg 
Xvfxog(o) juice, sap. 
%vX6g (6) chyle. 
zvpog (6) cheese. \pv%p6g cold. 



[iixpog 




small. 


Zip?] 




honour. 


vixr\ 




victory. 


y.Xiv7] 




bed, couch. 


dlVt] 




whirlpool. 


XQvaog 


(o) 


gold. 


%vvog 




common. 


ypvnog 




hook-nosed. 


■Avmog 




bent. 



APPENDIX. WORDS WITH PENULT LONG. 191 

nvQog (6) wheat. \pvyji soul. 

cpvli] tribe. Xvnij sorrow. 

vh] wood, matter. TQvyav (ij) turtledove, [ward. 

ovQiy% (>]) pipe. qiQazaQ member of the same 

uri] ruin. acpgayig (?}) seal. 

daXog (6) firebrand. T0t,%v§', rough. 

5. In dissyllable verbs in t», and those in avco, ivm, 

WW, VQCO, 

U and v are long : except in yXvcpco, and(Attice) ztVro, 
J y&ivco. 
1 a is sAortf : except in harm ; and in y&dvco, M%dv& in 

[ the Epic poets. 

6. Of contracted verbs, the following should be 
marked as having the first syllable long : — 

xipscQ, move, aiydoo, am silent, ovXda, plunder. 
Qcyico, shudder, dtcpdco, search for. yvGuco, blow, breathe. 

7. By knowing these quantities, we know the quan- 
tity of many compounds, aztpog, uipvxog, ifAfioi&rjg, aavXor, 
&c. : and of many proper names, such as Hermotimus, 
Demonlcus, Eriphyle, &c. 

8. A few compounds take the short vowel of the 
second Aor. instead of the long one of the present. This 
happens, 

(1) In some substantives in n, qg: TQtfirj, diaTQiffl, 
dvaxpv^rj, naqaypvyri, naidozQi^g. 

(2) In some adjectives in rjg, G. eog : svxQiv^g, drying, 
TzuXivTQifiiqg. 

9. Though the rule that a vowel before a voivel is 
short, has even more exceptions than in Latin, yet it is 
oftener short than long. 

10. In tog, ta, iov (in nouns), it is always short, ex- 
cept in 

aaXid, nest. y.ovia, dust. dvi'a, vexation. 
aly.ta ( personal) insult. ^Av.ah]y.la. 



192 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

11. The following words have also the penult long : 
laag (6), people. vaog (b), temple. 
xdoo (for xaico), burn. y.ldco (for ylaim), weep. 

'Evvm, Bellona. 

12. Of words in acov, tcov. 

(1) Those with o in penult of gen. have penult long-. 

(2) " " oj " " : ' short. 
Hence the penult is long in 'dficjimv, Mrydmv, &c, 

and all comparatives in mv. (itlziav, &c: but short in 

/ItVXaliWV, tl>0QUl03V, gen. OOJ'Ob 1 . 

13. Of proper names in dog, those in laog have of 
course the a long : besides these observe, 

'sdnqidovLog (long) : OlvapoioQ (short). 

Obs. — In a vast number of cases not mentioned here, 
the accents are of great help towards ascertaining 
the quantity of syllables. 

§ 10. Prepositions. 

1. (With gen.) dvri, instead of; duo, from; h (be- 
fore vowels, i£), out of; trance, on account of; jiqo, be- 
fore, for. 

2. (With dat.) iv, in ; a.vj> (tiv), with. 

3. (Gen. and ace.) Sid, through, because of; y.ard, 
down, according to ; vniq, over. 

4. (Gen. dat. ace.) djxyi, about ; mi, on, to, against ; 
per d, iv it h, among, after; nana, from, by; neoi, about, 
of; riQog, to, besides ; vno, under, from, by. 

% 11. Conjunctions. 

(1.) Copulative : xat, t&, and. 

(2.) Separative : fxh — 8s. indeed — but ; ?j, or ; ov8s — 
bv8£; urjds — pirns', neither — ?ior ; alia, but. 

(3.) Of time: ore, bnors, ozav, bnotav, when, when- 
ever ; inu, inu8r\, insi8dv, when, after. 



APPENDIX. RESOLUTION OF CONTRACTED SYLLABLES. 193 

(4.) Of cause: ydo, for; on, because, that; enel, 
since ; mare, so that ; so as. 

(5.) Of purpose : ha, oqsoa, onmg, mg, that ; in order 
that. 

(6.) Conditional : el, edv {i\v, dv\ if. 

§ 12. The Resolution of Contracted Syllables. 

a = act,, ae, ai\. 
a = a'i, aei, ay. 
a= ea. 

q = rje, ea. 
Xi =£«(, e\], r{i. 
t = u) la, te. 

m = ao, aco, aov, em, oa, otj, ooo, ma. 
op = aoi, ml'. 
ai= oac. 
ei = ee, e'i, eei. 
oi = eoi, oi, oei, orj, ooi. 

ov = oo, eo, eov, os, oov. 
v = va, ve, vrj, v'C. 
VI = vi'. 



QUESTIONS ON THE ACCIDENCE. 



Name the mutes with a p sound (tt, /?, <p) : those with a k 
sound (x, y, x) '• and those with a Z sound (t, d, •#). Name the 
semivowels. (The liquids, I, p, v, g — and?.) Name the double 
letters (£, I, ^)- To what is £ equivalent? (To 5?.) To what 
is 5 equivalent ? (To am/ k sound with ?.) To what is ip equiva- 
lent ? (To any p sound with g.) [p. 18.] What are the improper 
diphthongs'? («, y, co : that is, «j, 9jt, rot, the t being subscript, or 
written under.) [p. 14.] Is the i of these vowels ever not written 
below, but in the line? (When capital letters are used, the i is 
still written as a letler [ .) How is y pronounced before a k sound 
or |? (As ng.) [p. 12.] Is ti before a vowel pronounced shi, as 
ice usually pronounce ii? (No.) 

By what vowel or diphthong did the Romans express 

ai? (ce. : sometimes ai or aj.) si? (Long, i or long e.) 

oi? (ce: sometimes oj.) ov? Longzj.) vlI (yi.) How 

did the Romans represent the termination og ? (By us.) 

What does v become in Latin words? (y.) 

Which are the smooth mutes or tenues? (The first of each 

of the three sets is a smooth mute : that is, it, x, t.) Which are 

the middle mutes, medice ? (The middle one of each set : /?, y, 8.) 

Which are the aspirates, aspirate? (The last of each set: cp,%, 

■&.) What is meant by changing a mute into its aspirate or its 

smooth ? (Into the aspirate or smooth mute of the same sound.) 

Which of the mutes are lip-sounds or labials? (The p sounds.) 

Which Unguals? (The t sounds.) Which palatals? (The k 

sounds.) 

1 Thus, AESIIOTHI for SemrSrr,, 'A Um for pr,;. 



QUESTIONS ON THE ACCIDENCE. 195 

Breathings.] — What words have a breathing over their ini- 
tial letter? (All that begin with a vowel or diphthong, and 
those that begin with the consonant g.) Over which vowel of a 
diphthong is the breathing marked? (Over the second.) What 
are the marks of the smooth and rough breathings respectively ? 
(The smooth is a comma: the rough a comma turned the wrong 
way.) What words always take the rough breathing? (Those 
that begin with v or g.) If two £>'s meet in the middle of a word, 
what is done ? (A smooth breathing is marked over the first, a 
rough one over the second.) [p. 14.] 

Stops.~\ — Mention the Greek stops. (The comma and full 
stop are like our own ; our semicolon is their note of interroga- 
tion; and for semicolon and colon they have only one stop, which 
is a dot placed in the upper line of the row of letters, as av^g ■) 
[p. 39.] 

Repeat the terminations of Substantives [p. 15]. Repeat the 
article [p. 16]. 

What is always the termination of the Gen. plural? (av.) 
What accent does gen. av always take in the first declension? 
(The circumflex.) What does the dat. sing, always end in? 
^In i, which is subscript except in the third declension.) What 
nouns in yg take the voc. in u? (Nouns in t?;?, national names, 
and verbal compounds in fistgyg, Tgi^r t g, ntol^g.) When do femi- 
nine nouns in a take gen. in vg and dat. in y? (When a is im- 
pure; but the termination get keeps the a throughout.) What is 
always the quantity of a when the G. is yg? (Short.) Is a, Gen. 
ag. always long? (Not always but generally.) When is a, Gen. 
ag, always short? (When the acute is on the last but two, or the 
circumflex on the last but one. 1 ) How are you to go through a 
contracted noun of the first? (To consider the contracted termi- 
nation as the original termination, and decline regularly.) Is 
there any exception to this ? (Yes ; those that end in a, take 
the alpha forms throughout ; those in ag take the Doric genitive 
a.) 

What vowel appears in every case of the Attic declension ? 
(to.) When is this w subscript ? (Wherever the second declen- 

1 As, na^atpa, jioTpa. 



196 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

sion has i, whether subscript or not.) What is sometimes the 
ace. of w?? (co.) [p. 25.] 

What letters are thrown away before <si in the dat. plur. of 
the third declension? (The t sounds and v.) What is ovxai to 
be changed into ? (ovai.) What avxvi ? (acu.) What svtvi ? 
(stcrt.) What vvtui ? (v<n.) To what terminations is the ace. v 
confined? (To ig, vg, avg, ovg.) What nouns of these termina- 
tions take the ace. in v only? (Pure 1 nouns.) When do impure 
nouns in i§, vg, take accus. in a only? (When the tone-syllable is 
the last.) If they are not accented on the last syllable, what is 
their accusative ? (Generally v ; but sometimes both forms.) 
[p. 31.] 

Nominative.] — In the third declension, how is the 
nominative to be found when the root ends in a conso- 
nant ? (By adding g : and throwing away t sounds and 
v before it,) When the root with the added g would end 
in avrg, ivrg, ovtg, wi;, what must be done? (They must 
be changed into ag, sig, ovg, vg : but ovrg often into wv.) 
What vowels of the root are changed in the nom. ? (£. o, 
into % co.) What terminations do not receive the added 
S? ( y > Q-) To what nom. do roots in at belong? (a 
neut, ag or ag.) [p. 31.] 
Of the Vocative.] — What terminations form the voc. by 
throwing off g from the nom. ? (Contracted nouns in ig, vg, evg : 
with Ticug, ygavg, fiovg.) How is the Voc. formed for roots that 
end in avx, tvx ; that is, for nominatives in sig, ag? (They gener- 
ally form the voc. by throwing off the final x of the root: but of 
those in ag, several have the voc. in a.) How is the Voc. formed 
of nouns whose final vowel is r\ or co? (Generally it is the unal- 
tered root; but only if it has the short vowel, £ or o.) What is 
the voc. mas. of participles in av, sig, <x?? (The same as the nom.) 
What is the voc. of feminines in co, co?? (ot.) Of Anolhiv, noosi- 
dwv, amrrjQ? (^'Anollov, UotrsiSov, crazsg, all with the accent 
thrown back.) Do any nouns that have the long vowel, r\ or w, 
in the nom., and the corresponding short vowel in the root, re- 



That is, those whose roots end in a vowel. 



QUESTIONS ON THE ACCIDENCE. 197 

tain the short vowel in the voc. ? (Yes, substantives with a final 
tone-syllable.) [p. 31,32.] 

Dative Plural.'] — How is the dat. plural formed ? (By add- 
ing ui to the root ; or which comes to the same thing, inserting g 
before the i of the dat. singular.) What further change must be 
made ? ( T sounds and v must be thrown away.) When may the 
dat. be got by adding i to the nom. sing? (When the noun ends 
in £, ifj, or g after a diphthong.) When after the rejection of v 
and a t sound, a short vowel remains, what is done? (It is 
lengthened; but £, o are changed, not into 17, <w, but into the diph- 
thongs si, ov.) 

Adjectives.] — What terminations in og make fem. in a? (og 
pure and gog.) Does any termination in og make fem. in v? 
(Yes ; oog, when not goog.) What are the nom. terminations of 
adjectives in vg? (vg, sia, v.) In sig? (sig, eaaa, ev.) In ovg for 
oog? (ovg, ?J, ovv.) Of ag? (ag, aaa, av, in nag, anag, and parti- 
ciples, but fislag, xalag, -atva, -av.) [p. 43, 173.] 

Give voc. of fisXag (fisXav) — voc. and dat. pi. of %agleig 
(%ttQtsv xaglscn) — nom. neut. pi. of yXvxvg (yXvy.sa). 

Give the terminations in og that are generally ' of two termi- 
nations :' — that is, have og mas. and fem., ov neuter. (Com- 
pound adjectives not ending in xog: the terminations ifiog, Log, 
siog, aiog.) [p. 173.] How are fiiyag and nolvg declined. [See 
p. 53.] 

What words suffer syncope? [p. 42.] In what cases do 
they drop s? What letter is inserted before at in the dat plural? 
(a.) How is the dat. plural accented? (The inserted a is the 
tone-syllable, and, being short, takes the acute.) What is the 
voc. of these words ? (so, with accent on the first syllable.) How 
is avrg declined ? (The s is dropt, but a d inserted between the 
v and the g.) 

Comparison of Adjectives.] — What are the general termina- 
tions of the Comparative and Superlative respectively? (Comp. 
xegog. Superl. taxog.) What are the less usual terminations? 
(Comp. Tow. Superl. icnog.) How are isgog and raiog added to 
adjectives in og, vg? (g is thrown away from nom. before the 
terminations are added.) Is any other change ever necessary ? 
(Yes : if the penult is short, the final is changed into w.) How 



iyy FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

are T£gog, xaTog, added to the terminations rj$, 8ig? (These ter- 
minations are changed into eg, before Tsgog or tarog is added.) 
How are they added to adjectives in ag? (To the root.) How 
are they added to other terminations? (The syllable sg, for the k 
sounds ig or sg, is first added to the root.) What terminations 
often take icav, taxog? (vg and gog.) How are these terminations 
added ? (vg and gog are first thrown away.) [p. 33.] 

Explain the terminations a, ovg. in comparatives. (They are 
formed by contraction after the rejection of v: a from ova, ovg 
from rivsg, ovag.) What case or cases then is co ? (Ace. sing., mas. 
or fern. : or nom. pi. neitt.) Whatoi'?? (Nom. or Ace. plur. mas. 
or fern.) [p. 55.] 

The first four Numerals. — Go through elg. — dvo. — Tgslg, — 
TtWdff?, [p. 5S.] 

How many classes are pronouns divided into? (Nine.) [See 
Append. § 4.] What is the pi. of i^avxov? (rj/J-ng avxol — the 
two pronouns not coalescing.) [p. 177.] Of oavxov? (vfisig 
aviol.) Of iavxov or avxov? (eavxeov or avxiav, -oig, -ovg, &c.) 
What is the nom. pi. of ovxog? (oiixoi, avxai, Tama.) What is 
the m. and n. root for the other cases? (toot.) The f. root? 
(ravT, but G. pi. tout.) What pronominal adjectives take neut. 
in ? (ovxog this, ixeivog that, allog other, amog self.) Have any 
both and ovl (Yes: Toaovxog and xoiomog.) What is the 
neut. of 6 amog the same? (ravzo, and more commonly xavxov.) 
How is 6 amog declined? (The cases of the article that end with 
a vowel coalesce by crasis with the first syllable of amog: thus, 
ttVToq or avxog, xamov, tkitw, &c, for amog, tov avxov, iw 
ainaj, &c.) What is the difference between xavxi] and xaixf] 
with a breathing over it? (xamfj with a breathing, is for xfj amy : 
without a breathing, it is the dat. fern. sing, from ovxog.) What 
is Tama with a breathing? (xa avxa: not to be confounded with 
Tama, these things, from ovxog.) How is oaxig declined ? (Both 
og and Tig are declined : but together with ovxivog, atTivi,the forms 
otov, otw occur, and together with axiva, the form aixa.) On 
which syllable of its dissyllable forms is tic, who? accented, and 
from what does this accent distinguish it? (On the first syllable : 
it is thus distinguished from those of the indefinite xlg,any, which 
are accented on the last.) [p. 178.] 



QUESTIONS ON THE ACCIDENCE. 199 

Verbs.'] — Which are called principal tenses ? [p. 59.] (Pres. 
Perf. Fut.) Which secondary or historical ? (Imperf., Aorists, 
Pluperf.) To which mood is the augment confined? (To the 
indicative.) What is the augment of verbs beginning with a 
consonant? (The syllabic 1 augment, s.) Of verbs beginning 
with a vowel? (The temporal augment.) Give the augment of 
« (-»;) : of a (?;) : of o (w) : of short i and v (long t and v) : of av 
(?;i») : of ou (»/) subscript) : of a subscript (y subscript) : of 01 (o» 
subscript). What vowels and diphthongs are not augmented ? 
(gt, sv, ov — ??,<«, T, u) Is sv ever augmented? (Yes: sometimes, 
by the Attics.) Do they ever augment si ? (Yes, in uxa'Qw: imp. 
rjxayor.) 

What may be the initial vowel or diphthong of a verb 
which has ?? subscript for its augment? (at or a sub- 
script.) What may be the initial vowel of a verb with 
aug. 7} not subscript ? (a or s.) 

Reduplication^] — When does the perfect take a reduplica- 
tion ? [p. 59.] (When it begins with any single consonant except 
g : or with any mute and liquid except yv, and sometimes yl, /SA.) 
What is the reduplication? (A syllable prefixed, made up of the 
initial consonant of the verb with s.) If the verb begins with an 
aspirate mute, what is done? (The smooth mute of the same or- 
gan is used in the reduplication.) What prefix does the perfect 
take when it does not take the reduplication? (The simple aug- 
ment.) What verbs do not take the reduplication? (Those that 
begin with g : with consonants, of which the second is not a 
liquid: with yv: — and some of those that begin with yl, §1.) 
Are verbs that begin with £, I, ip, augmented or reduplicated? 
(Augmented ; for these are equivalent to two consonants.) Do 
the moods and participle of the perf. retain the prefix? (Yes: 
whether it be reduplication or augment.) [p. 60.] 

What is the augment of a few verbs beginning with I, fil 
(si.) 

Does the pluperf. take an augment ? (Yes : but if the perf. 
has the augment, it makes no further change.) Is there any 



1 Syllabic, because it lengthens the word by a syllable : temporal be- 
cause it lengthens it in time. 



200 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

peculiarity when the augment is prefixed to q1 (Yes the q is 
doubled.) [p. 60.] 

Concurrence of Consonants."] — Repeat the table for the mutes. 
What does this table show with respect to the concurrence of 
two mutes? [(1) That the second is always at sound: (2) That 
the two must always be of the same order of breathing, the 
former conforming to the latter: and (3) That the t sound will 
not tolerate another t sound before it. [p. 60.] 

N.] — What becomes of v before a p sound? (It passes into 
fi.) Before a k sound? (It passes into y.) Before a liquid? (It 
is assimilated.) Before a or £? (It is generally thrown away, but 
not before oat of perf. pass.) [p. 60.] 

2.] — What becomes of a when it would stand between two 
consonants? (It is thrown away — and the preceding consonant 
conformed to the following one.) When a I sound and v are both 
thrown away before at,, how is the vowel of the syllable changed 
if short? (It is changed into a diphthong; s into si, o into ov.) 
How if doubtful? (It is lengthened.) How is the doubling of an 
aspirate prevented ? (By changing the first into its smooth.) Is 
this done when the first, alone or with q, is separated from the 
second by a vowel ? (Yes : thus, -frgscp becomes rgscp, but when 
cp is changed into ip, the aspirate reappears; -d-gup.) [p. 61.] 

Short Root.] — How may the short root generally be obtained 
from the longer one ? (By changing a diphthong into a simple 
vowel ; a long vowel into its kindred short one ; or throwing 
away one of two consonants.) Is t] of the long root always s in 
the short root? (No: a.) Of £, that is ad, which letter is thrown 
away? (?.) Of iv, which vowel is thrown away? (s.) How 
must si be changed, to get the short root ? (Into i before a mute, 
£ before a liquid.) [p. 61.] 

Formation of the Tenses.] — What are Barytone Verbs? 
(Those that end in co.) Why are they so called? (Because 
their last syllable has the supposed grave accent, fiughg tovoq : 
that is, has not the acute.) How are barytone verbs divided ? 
(Into mute, liquid, and pure verbs, according as their character- 
istic is a mute, a liquid, or a vowel.) What do you mean by 
their characteristic? (The letter that determines or characterises 
their conjugation, which is the last letter of the root.) [p. 61.] 



QUESTIONS ON THE ACCIDENCE. 201 

What are the only verbs that have the second future in the 
active and middle ? {Liquid verbs.) What verbs have the se- 
cond future in the passive? (Those that have the second aorist 
passive.) When the root of the present is as short as it can be, 
can any second aorist be formed ? (Yes ; the second aor. passive, 
which in that voice is sufficiently distinguished from the imper- 
fect by its termination.) Mention some classes of verbs that have 
no second aorist. (Derivative verbs in a£w, t£co, aiva, eva, <xco, ea } 
ow.) [p. 62.] 

Mute Verbs including those in m.~] — Give the most import- 
ant terminations for the p sounds, as they appear after they are 
appended to the root with its necessary euphonic changes (ipm, (pa, 
Uliai^ cp&nv) — for the k sounds (£<y, %a, yfiai, x^w) — f° r the t 
sounds (ff&j, xa, opou, O'&rjv). [p. 65.] Have mute verbs the termin. 
xa or a in the perfect? (The p and k sounds «, the t s'ounds xa.) 
Why is the rough breathing placed over the termination a? 
(To indicate that the p or k sound must be turned into its aspi- 
rate before the termination.) How are roots in jit to be treated ? 
(Exactly as if they ended in a p sound, except, of course, for the 
imperfects, which have always the root of the present.) For 
what tense is it necessary to know which p sound the verb orig- 
inally had ? (For the second aorist.) Why is it not necessary to 
know this for the other tenses? (Because all the p sounds are 
combined in the same way with the other consonants.) Mention 
some verbs in m that have /3 for their true characteristic : (/SAtOTTw, 
XQVTnbi) — some that have (p. (/5oottco. {5cott&>, S-ujitw^ axarnio^ qIti- 
rw, ■d-QVTtxm). What is s of a monosyll. root often changed into 
in the second aor.? (Into a — xQin-w, hqaTtrp>.) [p. 65.] In 
what verbs is s changed into a in the perf pass. ? (cnqtcfo), TQsqxo, 
of which the root is ■&§£$> and rqsnm; 1 ) Form perf. pass, from 
■&qeq>. (rs-&Q(Xfi-p.ai.) What is the diphthong sv changed into in the 
perf. pass. ? (v.) Into what is the e of the root sometimes changed 
in the perf. act. ? (Into o : in lorgoqpa, xtxlocpu, from (nqsqxa, 
xXtma.) 

Verbs in £, aa, tt.] — What is the true characteristic of verbs 
in ow, tt? (Generally a k, but sometimes a t sound.) What is 

1 This verb has also aor. 2. erpamv. 
9* 



202 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

the true characteristic of verbs in £? (Generally d, but sometimes 
y.) Mention some verbs that form their tenses as if the roots 
ended in yy. (x).a£w, nXd'Ca, auljii'^w, &c.) [p. 70.] 

Liquid Verbs.'] — From what root are all the tenses of liquid 
verbs formed, except the pres. and ifnperf.? (From the short 
root.) fp. 76.] What is the fut. act. and mid., of liquid verbs? 
(The second future.) What peculiarity is there in the aor. act. 
and mid.? (It is without?.) Is the vowel of the short root al- 
tered in these tenses? (Yes: the vowel is lengthened, and for 
this purpose e is changed into si ; a into ??.) Is a always changed 
into 77? (No: those in gaiva, with some others in aivos, make aor. 
1. ava.) Is £ of uhe short root changed in any other tenses? and 
if so, into what, and in what tenses? (Yes: it is often changed 
into «, in the second aorists, and in perf. pass, and aor. 1. pass.) 
What peculiarity is there in some verbs in iva, eivu> ] vvg>7 (They 
drop v in the perfects, act. and pass., and aor. 1. pass.) Of the 
verbs in vw that retain the v, how is the perf. pass, formed ? 
(Most of them change v into g : but some change it into [i, and 
some reject the v, the preceding vowel being long.) What must 
be remembered with respect to the 2d sing, of these perfects? 
(That in all of them the v will reappear before g.) Give the perf. 
of fisvco; (fizfiivyxci, as if from [isv&w) — of vifioi {vEvtfirixa, as if 
from refxsco.) [p. 77.] 

Pare Verbs.'] — How must the root of pure verbs be altered, 
before cr<w, xa, fiat,, -&t]v, are added? (The final vowel must gen- 
erally be lengthened ; both s and a into rj.) [p. 80.] If the final 
vowel is a, is it always changed into??? (No: w is kept if the 
letter before a is one of those in the word qsi.) Give the futures 
of ux§ouo t ucu, zQuofiui (uxgouaopat, %gq<ro(Mxi.) Do any verbs 
retain s or short « in the fut. &c. ? (Yes.) What are the termi- 
nations of the perf. pass, and aor. 1. pass, for pure verbs that re- 
tain £ or short a ? (a/uui, a&r]v.) Mention some other pures that 
take af.HU, c-dyv. (axovai, xeXsvw, nala), aelcu, &c.) What is the 
perf. of navofiai ? (jitnavfiui) — the aor. 1. pass. ? (inava&ijv.) 
[p. SO.] 

Perfect II] — From what root is the perf. 2. formed ? (From 
the short root.) [p. 82.] With or without change? (With 
change.) Into what are a, s, 1, of the short root changed ? (Into 



QUESTIONS ON THE ACCIDENCE. 203 

»j, o, oi respectively.) What verbs retain the root of the pres. in 
perf. 2. ? (Those which have sv in root of pres.) How do some 
verbs that have e lengthened by position in the root of pres. form 
perf. 2. ? (From root of present : changing s into o.) [p. S2.] 

Attic Future and Attic Reduplication.'] — When ctw is preced- 
ed by a short vowel, what change takes place in the Ionic dia- 
lect ? (The g is dropt.) [p. 84.] What further change takes 
place in the Attic dialect? (The two vowels are contracted.) 
Give the Attic futures of jsXea, (ji(3cc£w. (reXm, {3i(3w.) Go 
through them. [See note, p. 84.] If i precedes aa, and there- 
fore no contraction is possible, what is the Attic future? (The ca 
is circumflexed, as if a contraction had taken place, but the v re- 
tained.) Give the Attic fut. of vo^ii'Qw. (ropiw). When is the 
penult of aero, Eo-o), vaa, always short ? (When they come from 
verbs in 'Qoi, cro-co, or ttw.) What is the Attic reduplication? 
(The initial vowel and consonant of a verb beginning with a 
vowel, which is prefixed to the temporal augment.) With what 
change is this often accompanied ? (With the shortening of the 
penult.) What verbs in eat have ev in the fut. or its derivatives? 
(Six verbs, all of which describe gentle motion: nXsw sail, &eco 
run, Tivsoj blow, jje'w flow, vew swim, x'eoj pour.) What verbs in 
caw or 6im take av in the fut? (tcala bum, xXaleo weep.) [p. 85.] 

Moods and Persons.'} — Give the terminations of the Moods 
for the Active, [p. 85.] What are the terminations of the infin. 
and partic. of the perf. act.? (svai, with acute on the £,• and cog, 
with the acute.) What moods are wanting in the fut. ? (The 
imperative and subjunctive.) Give the terminations of the moods 
for the pass, and mid. [p. 86.] How are the opt. and subj. of 
the perf. pass, generally supplied ? (By the opt. and subj. of sivcu, 
to be, with the perf. particip.) Give the general forms of the 
persons, [p. 86.] What difference is there in the dual and plural 
of the principal and historical tenses? (The principal tenses 
have third dual ov ; the historical, third dual rp>, in all voices. In 
the act. 3 plur. has vi in the principal, v in the historical tenses. 
In the pass. 3 plur. vxai for the principal, vto for the historical 
tenses.) 

Peculiarities of Augment.'] — What compound verbs take the 
aug. at the beginning. (Those whose first factor is a noun or a.) 



204 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

[p. 87.] When is the aug. in the middle, i. e. before the verb ? 
(When the first factor is a prepos. or dig, ev.) If the preposition 
ends in a vowel, is the vowel elided ? (Yes : except in negl, ngo, 
and sometimes aficpl: theo of nqd is often contracted with the fol- 
lowing vowel.) When is the aug. placed before dig, ev ? (When 
the verb begins with to, % or a consonant.) When is the aug. 
placed before the preposition ? (When it is closely joined to the 
verb by elision; or the simple verb is out of use.) Mention some 
verbs that are augmented in both places, {avoqd-oat, ivo^lew.) 
What verbs beginning with a take no augment? (aw, aha, aw&ea- 
aw, u7]dl£o[i<xi.) What verbs beginning with oi, take no aug.? 
(oixovQEw, oh'ob), otor^fco.) What verbs take i after the initial s 
as their augment ? (t^ro, iaco, eknw, egTiw, eqtiv'Qw, i&l'Qw, eklaaw, 
tno[xai } iqya'Qo^iai, eariaw. — So elnov said, ellov took. See algea 
take, in Anom. Verbs p. 182.) What verbs beginning with a 
vowel prefix s as aug. ? (aUoxw in edi-av : ayvvpi, aid-son.) Men- 
tion some perfects that do the same, (i'oixa am like, from stum: 
zolna, i'ogya, from the obsolete e'kna, and tgyw.) Give imperf. of 
soQTw^a) (koigia'Qov) — of bgaw (ecogcav) — pluperf. of toLv.a (somstv). 
Give imperfects of fitkloj am going, dira/xai can. (rjfislkov, ydwd- 
firjv.) [p. 88.] 

On the Terminations. ~] — Which 3d plural of the imperat. is 
the more common in Attic Greek? (ovtoov, arrow.) What opta- 
tive is there besides oifiil (oiyv in fut. 2. and contracted verbs.) 
Go through oitjv. (Note 2, p. 94.) What opt. is there instead of 
ai+ii ? (The iEolic Aor. in eta.) In which persons is this the 
more common form ? (stag, sie — eiav.) What is an Old-Attic 
term, of Pluperf. ? (o, r t g, from Ion. ea, sag.) What were original- 
ly the second persons from pai, fii]v. ? (aui, ao, from which g was 
dropt, and the vowels contracted.) What is eai, for eaai, con- 
tracted into, besides r\ ? (si.) In what tenses is the second per- 
son often £i? (In fut. 2. mid.) In what words is ei the only form 
in use? (fiovXst, oyei, oi'ei.) What forms are used even by Attic 
poets for fie&ov, fie&a ? (fiecr-&ov, fxea&a.) When are the forms 
for 3d plur. perf. and pluperf. passive unmanageable? (When 
the root does not end in a vowel.) How do the Ionians form 
these persons? (By changing v into a, aspirating the character- 
istic for the p and k sounds.") Ts sisv, or snjoav, the more usual 



QUESTIONS ON THE ACCIDENCE. 205 

3d plur. optat. of the passive aorists? (eiev.) What forms occur 
in the poets for eiTjfisv, styiel (si-fiev, sits.) [p. 94.] 

Contraction of Verbs.] — Give the rules for the contraction of 
verbs in soo. (se becomes si; so, ov; and s is thrown away be- 
fore long vowels and diphthongs) — of verbs in aw. (a before ans 
sound is long a ; before an o sound, co) — for oeu. (o before a short 
vowel becomes ov; before a long one, cu; but it disappears be- 
fore 01, ov). [p. 95.] Is there any exception to this rule ? (Yes: 
with si of the indie, and n subscript of the subj., it is contracted 
into oi.) What pure verbs leave the vowels open in some 
of their persons ? (Pure verbs with a monosyllabic root leave the 
vowels open, except before s, el.) What verbs contract as into 
rjl (Jra, live; difdco, thirst; itsivum, hunger; xgaoftai, use.) 
[p. 95.] 

On the Conjugation of the Perf Pass.'] — [See 205, p. 100 ; and 
Lesson 70, p. 111.] — What person do the first dual and plur. fol- 
low ? (The first singular.) What does the 2d sing, follow 1 (The 
first future.) What do the second and third dual, and the second 
plural follow ? (The aor. 1. pass. ; for since the a of a&s disap- 
pears between two consonants, the termination is virtually &.) 
What will the consonant before Tat be in the second sing? (n, x, 
a respectively for the p, k, and t sounds: and the final liquid of 
the root for liquid verbs.) 

Verbs in fit-] — To what tenses is the peculiarity of these 
verbs confined 1 (To the pres., imperf., and aor. 2.) [p. 129.] From 
what are verbs in fit formed ? (From simpler, generally mono- 
syllabic roots.) How are they formed ? (The vowel is length- 
ened, and either simple t before double consonants, or i with the 
initial consonant of the root, prefixed ; the smooth being of course 
used for the aspirate. The termination fit is then added.) Is 
any other alteration of the root ever made ? (Yes : vv or vvv is 
sometimes added to it.) From what roots do ildr^i, 8i8mfii, 
Xavrjiii, 8Eixvvf.u, respectively come? (%rs, 8o, axa, Seix.) Go 
through the terminations of the moods. (6, p. 130.) Go through 
the moods themselves. (10, p. 131.) Give the terminations of the 
tenses. (8. p. 130.) Go through ri&ijfii, Xax^fii, 8i8wfii, Ssixvvfii. 
(9, p. 131.) Go through the imperfect ofxi&rjfii. (9, p. 131.) What 
other imperfect has it? (ixlxrsov=ixl&ovv, as if from xi&sw.) Go 



206 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

through imperf. of lor^i (9, p. 131.) — ofdldcofii (9, p. 131.) What 
other imperf. has it? {idldoov=Edldovv, as if from diduoj.) Go 
through aor. 2. of xl£hi]/j,i — of'iaiiifit — of dideupi (9, p. 131.) Go 
through subj. lorco (tcrrw, laxjjg, &c, not iarag) — of didat {didwg, 
&c.) Are (jtc5, dm gone through in the same way? (Yes: criw, 
aTJjq ; day dag, &c.) Go through -&sg {-&Eg, x^exco, &c.) — dog, {dog, 
doxca, &c.) What other imperat. have verbs in [ill (One as if 
from verbs in em, aw, ow, vat — xL&ei, Xgxv, dldov, delxvv). What 
form of imper. aor. 2. occurs in compound verbs ? {gxu for gxij&i.) 
Pass, and Mid.'] — Go through the moods of xi&Efiui, iGxixfica, 
dldofiai, dslxvvpai. (14, p. 132.) Have these verbs any opt. and 
subj. of the present tense besides those set down? (Yes: xl&rjpi, 
dldoj[.ii, have forms in oi\ir\v, ojfiai, 1 as if from xl&a. dldoi.) Has 
'iGxrjfii any such form? (Not in the subj. : but a similar one, iGxcri- 
fj.rjv, Xaxcuo, 2 &c. in optative.) Go through s&tfirjV, egxc/.^v, ido- 
firjV. (p. 133.) Go through xl&s-fxai, iaxu-fiat, dldo-fiai dslxrv-fiai. 
(jUtti, gul, xai, &c. regular: p. 86.) Go through hi&k-prpi, laxa- 
{Ar[V, edido-firjv, idsLy.vv-/j.i]V (p. 133.) — E&Efir/V, id6fii]P {{J.t]V, go, to, 
&c. ; but e&ov, tdov, for edsao,edoao). Does EGxdfxyv occur? 
(No.) Give the remaining tenses of xl&ij/u, didtofii, taxr^ti, and 
iijfit. (16, p. 134.) Mention some anomalous first aorists in xa. 
(I'#?;xa, i'dwxa, r { xa, from xl&r^t,, dldbi^i, ujfii,.) Between what 
meanings is Xaxyfu divided? (Between 'stand' and 'place.') Which 
tenses of the active belong to 'place?' (Xgxiij.ii, Xgxt(v: gxijgu), 
egxi}Go) — which to ' stand V (I'gttjxu, egxtjxeiv, egxvv.) What is 
the meaning in the pass.? {'to be placed' throughout) — in the 
mid.? (sometimes to place myself; sometimes to place, to erect; 
which is the only meaning of aor. 1. mid.) Explain the forms 
MTvfirjv, sGtaGav, sGzuvai, EGxag. (They are abbreviated forms 
for sGTJ]xafisv, egxi]xeguv, EGTr t xEvai, EGirjxwg.) Go through wxwg. 
(&GX(Lg, EGTWGa, EGiaig or sgxoq, G. EGiwxog, eorcucnjc, EGiaxog, &c.) 

{Accentuation — See pp. 17, and 123.) 

1. The syllable on which the accent stands is called the 
tone-syllable, and is said to have the lone. 

1 Thus TiQoiTO, ridnrai for tlOsTto, Tidrjrai. } ~, 

SiSocro.StSuTcu for JiAKro, &Wra«; \ 0bS - aCCentS ' 
2 For laraTo. 



QUESTIONS ON THE ACCIDENCE. 207 

2. The last syllable but one is called the penult; the last but 
two, the ante-penult. 

3. An accent that stands as near the beginning of the word as it 
can, is called a fore-accent; one that stands as near the end as it can, 
a hind-accent ; the acute on the last but one, a middle-accent. 

4. Words are oxytone, paroxytone, or proparoxytone, accord- 
ing as the acute stands on the last syllable, the penult, or the 
antepenult. 

5. A word is a perispomenon, or properispomenon, according 
as the circumflex stands on its last syllable or on its penult. 

What are the only unaccented words? (The cases of the 
article that begin with a vowel : the prepositions eg, iv } ix' — with 
el, wg, ov.) Is ag ever accented? (Yes: wg, l as' is accented 
when it follows its word: ag, 'thus,' is always accented.) Is ov 
ever accented? (Yes: when it stands by itself in a denial; or 
follows its word.) 

What are the only syllables which can have the tone? (The 
last three.) Can the circumflex stand on the antepenult? (No.) 
When only can eilher accent stand as a fore-accent? (When the 
last syllable of the word is short.) What diphthongs are consid- 
ered short as far as the accentuation is concerned ? (at, oi, ex- 
cept in the optative.) Over what syllables only does the circum- 
flex stand? (Over syllables long by nature.) If the last sylla- 
ble is a tone-syllable, what is generally its accent? (The acute.) 
What exceptions are there besides contracted syllables? (The 
genitives and datives of the first two declensions: adverbs in ag: 
the voc. of nouns in evg, and some monosyllabic words.) If the 
tone-syllable of such a word as %Q7){ia be the first syllable, that 
syllable being long by nature, what must its accent be ? (The 
circumflex : %Qrj[ia.) 

Changes $c. of accents in continued discourse.']— How are 
oxytones marked in continued discourse ? (With the accent drawn 
the other way, thus [' ] 2 ). When does an oxytone continue oxytone 
in a sentence? (When it forms the last word of it.) What are 
enclitics? (Little words which throwback their accent on the pre- 

1 That is, £? or ci; ■ h or tiv : ck or ti; : d, din or oix- 

2 This is called die grave accent — an accent supposed to belong to 
all the unaccented syllables. 



208 FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 

ceding word.) What words are enclitic ? (The oblique cases of 
the personal pronouns: 1 the pres. indie, of dfiL, I am; cpnpl, I 
say; except the 2d sing.: the indefinites nwg, na, not, nv\, nov, 
710&1, nodiv, 7tot£ — and T£, to/, yi, y.s, (y.iv), -d-fiv, vv, vvv, nsg, 
yd.) When does an enclitic throw its accent on the final of the 
preceding word ? (When the preceding word has a fore-accent.) 2 
When does an enclitic lose its accent? (When the preceding 
word has a middle or hind accent.) Is there any exception to 
this rule ? (Yes : dissyllable enclitics retain their accent after a 
middle accent.) If an oxytone is followed by an enclitic, should 
the acute be written as the grave? (No.) When do enclitics 
retain their accent? (The personal pronouns retain it, after a pre- 
position : tort retains it, but on its first syllable, when it stands em- 
phatically for ' there is,' ' there exists? 3 &c.) Should ifiov, &c, or 
[toil, &c., be used after prepositions ? (fyov, &c.) If an apostrophis- 
ed particle precedes the enclitic, would it retain its accent? (Yes. 4 ) 

Change of Accent in the Declensions.] — When a long final 
syllable of a gen. or dat. is the tone-syllable, what accent does it 
take, and what results from this? (It takes the circumflex: and 
hence oxytones becomes perispomenons in the genitives and da- 
tives of the first declension.) What case of the first declension 
is always a perispomenon? (The gen. plural.) Are there any 
exceptions? (Yes: the genitives of xQW^q usurer, ucpvn anchovy, 
ixnalai the Etesian winds.) When an accent can no longer 
stand, from the final having become long, what must be done? 
(The word must take the middle accent.) If the final of a par- 
oxytone, with penult long by nature, becomes short what must be 
done? (The acute must be changed into the circumflex. 5 ) 

Second Declension.] — What changes are here necessary? 
(Exactly the same as in the first, except that the gen. plur. is not 
necessarily circumflexed.) 



1 But not the dissyll. cases of iyu. 

TllUS, avBponos ~i , C av6ptoir6i CGTl- 

K-poTao; J (_ 1 K„poZ<r6s iari. 

3 When, that is, it is more than the mere copula. 

4 Thus, ttoWoX 5' tiaiv. 

5 Thus noXirns (i), V. ttoXTtu, N. pi. noXTrai. 



QUESTIONS ON THE ACCIDENCE. 209 

Third Declension.] — How is the accent changed in mono- 
syllabic words? (The final is the tone-syllable of all genitives 
and datives. 1 ) Are there any exceptions'? (Yes: 
dadcov, d/idiav, nuldav, S-wav, 
qxndav, cpmwv, ojrav, Tgouav.) 
How are the monosyll. participles accented ? (On the root.) How 
is nag accented ? (Gen. and dat. plural are accented on the root. 2 ) 
Does the accent of polysyllabic words undergo any but the ne- 
cessary changes ? (No : the accent remains on the same syllable 
as long as it can). 

Accent of Act. Voice : p. 89.] — What is the general rule ? (That 
the accent is as far back as possible.) What tenses are always 
accented on the penult'? (The infinitives of aor. 1. and perf, and 3 
sing. opt. in oi, ui.) What parts of the verb are oxytone? (The 
participles of the perf. and aor. 2.) What part of the verb is 
circumflexed on the last syllable? (The infin. aor. 2. and all the 
long final syllables of the fut. 2. 3 ) Mention some imperatives 
that are oxytone. (slice, svgs, sk&s: and Altice, Xafie, Ids.) 

Accent of Passive and Middle.] — What is here, too, the gen- 
eral rule? (That the accent is as far back as possible.) When 
is the accent always on the penult? (In the infinitives of perf., 
aor. 2. mid., the passive aorists, and the perf. participle.) How 
are the subj. and participles of the pass, aorists accentuated ? 
(The subjunctive has the final syll. circumflexed in the sing., the 
penult in dual and plural: the participles are oxytone.) How is 
ov of imperat. mid. accentuated ? (Circumflexed : but in the dual 
and plural the accent is dirown back.) 

Accentuation of Verbs in p.] — Do these differ, in point of 
accentuation, from verbs in to? (Not essentially: of infinitives in 
vui, the penult is the tone-syllable ; 4 the participles in g are oxy- 
tone.) How is the subj. active accented? (It takes the circum- 
flex as having arisen from contraction.) 



1 Thus, Grip, dripog, dr/pl, O/joa, &C. dripiov, drjpai. 

2 Thus, TiavTbMi, kclgi. See p. 54. 

s Except in the oblique cases of the participle. 

4 The accent of this penult will be the circumflex if the vowel is long 
by nature. 



210 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 



I am come to do it. 

I came to do it. 

To suffer punishment. 

Too wise to be deceived. 

The surface is smoother 

than that of, &c. 
I am come to shut, &c. 

I sent a man to-do-it. 

He who does. 
Of him who-does. 

Of those who-do, &c. 

^ I would not do. 
J I should not do. 
( I would have done it. 
j I should have done it. 
To lead by the hand. 

Knowing ( participial 

substantive). 
Of knowing. 
To knowing, &c. 
The rhinoceros has a 

hard skin. 
I will not go before you 

come. 



I am come, that I may do 

it (subj.) 
I came that I might do it 

(opt.) 
To give justice. (Si'doam — 

dixi].) 
Wiser than (?/) so-as (&We) 

to-be- deceived. 
The surface is smoother 

than the of, &c. 
I am come about-to-shut, 

&c. (fut. part.) 
I sent the (man) about-to- 

do-it, top 7zot?jaov7a. 
the (man) doing, 6 ttqutzcov. 
of the (man) doing, rov nqdx- 

Tovrog. 
of the (men) doing, rmv 

nQciTTOvzoav, <fcc. 
av, with optative, (ovx av 

TTQaTTOi^l.) 

av, with indie, of aorist. 

(mga^a av.) 
to lead of the hand : (gen. 

without preposition.) 
to-know : zb yvoSvai. 



of to-know 
to to-know: 



mi' yvoovai. 
rep yvavai, &C. 
The rhinoceros has the skin 

hard. 
I will not go, tzqiv av sl&yg 



APPENDIX. DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 



211 



m. I may do it. 

I might have clone it. 
n. I ought to do. 
I must do. 
I ought to have done it. 

o. The same. 

Himself, herself, &c. 
Himself, herself, itself, 
with a noun, 

p. Every city. 

The whole city ; all the 
city. 

q. The rest of the country. 

r. My friend and my fa- 
ther's. 

s. (l.)This. 



(2.) That, 
t. His : — their. 

His own : — their own. 
u. If I have any thing, I 
will give it. 
If he should have {or, 
were to have) any 
thing, he would give 
it. 
v. If I had any thing, I 
would give it. 

w. If I had had any thing, 
I would have given it. 

x. Whereas you may, &c. 



'i^eari (jtiot) nomv. {e^eazi — 

licet.) 
i%ijv {{im) nomv. 
deifte nomv : or, %Qij (ie noieiv. 

edei, [is aoiuv : or, tyqtjv pe noi- 
eiv. 

o avzog. 

in nom. avzog. 

avzog in agreement. 

{&dvazog avzog : avrog 6 &d- 
vazog.) 

ndaa nolig. 

ndaa tj noXig. 

r\ dXXr\ %a>Qa. 

My friend and the of my fa- 
ther {friend understood). 

(1.) ovzog 6 : or, 6 — ovzog, ) 
or oSe 6 : or, 6 — ode, > 
with subst. between. ) 

(2.) ixEivog 6 — : or 6 — ixelvog. 

avzov : avzmv. 

6 iavzov : 6 eavzmv. 

(1.) ' ; if" to be translated by 
idv with subj. 

(1.) a if" to be translated by 
el with optative: the other 
verb (" would give' 1 ' 1 ) to be 
in optative, with dv. 

"if" to be translated by el: 
both verbs in imperf. in- 
die. The second with dv. 

"if" to be translated by ei: 
both verbs in aor. indie. 
The second with dv. 

i%6v ; neut. part, from $£- 
eazi, here used absolutely 
in nom. 



212 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



[isfivTjfiai. 

imluv&dvofiai. 
xrjdofiai. 



Some Verbs that govern the gen. 
Remember. 
Forget. 
Care for, have any regard 

for. - 
Hold cheap. 
Despise. 
Spare. 
Desire. 
Aim at. 
Master. 
Overcome. 

Getthebetterof; surpass. 
Accuse, charge. 
Condemn. 



dXiyCDQECO. 

xazacpQOvsa). 

im&vfxt'co. 
czo%d£o(xat. 
HQazs'a). 
TiEQiyiyvofiou. 

TTEQIEIfll. 

y.azriyoQtco. 
xazayiyvwcxco. 

Some Verbs that govern the dat 



Threaten. 

Associate with, keep 

company with. 
Follow. 
Envy, grudge. 
To meet, fall in with. 
Blame. 

Find fault with, rebuke. 
Scold, rail at, speak ca- 

lumniously of. 
Accuse of, charge with, 

blame. 
Plot against. 
Fight with. 

Contend or dispute with. 
Am angry with. 
Am in a passion or rage. 



unEilso). 
6{iT)J(o, 

enoficu. 

y&oveoo 1 — cp&6vog, envy. 

ivzvy%dv(o. 

fAt'pyofiai. 

E7Z(7l(AUCO. 

loidogsofxcu — XoidoQEco, takes 

the ace. 
iyxalsm. 2 

imfiovXevw. 
fidxofxai. 

OQyt^Ofiai. 
yaXmcdvm. 



1 (pQoviw takes gen. of the object that excites the envy, or of the thing 
grudged. 

2 Verbs of reproaching, &c, take ace. of the thing (as well as dat. 
of person), especially when it is a neut. pronoun. (iyicaMv, &c., H tivi.) 



ENGLISH-GREEK INDEX. 



U* Obs. Look under 'am' for adjectives, phrases, &c. with to be. 



Accuracy, axoi'fieia, ag, %, 

p. 20. 
Accurate, axoT^g, eg, p. 47. 
Accurately, axQi§mg. 
Acquire, xrdofxai. 
Acquiring, xirjaig, sag, i\, p. 

41. 
Acquisition, xrrJGig, mg, q. 
Action, 7TQa%ig, ecog, fj. 
Add, 7zqoot(&7]ui, p. 131. 
Administer aid, mixovqim 

(dat.) 
Admire, &av^m, with' fut. 

mid. after p. 116, (p. 27.) 
Adorn, xoofiem. 
iEneas, Alvdag, ov, b- 
Affair, nqayfia, arog, to. 
Against, mi, (ace.) 
fi ged, ysqaiog or yrjqcuog (p. 
r 45, note). 
Agreeable, cpiXog, t], ov. 
Agricultural, ysmqyixog, -q, 

ov. 
Aim, axonog, ov, 6. 



All, nag, anag, p. 54. 

Alone, [tovog, r\, ov. 

Already, rfirj. 

Also, xai. 

Am, £{)«, [sometimes aor., 

&C. of yiyvofiai], p. 135. 
Am able, 8vva^.ai. 

alive, t,dm. 

anxious about, xqdofiai, 

and y.sx?]8a, p. 83. 

ashamed, aia%vvo[iai. 

asleep, xa&svdm. 

awake, iyqtjyoqa, p. 83. 

bold, ToXfiuco. 

born, yiyvo/xai, (irr.), p. 

182. 

broken, 'iaya, p. 182. 

to pieces, sgqoa- 



ya, p. 187. 

busied with, mco, p. 183. 

come, i'jxm, p. 102. 

extinct, aor. of anoofisv- 

wfii (ivr.), p. 187. 
extinguished, ea^v, p. 

187. 



214 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS 



Am fixed, nmijya, p. 186. 

going to, (iUla, p. 105. 

gone, o'i'%oiuu, p. 185. 

here, ndoEiiu, p. 102. 

hid, Xav&dvco, p. 185. 

hungry, TZEivdco. 

ignorant of, dyvoico, p. 

180. 
in haste, cnovbaQco, p. 

181. 
inclined to laugh, ysla- 

osi'oj, p. 143. 

living (at), 8iuroi§co. 

mad, paivo[x(u, and /as- 

fiijva, p. 83. 

of opinion, vofil^co. 

off, oi%oixcu, irr. verb, p. 

1S5. 1 
placed = stand, hra^xai. 

(See Lesson 8, p. 93). 
present, ado-Etfu, p. 

102. 
profitable to, ovivrjfu, p. 

158. 

pure, xa&aoEvco. 

putrid, otarjna, p. 83. 

rich, nXovxica. 

seen, cfaivo/xai, p. 188. 

silent, oio37ida>, p. 181. 

a slave, dovXsvco. 

taken, dXiaxouai, p. 182. 

thirsty, di\pdco. 

torn, EQQwya, p. 187. 

undone, dnoXcoXa. 

unfortunate, ? dvazv- 

unhappy, ] Z e'a». 

■ wealthy, nXovizco. 



wrong, ufiaQzdvco (irr.\ 

p. 182. 
Ambassador, noEafivg, tag, 6. 
Anchises, 'Ayyjatjg, ov, 6. 
Announce, dyyi-XXco. 
Another, dXXog, y, o. 
Anticipate, cp&dvco (neut.), 

p. 188. 
Apollo, 'AnoXXcov, covog, 6, 

p. 179. 
Appear, yaivoftcu, p. 188. 
Appoint, rdaam. 
Arithmetical, aQi&fiquxog, rj, 

ov. 
Arms, onXa, pi. 
Army, atQcczog, ov, 6. 
Arrange, tkcjcjco. (See p. 147.) 
Arranging (the act of), rd%- 

ig, Ecog, f[. 
Arrive, dcp-ixvEo/xai, irr. 
Arrow, §£Xog, sog, to. 
Art, Tzyvi], ijg, ?/. 
Artist, iEyvixi]g, ov, 6. 
As [ think, cog iycpfxai (= iych 

oifiai). 
As if, cog. 

Asked, riQonijv, from eqo/xcu. 
Ass, ovog, ov, 6. 
Assemble, d&Qol£oo. dysi'oco. 
Assist, dXQco. 
At, TtQog, (ace.) 
At Athens, 'A&^vyai. 

— home, or/.oi. 

— Megara, Msyaool. 

— Olympia, 'OXv^niaai. 

— what time of the day ? 
nv.vix^t ; 



With partic. of foei/i,, p. 159, Ex. 22. 



ENGLISH-GREEK INDEX. 



215 



Athens, to, 'A&rjvci&. 
Athos, 'Adcog, Ada, 6, p. 

26. 
Awaken, system. 
Axe, ntXsxvg, smg, 6, p. 41. 

B. 

Bad, xaxog, rj, ov. 
Baker, aQTOTzcoXrjg, ov, 6. 
Balance, t,vyog, ov, r). 
Barbarian, $dq$aqog, ov, 6. 
Barber, xovqsvg, scog, 6. 
Barber's shop, xovqewv, ov, 

to. 
Base, aiaxQog, d, ov. 
Basket, xdvsov, (xavovv), to, 

p. 30. 
Bathe, Xovopcu. 
Battle, fxdm, rjg, fj. 
Be, slui, (see under Am). 
Bear, (= bring-forth), ti'xtco, 

p. 187. 

(fero) (pi'oco, p. 188. 

off (mid. of bear), p. 

188. 
Beautiful, xaXog, rj, ov. 

more, xaXXmv, p. 

.56. 
Beauty, xdXXog, sog, to. 
Become, ytyvopai, p. 121. 

■ fixed, ninrfla, p. 83. 

--■ putrid, ofeofiai. 

Bed, xXlvtj, rjg, fj- 
Before, nqiv. 
Beget, tIxtg), p. 187. 
Beguile, xpsvdco. 
Believe, asi&ofiai (dat.) 
Beloved, dyanrjzog, «J, ov. 



Belly, yaaTi'iQ, soog, fj. 
Bend, aTozqa. 
Benefit, bvlvij\n, p. 158. 
Best, ) dya&og, 1), ov, (pos- 
Better, \ itive), p. 56. 
Betrayer, nQo86rijg, ov, 6. 
Bewail, oifico^m, p. 181. 
Bid, xsXsvco. 

Bind, dm, (fut. drjaco), p. 85. 
Bird, oovig, ogvldog, 6 et fj, p. 

180. 
Bite, ddxvco, p. 183. 
Black, peXag, aiva, av. 
Blind, zvcplog, rj, 6v. 

Blow, 7TVE0O, p. 85. 

Blunt, U(A$XvV03. 

Body, oa/xa, (nog, to- 
Boil, sxpco, p. 184. few. 
Sold, &octavg. roX^7]Qog,t],6v. 
deed, roXfirifxa, arog, 

TO. 

Boldness, toX^ci, rjg, r). 
Bond, deapog, ov, 6. 
Bone, batiov (ogtovv), to. 
Bore, TiToda, p. 187. 
Boreas, BoQQug, ov, 6. 
Both — and, xcu — xai: ts. — 

xai. 
Boy, ncug, Tiaidog, 6 et fj, p. 

36. 
Bran, nitvoov, ov, to. 

C qrjyvvfii, p. 187. 
Break, < [dldco, p. 84] 

( 'dyvvyn, p. 182. 
to-pieces, xardyvvfxi. 

down, xutaQQtjyvviu. 



. Bright-light, osXag, aog, to. 
I Bring, xo^oo, P- 71. 



216 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



xara- 
xdco. 



Bring to mind, fiinvijaxofiai, 

p. 185. 

forth, TtWw, p. 187. 

up, 7QEcpoo, p. 66. 

Broad, eiovg, ala, v. 
Build, dsfia, p. 122, x7%a>. 
Burn, xaico, p. 85 et 184 

daiw, p. 83. 
(= consume " 

by burning,) 

down, 

Burnable, aavaifiog, rj, ov. 
Burning, xavaig, ecog, r). 
Burnt up (that which is), 

xui'fia, azog, to. 
Burst asunder, diuQQijyvvfii. 
Bury, duTZTco. 

, £v yfj -AQV7ZT03, p. 23 

(note). 
By, vno, {gen.) 
By no means, qxioza, p. 57. 



| Certain (certus), adcprjg, rjg, 
eg. (See p. 173.) 

one, dm/a, p. 109. 



C. 
Call, y.aleco, p. 184. 
Carve, ylvqxa, p. 66. 
Cast, pdllco, p. 182. 
Catch, aXlaxco, p. 181. 
Cause to hope, elnco, p. 83. 

pass, TzsQaoo, p. 84. 

Cavalry, Innog, ov r), p. 29. 
Cease, navofxai. 
Celebrated in song, aoidipog, 

rj, ov. 
Centre, xivroov, ov, to. 
Ceres, Jrjurjrijo, p. 43. 
Certain, tig, p. 178. 



Chain, deopog, ov, 6, p. 29. 

Change, ps&ioTrjfu. 

fiETafiolrj, rjg, rj. 

Chariot-seat, diyoog, p. 29. 

Chase, 1 frwdm and &wevm, 
p. 181. 

Chastise, xolaXw, p. 70. 

Chastising, ) xolavig, 

Chastisement, \ eag, r). 

Chatterer, ddoXsa^rjg, ov, 6. 

Cherish, duXnco, p. 66. 

Choice, aiQSGig, eoog, r). 

Choke, Tiviyco, p. 181. 

Choose, atot'ofiai, ( = am 
willing) i&eXm. 

Chord, xooot'j, yg, rj. 

Citizen, noXttrjg, ov, 6. 

City, noXig. aazv (to), p. 41. 

Claw, owl*, v%og, 6. 

Clever, oocpog, ?j, ov, p. 55. 

Cleverness, 6oq>ia, ag, r). 

Collect, dyetgco, p. 77. 
I Colonize, xtitw. 

Come, sQxofiui, p. 183. wa- 
rm, p. 1S4. 

am, rjxm. 

(= arrive), ucp-utpso- 

[ioci, p. 184. 

together, avpfiaivm 

in, £l6£t[Xl. 

now (=Lat. age), 

CfSQE. 

Compel, $ia£opai. 



1 The fut. act. of 
Exercises in Part II. 



may be formed. Fut. mid. is to be used in 



ENGLISH-GREEK INDEX. 



217 



Conceal, xovnzco. 
Conceited, av&aSq?. 
Concerning, m§i, {gen.) 
Condemn, yuza/iyvao-y.w. 
Confess, 6[*oXoytco, p. 181. 
Congeal, niiyvvfjii, p. 1S6. 
Constitution, noXizeia, ag, r). 
Contain, /ooofw, p. 181. 
Contest, a//q)i.a^i]tsoa, p. 181. 
Contrary, havzlog, a, ov. 
Corn, aizog, p. 29. 
Corpse, vixvg, vog. vExqog, 

ov, 6. 
Count, <xqi&[j.sg). 
Country, yr), r)g, r) : %(ooa, 

ag, r). 
Croak, nod^a. 
Cry-out (=wail), o'iuat,w, p. 

181 : poda, p. 180. 
Cunning, coyia, ag, fj. 

, adj. aoqtog, fj, ov. 

Cup, dinag, atog, zo. 
Cur), §oGTQviog, p. 29. 
Cut, zt'pvco, p. 187. 

down, xazazz'fiva). 

Cutting, toufj, tjg, fj : tfir}aig, 

soog, f). 
Cyrus, Kvoog, ov, 6. 



Damsel, aoorj, rjg, fj. 
Danger, aivdvvog, ov, 6. 
Dare, zoXpaa. 
Daring (subs.) zolprpig, mg, 

action, zoX^r^a, 

azog, zo. 
Dart, fisXog, sog, zo. 

10 



Daughter, &vyazrjQ, p. 43. 
Dawn, iwg (Ace. sia), p. 26. 
Da}?", ij[*£Qa, ag, fj. 
Dear, qtiXog, rj, ov. 
Death, Vdrazog, ov, 6. 
Deceit, andzij, qg, fj. 
Deceitful, dnazjjXog, ?/', ov. 
Deceive, dnazdw, (= disap- 
point) xpsvdco. 
Deep, fia&vg, see p. 173. 
Defend, dfiwa, with dat. 

myself, yvldacofiai. 



Deserter, yvydg, dSog, 6. 
Desirable, aiQEzog, r], ov. 
Desire (v.), mi&vfiico, (gen.) 

noOsm, p. 181. 

Em&vfjiia, ag, fj. 

Destroy, oXXvpi, p. 185. 
Dextrous, dt$wg, d, ov. 
Die, ■dvfjoy.co, p. 184. 
Different, didqoQog, a, ov. 
Dig, cxdnzw. 

down, y.azaaxd7zzco. 

Digger, o-yanzfjQ, fjoog, 6. 
Digging (act of), axdyrj, rjg,fj. 
Dining-room, uvwyscov, p. 26. 
Dinner, to, inl deTavov. 
Disappoint, ipn>8co. 
Discourse, Xoyog, ov, 6. 
Discover, evoiv/m, p. 183. 
Discovery, Evgijfia, azog, to. 
Disease, voaog, ov, tj. 
Disembark, anopaivm. 
Disgraceful, aia^qog, d, ov. 
Dismiss, uqlijia, dvitjfii, p. 

142. 
Dismissal, arpsaig, sag, rj. 
Dispute, dprfioprjzt'o), p. 181. 



218 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



DO, TTQatSGCO. 

— injustice, adr/Jm (ace.) 

— not know, dyvosw, p. 
180. 

Dog, kvojv, nvvog, 6 et rj, p. 

179. 
Dove, nelsiag, ddog, rj. 
Drag, eXxvco. 

down, xazaandco. 

Dragon, dgdxcov, ovzog, 6. 
Drain, dgvco, p. 85. 
Draw, igvco, anda. 
(a sword), andoaa- 

■dai. 
Drink, nivco, p. 187. 
[sub st.), nwficc, azog, 



clown, 



xazamveo. 



Drinking, nootg, sag, rj. 
Drive, ilavvco. 
Drive-away, dnE7.avva. 
mad, p. 83. 

E. 

Eagle, dezog, ov, 6. 
Ear, ovg, azog, zo. 

of corn, azdyvg, vog, 6. 

Earth, yr\, fljg; ?}. 
Easily, gadiag. 
East-wind, Evgog, ov, b. 
Easy, gddwg, a, ov. 
Eat, 1 @t(lgcQo-A(o, p. 182: sScj. 
p. 182 : zgayco, p. 188. 

up, xaraftifigmaxtt). 

Eaten (that which is-), edsa- 



fia, azog, zo : §ga[ia, azog, 
zo. 
(proper to be-) idscs- 



zog, 7], ov. 
Either — or, % — iq. 
Elect, aigeopat. 
Elephant, iXt ; cp-ag, avzog, 6, 
Eligible, aigszog, rj, or. 
Ell, nHjyrvg, tag, 6. 
Empty, xevog, ij, ov. 
Enacting, &smg, eoag, ^. 
End, dvvoa, p. 85. 
Enemy, ix&gog, ov, 6. 
Enquire, nvvddvofmt, p. 187. 
Enslave, dovloco, xazadov- 

Xoco. 
Enter, eioegxoftai. 
Erect, dvi,6zt]fii, p. 140. 
Err, d[A.agzdvo}, p. 182. 
Error, dfidgzyfia, azog, zo. 
Escape, diacpsvyw. 
a man's notice, lav- 



&dva zivd. 

Esculent, idsazog, ?/, ov. 

Ethiopian, Ai&io\p, onog, 
6. 

Euboea, Evfioia, ag, 1). 

Even if, y.dv. 

though, xav. 

Every, nag, p. 54. 

where, navza%ov. 

Evils (=bad things) na- 
na. 

Exercise, dayJm. 

Exile, cf.vydg, ddog, 6. 



1 iuQiuv is to eat; to take food: rpwysiv is generally applied to eat- 
ing uncooked fruits, &c. PiftpiocKeiv is only used by the Attics in Jar.es., 
rf.,perf. of act. 



ENGLISH-GREEK INDEX. 



219 



Expel (e. g. a tribe from 
their habitations), dv- 

Extinguish, a^Evvvfii, p. 187. 

F. 

False, ipEv8?jg, fa, eg. 
Fall, ninra), p. 187. 

into, (ixnlnroj. 

(snbst.), nico/xa, ctTog, 

TO. 

Family, yivog, sog, to. 
Father, natijg, p. 43. 
Favour, %do-ig, irog, rj. 
Fawn, nQoaavvioj, p. 181. 
Fear, yofitofxai,. 
Few, oli'jog, 1], ov. 
Fig, GVX0V, ov, TO. 

Find, evQiaaco, p. 183. 
Finder, evQsztjg, ov, 6. 
Finish, teIem. 
Fire, ttvq, nvQog, to. 
Fish, Ifpvg, vog, 6. 
Fix, nrfivv\ii, p. 186. 
Flame, (jpXo't, cployog, tj. 
Flatterer, %6la%, axog, 6, p. 

36. 
Flay, ds'Qco, p. 78. 
Fled, aor. 2. of ysvyoo. (See 

Fly.) 
Flesh, aaQ%, nog, ?; : (flesh to 

eat), xoeag, p. 49. 
Flight, (pv yi), tjg, rj. 
Flow, Q?m, p. 187. 
Flower, dv&og, sog, to. 
Fly, (pevyca, p. 181. 

from, ysvyw, (aor. 2.) 

— iyolare\ nko\iai, p. 186. 



Flying, act of, cpvyij, ?}g, %. 
Follow, mo(xai, p. 183. 
Foot, novg, noSog, 6. 
For the most part, ra nolld. 
Force (verb), §idi,o(jiai. 
Force (subs.), fievog, sog, to. 
Foreign, %e'vog, ij, ov. 
Formidable, cpofieqog, «, or. 
Forswear myself, imoMzoo, 

p. 181. 
Forum, dyogd, ag, ?j. 
Foss, axd/jpia, aTog, to. 
Found, Kti£oa. 
Fountain, mjy^, ijg, ?]. 

Four, TEGGUQEg, p. 58. 

Fowl, oqvic, oQvWog, 6 et r, 

p. 180. 
Fox, dlmnr^, sxog, ij. 
Fox-skin, dlamExi], ijg, rj. 
Frighten, <fo§eo3. 
Free from, dnalldTTco, p. 

181. 
Friend, epilog, ov, 6. 
Friendly, qiilog, rj, or. 
From, dno, (gen.) naod, 

(gen.) =out of, ix (gen.) 
■ — — heaven, ovqccvo&ev. 
Fugitive, qvydg, ddog, 6. 

G. 

Garden, atjnog, ov, 6, p. 25. 

Garland, azEqiavog, ov, 6. 

Garment, tpdTiov, ov, to. 

Gather, dQEna. 

General, GTociTijyog, ov, 6. 

Geometer, ysco/xe'zQiig, ov, 6. 

Get, xTao/xai,. 

by-lot, layxdtco, p. 185. 



220 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Giant, yi'yug, avtog, 6. 

Gift, 86(xa, arog, to'. 

Girl, naig, Tzaidog, r h (see p. 

36.) 
Give (will), ddaa. 

a share of, ixsra8[8cofj.i. 

away, amdidmiu'. 

forth a smell, o£w, p. 

185. 

in return, dvridi'dafii. 

Giving, doaig, sag, ?). 

• (of names), -dioig, 

sag, ?]. 
Go, eQxofiui, p. 183: [@adi£w, 

yo3Q£(x), p. 181]. 
— -(jfcwVw), 1 p. 182. 

— away, dnst[ii. 

from, unofiaivco. 

up, ava^aivoa. 

— down, xciTufiuivca. 

— in festive procession, 
xco[j,d£a), p. 181. 

on board, dvafiairco. 

— to ruin, ollvftcu, p. 186. 
God, Osog, ov, 6. 

Goat, ait~, atydg, 1). 
Going up, avafiuvig, sag, r). 
Glide, oha&airw, p. 185. 
Gold, xQvaog ov, 6 (= money, 

XQvaiov, ov, to). 
Good, dya&og, i\, ov. 
Goose, yijv, x'P'og, 6 et r). 
Graceful, yagieig, saoa, sv. 
Gracious, tXemg, co. 
Grave, cspvog, i'j, ov. 



Great, piyag, psydltj, fiiya, 

p. 53. 
Greater, greatest, fisi^cov, jue- 

yiatog, p. 56, 57. 
Greece, 'Elldg, ddog, t). 
Greek, "Ell?]v, r;vog, 6. 
Grief, Ivrnq, -qg, r). 
Grow, §laatdva, p. 182. 
old, ytjpdaxco, -dao(iai, 

p. 180. 

wealthy, } , , 
rich, "["hvtea. 



rich, $ 

Guard myself, qivXdaaofiai, 
p. 181. 

H. 

Hair, #(>/£, rqi^og, r), p. 179. 
Half-naked, tjfiiyvfivog, og, 

ov. 
Hand, jpfy, xe'Qog, V- 
Hang, y.oefidvvvfii, p. 184. 
Happen, dnofiaivco, tvyxdva, 

p. 188. 

yi'yvofxai, p. 182. 



Happy, evdai'fxmv, oov, ov. 
Harbour, hpty, ivog, 6. 
Hard, x^Xsnog, GxhjQog, ( = 

strong) layvfjog. 
Hare, Xaycog, (see p. 26.) 
Harp, y.i&dga, ag, r). 
Hasten, ansv8a?, p. 66 : anov- 

ddfa (intrans.), p. 181. 
Hateful, exOgog, d, ov. 
Have, tjco, p. 184. 
room, x a Q ta> > P- 181. 



1 aqu (=1 will go) is more common than the fut. of epx°l Ml > l ^ e 
moods of elfii, than the moods of the pres. of Hp^n/jat ; and imperf. rjuv 
than rip^ofxri". — PaUw is used of going on foot (gradior). 



ENGLISH-GREEK INDEX. 



221 



Have got = to possess, pei'f. 

of xTaonai. 

wealth, nlovtsco. 

perceived, oida, (perf. 

2. of sidm). 
Head, xecpalq, qg, tj : xdoa, 

ygatog, to, p. 179. 
Heal, ayJofMu. 
Hear, dxova, p. ISO. 
Heat, xuvfttt, atog, to. 
Heavy, @uovg, ela, v. 
Helmet, xoovg, v&og, rj. 
Her, 1 avTtjg. 

Her own, iavt?jg, avtTJg. 
Herself (nom.), avtr\. 
Here (= hither), Ssvqo. 
Hero, rjowg, <aog, p. 179. 
Hide, KQVTFtxo. 

- (sub.), doga, ug, fj. 

High, vx^njXog, r'\, 6v. 
Himself (nom.), avtog. 

■ (of), avtov. 

Hire, pic&oopai. 

His, 1 avtov. 

His own, savtov, avrov. 

Historian, ovyyoacpevg, song, 6. 

Hit (a mark), tvy^dvco, p. 

188: pdXXm. 
Hold, fyco, p. 184. 
my tongue, aiydea, p. 

181. 
Holy, dyiog, a, ov. 
Home, at, o'Uou 

to, oixads. 

from, oixo&ev. 



Honour, tifir/, ?jg, ?}: yioag, 
arog, to. 

tifida, p. 181. 

Hope, iknopai, and loXna. 

, iXnig, idog, ?]. 

Horn, yJoag, p. 49. 

Horse, Innog, ov, 6 et r\. 

Horseman, tnnsvg, tag, 6. 

Hostile, fy&oog, a, ov. 

House, ohog, ov, 6. 

How, nag ; m\ ; in what di- 
rection 1 

-old, nrfXixog, ij, ov. 

(As dependent interrog.) 
onyXr/.og, r\, ov. 

Hunger, neivdco. 

Hunt, frygdm, Vqocvco, p. 181, 

(fat. mid. in Exercises in 

Pt. II.) 

Hurl, dqpirjfii. 

Hurt, fiXdntm. 

Husband (vir), dvrjo, p. 42. 

I. 

I, iyd, p. 175. 

Image = statue, dvdoidg, av- 
tog, 6 : eixdv, ovog, r\. 

Immediately, ddvg. 

Impart, fietadidmfn, (gen. of 
thing imparted.) 

In, iv, (dat.) 

— = into, elg. 

— order that, Iva. 

In the world (after who, 
what, why), note. 



1 But his, her, when unemphatic, are to be translated by the article 
See p. 23, Obs. 2. 



222 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Inclined to laugh (to be). 

yslaaeioi. 
Increase, av^dvoo, p. 182. 
Indeed, piv. 
Injure (= hurt), §Xdnzco : 

(=ivrong) adiy.m, p. 181. 
Injustice: do — to, adWo),p. 

181. 
Inquire, nvvddvouai, p. 187. 
Insolence, vfiqig, scog, r\. 
Institution, deopog, vofiog, 

ov, 6. 
Intelligence, avvscug, stag, r\. 
Interval, 8id<3zi]\ia, azog, to'. 
Into, eig. 

Intoxicate, ue&vco. 
Invent (= find), evgiaxco, p. 

183. 
Invention, svQTjfia, azog, to'. 
Iron, uidijnog, ov, 6. 
Island, vi-joog, ov, i\. 
Islander, njaicoztjg, ov, o. 
It seems, doy.si. 
Itself, (noni.), avzo. 



Javelin, fteXog, sog, to'. 
Jeer, rco&di^co, p. 181. 
Judge, xQtz/jg, ov, 6. 
Jupiter, Zevg, Jiog, 6. 
Just, dixaiog, a, ov. 
Justice, dixy, rjg, rj. 

K. 

Keep accurately, axQifioco. 
Key, xXei'g, xXndog, //, p. 

179. 
Kind, yivog, eog, to'. 



King, fiacnXevg, scog, 6 : ava%, 

axzog, 6, p. 179. 
Kiss, xvp8co, p. 185. 
Knee, yovv, azog, to'. 
Knife, [xd%aioa, ag, ?/. 
Know, 0180L, (perf. 2. of ei'Sco). 

— yip>o6oy.(o, p. 183. 

accurately, dxot§6co. 

Knowing, i'dotg, 'idgig, idqi 

(see p. 173). 
(act of), yvcoaig, 



scog, 1]. 
Knowledge, yvcoaig, ecog, ?/. 
£mozr t iiri, ?jg, tj. 



Labour, norog, ov, 6. 

(y.) xdpvo), pp. 181, 



184. 

Lamb, dntjv, dovog, 6 et ?j. 
Lame, %coX6g, >}, ov. 
Lament, dSvgopai. 
Lamentation, odvguog, ov, 6. 
Land, ytj, yqg, ij : %woa, ag, ?). 
Latona, Aqtco, oog (ovs), ?/. 
Laugh, ysXdco, -aaofxai, p. 

ISO. 
Laughter, yt'Xcog, azog, 6. 
Law, vo^og, ov, 0. 
Lawgiver, vofioOtr^g, ov, 6. 
Laxness, avsaig, ecog, tj. 
Lay waste, [m'Q&co, p. 186, 

— a country, zsfivto, p. 187. 
Laying waste, zftJjaig, ecog, %. 
Lead (subst.), [wXifidog, ov, 6. 



-, ccyco, p, 



182. 



Leap, Tz.'jddoj, p. 1S1. 
Learn, nav&dvm, p. 185. 



ENGLISH-GREEK INDEX. 



223 



Least of all, %xi<jtcc, p. 57. 
Leave, Xsinoa {aor. 2. perf. 

mid.), pp. 147, 149. 

behind, XEinm. 

off, h'fi'o). 

Less, iXdoamv, p. 56, adv. 

rjaaov, p. 57. 
Let (for hire), fiio&oo). 

g°5 5 <W«; _ 

Letter, imotoX/j, tjg, tj. 

Lie (to), xpavdopcu. 

Lie-hid {irr. verb), Xuv&d- 

vco, p. 185. 
Life, @i'og, ov, 6. 
Light, iXaygog, d, ov. 
Lily, xqivov : Nom. plur. 

also xqi'vsgc, D. xoiveai. 
Lion, Ximv, ovzog, 6. 

— skin, Xeovrlq, jjg, rj. 

Little, /jTxQog, adv. vnxqov. 
Live, £dco, fiioco, p. 180. 
Look, §Xma>, p. 180. 
Loose, Xvco. 
Love {subst.), dyan-q, ijg, rj : 

[verb) quXeco. 
Lydians, Avdoi. 
Lyre, ftdQ§irog, ov, 6 et fj. 

M. 
Make, ngdrzix). 

accurate, dxQifioao. 

known, yvaqiQw. 

no noise, Gianda, p. 

181. 

putrid, 6^no3. 

to stand up, dviarrj/ju. 

away, aqiiaTfjfii. 

to cease, navco. 



Make to revolt, dcpivztifu. 
•myself- acquainted 



with, yvo3Qit,(a. 
— pure, xa&aiQco. 

to sit down, xa&i^a, 



p. 184. 

fast, ? TTtjyvvfti, 

hard, \ p. 186. 

Male, aQGlJV, doGljV, UQOEV. 

Man [homo), dvd-qanog, ov. 6. 
(vir), dvr\q, dvdoog, p. 

42. 
Manifest, aaqi^g, q§, eg. 
Many, noXvg, p. 53. 
Mark, oxonog, ov, o. 
Market-place, dyogd, dg, rj. 
Mars, "Agrjg, p. 179. 
Master, Ssanottig, ov, b. 
May, {see p. 104 (4).) 
Meat, ^Qcofia, azog, to. 
Mede, Mrfiog, ov, 6. 
Meet, dnavrda, p. 180. 
Melt, Tqxoa {trans.) ; — opai, 

(intrans.) 
Mention, [iifivfoxoficu, p. 185. 
Mercury, 'Eopijg, ov, 6. 
Mess, xvxecov, <x>vog, 6. 
Messenger, dyyeXog, 6 et %. 
Milk, ydXa, axrog, p. 179. 
Mina. pvd, dg, ?}. 
Mind, voog {vovg), -frvpog, ov, 6. 
Minerva, 'Jd&Tjvd, dg, rj. 
Mingling, xgdaig, sag, q. 
Miserable, idXag, aiva, av. 
Miss, dfxaQtdvm, (with gen.) 
Missile, fieXog, eog, to. 
Mix, xsodo), p. 184 : (iiyvvjil, 

p. 185. 



224 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Mixing, ) 

Mixture, \ y ^ aais > £ro? ' * 
Mock, axw^rro, p. 181. 
Modesty, aldcog, oog (ovg), t\. 
More, fxallov. 
Mortal, -frvyTog, rj, or. 
Mother, j^tijq, p. 42. 
Mount {verb), dva§aivco. 
Mount-Athos, "A&cog, to, 6. 
Mountain, ooog, ov, b. 
Move, xiveto. 
Much, noXvg, p. 53. 
Muse, Movoa, r\, p. 21. 
Must (see Lesson 31), ver- 
bals in 7£og, p. 165. 
My, l/ios, r], oV 
Myself (of), tfxavrov. 

N. 
Naked, yv t uv6g, rj, ov. 
Name, ovopa, azog, to. 
Narrow, arsvog, tf, ov. 
Nature, cpwig, sag, %. 
Near, ay%i. 

Necessary, dvdyy.aiog, a, ov. 
Neptune, Iloc>£idcov, covog, b. 
Never, ovnoze. 
Nightingale, drjdoiv, ovog, r). 
Nile, NuXog, ov, 6. 
No one, ) ovttg, firing : ov 
Nobody, \ 8sig: (*rj8eig. 
Nor, ov8s. 
Not, ov, ovx. 

M- „ 

yet, ovTToo. 

even, olds. 

Nothing. Tide Nobody. 

Nourish, zoe'cpco, p. 66. 



Number, doi&ftog, ov, o. 

O. 
Oak, §Qvg, Sgvog, rj. 
Oath, oQxog, ov, 6. 
Observe accurately, axgT- 

§6 co, p. 144. 
Obtain, xo^ofiai. 
(Edipus, OidiTzovg, nodog and 

nov, p. 179. 
Of-such-an-age, Tij).Uog, r\, 

ov. 
Of man, dv&ocomvog. 
Of-this-kind, rolog, a, ov. 
Of-what-kind, (dep. inter- 

rog.) bnolog, a, ov. 
Of what country, nodanog ; 

bnodanog, rj, ov ; 
Offering, dvd&7]fia, arog, to. 
Often, noXXdxig. 
Old-age, pjoag, arog, to. 
Old-man, y?Qtov, oviog : ttqeg- 

fivzijg, ov, b. 
Old-woman, ygavg, aog, r), 

p. 168. 
On, inl, {gen.) 
On the right hand, de&og, 

d, ov. 
left hand, doiGTsoog, 

d, ov. 
One, sig, p. 58. 

another (of), dXX^Xoov. 

Only, ftovog, rj, ov. 

Open {intrans.), dvoiyofiai, 

(perf. 2.) p. 83. 
Opinion, am of, vo^oa. 

-- yvafirj, rig, rj. 

Opposite, ivavriog, a, ov 



ENGLISH-GREEK INDEX. 



225 



Orator, QtjtcoQ, oqoq, 6. 
Order [verb), tdaoco. 

(sabst.), td^ig, eoag, r). 

Orderly, y.o6\uog, a. ov. 
Ordinance, -Q-eafiog, vofiog, 

ov, 6. 
Other, dllog, heoog (of two). 
Others, the, ol allot : or, 

with stronger opposition, 

ol kegoi (the other party). 
Ought, verbals in tsog, p. 

165. 
. What you ought, 

a del. 
Our, I , , 
Ours, \ WW* «' QV - 
Out of, ex, (gen.) 
Over, wrep, (§-ew. et ace.) 
Owe, oqieilco, owhaxdrco, p. 

186. 
Own, idiog, a, ov. 

P. 

Painful, dlyetvog, r\, ov. 
Paint, yQaqa. 
Palpitate, aGnaloco. 
Panegyrise, iynm^id^oa, p. 

180. 
Path, olfiog, ov, 6 et fj. 
Peacock, tacog, <a, 6 (see p. 

26). 
People, dTjfiog, ov, 6. 
Perceive, ai6&dvofiai, p. 182. 
Persian, n^gaijg, ov, 6. 
Persuade, nei&co. 
Persuasion, ) nei&co,6og 
Persuasiveness, ^ (ovg), fj. 
Philip, (pilmnog, ov, b. 

10* 



Physician, laroog, ov, 6. 
Pine, nitvg, vog, fj. 
Pious, evoefiijg, r]g, eg. 
Pipe, cvq%<o, p. 181. 
Pitcher, %v r Q a i «£> V- 
Pity, (verb), omzsiqco. 
Place, tonog : yozoiov, ov. 
round, nsQiti&tjfit. 



Placer, &e'zqg, p. 136. 
Placing, &e'aig, p. 136. 
Plait, nle'xeo, p. 66. 
Play-on-the-harp, xi&aoiCa. 
Pleasure, fjdov/j, rjg, fj. 
Plow, do6co, p. 85. 
Pluck, doe'rioi, &sq%<o. 
Pnyx, TlvvS, (tj), G. Zlvxvog, 

&c, p. 180. 
Poet, noirjTrjg, ov, 6. 
Polish, £e'a, p. 85. 
Pollute, (uatiHD, p. 78. 
Poor, m(j3%6g, rj, ov. 
Porridge, xvumv, covog, 6. 
Possess, perf. of y.tdo(xai. 
Possessing, xrrjGig, ewg, fj. 
Possession, arrjixa, atog, to'. 

xti'jcrig, eag, fj. 
Possible, dvvdtog, rj, ov. 
-to-be-taught, 8i- 



daxzog, ?], ov. 
Post, rd<~ig, ecog, fj. 
Potter, ivroevg, tag, 6. 
Pour, iem, p. 188. 
Power, dvvajMg, emg, fj. 
Practise, daxe'co, p. 81. 
Praise, inaivem, p. 180. 
Praiser, enaivettjg, ov, 6. 
Present, dofia, to : daoov: to 

be — , ndoEifu. 



226 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Preservation, acoztjoia, ag, tj. 
Preserve one's purity, y,a&- 

aoevco, p. 161. 
Prevent, xcolvoj. 
Priest, isQEvg, mg, 6. 
Prison, dscrficozi^Qiov, ov, to. 
Prisoner, deafx<azi]g, ov, 6. 
Proclaim, xtjovGom. 
Prodigy, zegag, azog, to. 
Produce, xaonog, ov, 6. 
Profit, ovivi^u, p. 186. 
Proof, 7i6tx)c6, 6og (ovg), fj. 
Proper-to-be-eaten, p. 154. 
Prophet, \idvzig, sag, 6. 
Provide myself with, naqa- 

cy.8vd£o[xat. 
Prudent, oaqinav, av, ov. 
Public, dijpootog, a, ov. 
Pulse-broth, limdog, (see p. 

29.) 
Punish, y.ol(/£o3 (fut. mid.) : 

fyjIAiow, p. 181. 
Punished (to be) = suffer 

puniskmeht, bwqv dtdw- 

Pure, xa&a.Qog, d, ov. 

air, al&i'tQ, t'oog, 6 et ?;. 

Purity, na&aQOTijg, tjzog, rj. 
Pursue, didxa : (its fut. p. 

180). 
Put-down, xazazi- ) 

& V> 4 |see p. 

- — - to, nQOotixTijui, I -igq 

round, jisqiri- j » ' 

up, dvazl&?j[u, J 



Put a-stop-to, navoa. 

Gt. 

Q-uail, oqzv$, vyog, I. 
Quarrel, vetxefa. 

R. 

Race, yt'vog, eog, to. 

Rage, xoze'co. 

Rail-at, loidoos'co, (ace.) 

Raise, diiazTjfzi. 

Rank, zdhg, stag, rj. 

Raven, xoga^, axog, 6. 

Raze, xazaaxdnza. 

Razing, xazqoxayij, r t g, q. 

Reap, &£QiXo3. 

(good or evil) from, 

anolavco, p. 180. 
Rebel. See Revolt. 
Receive, la^dva, p. 185 : 

xofti^oftai; zvy%dv(o, p. 188. 
benefit, bviva(iai, p. 



186. 

by lot (=get by 

lot), layydva, p. 185. 

— as one's share, pei- 



Q0f.ica, p. 185. 

from, dnolavo), p. 



180. 

Red, sov&Qog, d, ov. 
Reduce to slavery, dovloco. 1 
Rejoice, xaloa, p. 18S. 
Relating to art, repixog, ?/, ov. 
Relax, dvirjiu. 
Relaxation, uvsoig, sag, rj. 
Remember, fiipvijfiou, p. 185. 



More frequently 



ENGLISH-GREEK INDEX. 



227 



Remind, fiifivfoxa, p. 185. 
Removal, fxerdaraaig, sag, tj. 
Remove, (intrans.) [xsra- 

OTTjVCU. 

, {trans.) fie&iaTijpi. 

Render, anodidmpi. 
Repel, aXS-oficu. 
Reproach, oveiSog, sog, to. 
Resound, ^Qt'fxa. 
Rest (the), 6 dXXog. 
Restrain-by-punishment, 

xoXd^co. 
Resurrection, dvdaraaig, sag, 

n, p. 139. 

Revenge myself, aXel-opai. 
Revel, xco(td£<j3, p. 181. 
Revolt, dnoozaotg, e&g. tj. 
Revolt, make to, p. 140. 
Reward, ye'oag, atog, to. 
Rhetorician, q^toiq, ooog, 6. 
Right, bq&og, 1], ov. 
Rightly, oQ&mg. 
River, noTuyiog, ov, 6. 
Road, 68og, ov, %. 
Roar, Pqs/j,co. 
Root, qi£u, ijg, tj. 
Rose, q68ov, ov, to. 
Rot {trans.), nv&a. 
Rouse up, sysiQw. 
Rout (an army), tqItio). 
Royal, fiuoiXtzog, ?'], ov. 
Run, TQtjoj, p. 187 : ftem. 
Run away, SiSodaxco, p. 183. 

{roxn, dno8i8Qday.(o. 

through, 8iatQ8%03. 



Sacred, teoog, d, ov. 



Sacrifice, &vco, p. 85. 

Safety, amttj^la, ag, r\. 

Sail, TzXtco, p. 85. 

round, nsomXico. 

Same, 6 avTog, p. 177. 

Say, Xiya. (Said, elnov, p. 

183.) They say, (pad. 
j Scientific, rs%nx6$i V> ^ v ' 
J Scientifically, Ts^vixcog. 

Scimetar, amvdxijg, ov, 6. 

ScOff, CX037TZCO, p. 181. 

Scourge, ^aaTiyoco. 

Scythian, IJxv&^g, ov, 6. 
j Sea, ■ddXaaaa, r^g, rj. 
! Seasonable, svy.aiQog, og, ov. 
j Seat, (v.), eta, %wca, p. 184. 

Secretly, aor. part, of Xav- 
-&dvco, p. 185. 

Secure, §i§aiog, a, ov. 

Sedition, oTaaig, sag, rj. 

See, oquoo, oxpouou, fi8ov, p. 
186. 

Seed, ansQfia, aTog, to. 

Seems, it, 8oxeT. 

Seize, dona^a, p. 180. 

Self-satisfied, av&a8qg, iqg, eg. 

Sell, ncoXt'oi, u7Zo86g&cu. 

mTzgdaxco, p. 1S7. 

Send forth, trjfii,^ ) gee 

away, dqilrmi, > iqk 

Up, dvi7]fll, ) 

Separate {intr.), Siccgttjvou. 
Serpent, ocpig, eoog, 6. 
Servant, dsodncav, ovTog, 6. 
Set out, 7ioqevo(iai. 
Sew, qdnza. 

together, av^Qantta. 

Shade, axia, ag, i\. 



229 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Shake, aslm. 
Shame, afo%vv<a. 
Shameless, avatdng, r]g, t'g. 
Sharp, 6%vg, eta, v. 
Sharp, o^vvoj. 
Shepherd, 7zoi[tr}v, s'vog, b. 
Ship, vavg, vaog, r), p. 149: 
Shine, qiaivoftai, p. 188. 
Shoot. ) , r 

off, \ "WW" 

Should, av with the opt 

verbal in reog, p. 165. 
Show, qpa/rw, p. 188. 
Shrub, &ufxvog, ov, b et r). 
Silent, to be, aicondm, p. 181. 
Silver, upyvpog {= money) 

dpyvpiov, ov. 
Sin, afiaoTuvca, p. 182 : dfiag- 

zia, ag, r\. 
Sing, ado), aaofiai, p. 180. 
Sink, dvco, p. 85. 
Sit, i£ioo, i^dva, p. 184. 
Skin, givog, ov, b et r). 
Slacken, dvfyfu. 
Slackening, avemg, ecog, r): 

see Relaxation. 
Slave, dovlog, ov, b. 
Sleep, vnvog, ov, b, (verb) dap- 

fidvco, p. 183. ' 
Slip, a, 67ua&r j f.m, arog, ro : 

to slip, oliad-aivco, p. 185. 
Slippery, blic&rjpog, d, ov. 
Smear, a^cteo, p. 187. 
Smell (= give forth a smell) 

o£ro, p. 185. 



Smell (= perceive a smell,) 
oocpgaivofiai, p. 186. 



Smelling, J.«WP«ft mw 

Smooth, Xsiog, d, ov. 
Snatch, dpndfa, p. 180. 
So, ovToog. 
So as, mate. 
So great, p. 166. 
Soft, fiaXaxog, j/, ov. 
Soldier, ozpaTiojTTjg, ov, 6. 
Some one, rig. Append, p. 

178. 
Son, vtog, viov or vtiog, p. 180. 
Son-of-Atreus, '^rpeidTjg, ov, 

6, p. 21. 
Song, doidij, r}g, r). 
Soothe, fitly a. 
Soul, tpvpj, ijg, tj. 
Sound, r\ia, oog (ovg), tj. 
South-wind, vorog, ov, 6. 

SOW, 071SIQ03. 

Speak, h'yco. 
Spear, dopv, azog, to. 
Speech, loyog, ov, b. 

Spit, 7ZTV03, p. 85. 
Sport, naiL,(o, p. 186. 
Spread (a couch) = strew, 

CZOflSWVfM, p. 187. 

out, nerdvvvfu, p.186. 

Sprout, ) filaardvo, 
Spring up, \ p. 182. 
Squeeze, dli@co. 
Stag, 'iXacpog, ov, b. 
Stain, fiiaivw, p. 78. 



1 Ka0ri<5oj is the regular word for being asleep ; (SapBavui) KaTaSap6avit) 
seems to express deep sleep after fatigue, &c. Vomel. 



ENGLISH-GREEK INDEX. 



229 



Stain with blood, aipurom 
Stand, hta^ai, p. 140, 

by, nagaar^vai, 

up, dvaozlqvai, 



round, nzQiotri- 

vai, 
■ apart, diaazrjvai, 



P- 

139. 



Standing (the act of), ard- 

aig, £00 g, 1J. 

away (the act of), 

dnoordoig, sag, r\, 
up, (the act of), 

avd.cra.aig, ecog, rj. 

■ open, dvkoya. 

away, anoazTqvai. 

Star, dazrjo, e'gog, 6. 

State, jiohg, ecog, rj. 

Statue, dvdQidg, dvzog, 6. 

Statute, -&£(y(i6g, see p. 29. 

Steal, vlmzca, p. 181. 

Steward, ragtag, ov, 6. 

Still, 'in. 

Stir up, iysiQco. 

Stitch together, Gv^Qdnrw. 

Stone, li&og, ov, 6, [Xdag, 

lag, G. Xaog, p. 179.] 
Stop, nave). 
Storm, %ei[A.03v, wvog, 6. 
Straight, 6o&6g, y\, ov. 
Strange, %ivog, rj, ov. 
Strangle, nviyco, p. 181. 
Stream, Qev/xa, arog, to. 
Strength, psvog, sog, zo. 
Stretch out, zavva. 
Strew, 6T0Qsvvv[Ai, p. 187. 
Strife, sqig, idog, r\. 
Strike, nXriaaoo, p. 187 : ivn- 

■zco, p. 188 : nam. 
String, xo$r\, rjg, ^. 



Strong, loyyoog, a, ov. 
Stuff, (ivco, p. 85. 
Subdue, dafxdoo, p. 183. 
Such, zolog, d, ov, p. 186. 

- a man, ) 6 delva, p. 

- a one, \ 109. 
Suffer, ndaxoo, p. 186. 

- (from disease), xap 
w, p. 181. 

punishment, Bmijv di- 

dcofu. 
Suffice, dgxioo. 
Sung of, do(8ifxog, og, ov. 
Support, rgsqia, p. 66. 
Swallow, ysXidoov, ovog, rj, p. 

180. 

(verb), Y.araniva. 



v . -it — 
Swear, oyuvvyn, p. 186. 
Sweet, yXvxvg: r)dvg, ua, v. 
Swim, Ww, p. 85. 

T. 

Take ( = carry), y.o{i%co. 
aloico, p. 182. dXicxco, 

p. 181 s . 
( = receive), Xafifidvco. 

p. 185. 

■ up, dvaXa^dvo), irr. 

Takeable, dXcoatfxog, og, ov. 
Taken, to be, dXioxofiai, p. 

182. 
Talon, '6vv%, v%og, 6. 
Teach, ftSacrxw, p. 1S3. To 

have a person taught, di- 

8d<yno(iai. 
Teacher, diddoxaXog, ov, 6. 
Tear, Q^yvvfit, (trans.) ; Qrjy- 

vvfiai(intrans.)p, 187. 
| Temperate, aoaqigmv, mv, ov. 



230 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Temple, vscog, co, 6 : vaog, 

ov, 6. 
Tender, te'q^v, eiva, sv. 
Terrible, dsivog, q, ov. 
Terrify, ixrrX^zzco, p. 187. 
Thales, QaXijg, sco, p. 179. 
Than, f. 

That, ixsTvog 6 : Ixstvog, 17, 0. 
That (w£), ha [with subj. 

after jores., fut. and ^er/". 

with Lve ; opt. afterpas* 

tenses.] 
Their, avzccv (acfk'zsQog). 
Their own, Savzwv, avzcov. 
Themselves (nom.), uvzoi 
Thence, exeT&ev. 
There, ixel. 

Thing, TiQayna, azog, zo. 
Think, o'/opai, p. 185. vo- 

li% CO. 

Thirst, diipdco. 
This, o8s : ovzog, p. 74. 
Thither, insias. 
Thong, 1 pug, uvzog, 6. 
Thou, ov. 
Threaten, utieiIeco. 
Three, zoEig, p. 58. 
Throw, fidXXco, p. 182. . 
away, uno§dXXa, 

CiCfl1]fAl. 

Thrower-away, a, anofio- 

Xsvg, p. 151. 
Throwing-away, dnofioXr'j, 

p. 151. 
Thrown away, to be, ano- 

filqzog, p. 151. 
Thy, cog, oq, gov. 
Thyself (of), oavzov. 



Tidings, dyyEXici, dg, //. 
Timidly ( = fearing,) cpofiov- 

fiEvog. 
Tin, y.aooizsQog, ov, 6. 
Tired, to be, xdfivm. 
To, Eig. 

To Athens, 'A&i]va&. 
Tongue, yXcoaou, qg, rj. 
Too, kcm: too much, uyav. 
Tooth, boovg, ovzog, b. 
Torch, oug, dadog, %: Xv%- 

vog, ov, see p. 29. 
Towards, noog, (ace.) 
Town, noXig, scog, //: aazv, 

see p. 41. 
Traitor, nooSozyg, ov, 6. 
Treasure, d-rjoavoog, ov, b. 
Tree, dsvdoov. p. 179. 
Tremble, zqe'co, p. 85. 
Trench, oxappa, azog, zo. 
Trick, zEyvt], r/g, r\. 
Trident, zqiaiva, rjg, r/, 
Trireme, tQifeyg, p. 41. 
Trophy, zqonaiov, ov, zo. 
True, dX7]&rjg, r t g, eg. 
Trust, ninoid-a, (perf. 2. of 

TZEl&Co). 

Truth, ah'i&Eia, ag, rj : zb 

uXri&ig. 
Turn, 67'Qscpco : turn-back 

(trans), zqetico. 

out, dno^uiva). 

Twist, czosyco. 

Two, ovo or dvoo, p. 58. 

U. 
Understand, avviv t fxi. 
Unjust, ddr/.og, og, ov. 



ENGLISH-GREEK INDEX. 



231 



Upper-chamber, dvaymv, co, 

to, p. 26. 
Use, xQuoficu. 

deceit, anarda. 

Utter no word, ciydm, p. 181. 



Vain, av&adi'jgjg, sgi {profit- 
less) fidraiog, a, ov. 

Venerable, asfivog, r\, ov. 

Venerate, aidsopai, p. 85. 

Very, fidla. 

Vice, xaxia, ag, rj. 

Victory, vix-q, tjg, fj. 

Vine, d/nTZslog, ov, i\. 

Violet, tov, ov, to. 

Viper, fyidva, tjg, rj. 

Virtue, doETrj, rjg, r). 

Voice, qioavt], ?]g, r). 

Vomit, ifxsoa, p. 85. 

Voracious, nolvqidyog, og, ov. 

Votive offering, dvd&rjfia, 
aTog, to. 

Voyage, nloog {nlovg), p. 30. 

W. 

Wail, oliimt,oj t (fut. mid.), p. 

181. 
Wake, (trajis.)iysiQm,Tp.lS3. 
Walk, pa8%<D, P- 180. 
Wall, Tei%og, eog (ovg), to. 
Ward off, apvvm : alsj-m with 

ace., p. 182. 
Warm, QsQfiog, r], ov. 

(verb), ddlneo. 

Wash, lovco, p. 185. 
Watch, iyqrifOQa (2 perf. of 

iyetQoo), p.. 183. 



Water, vSojq, vdazog, to. 
Wave, xv[xu, aTog, to. 
Way, xt'Xsv&og, p. 29. 
Wealth, nlovTog, ov, 6. 
Wealthy, nXovaiog, a, ov. 
Weasel, yalij, ij.g, v\. 
Weave, nXixco. 
Weep for, xXai'oo, (Att. xXdco). 
Well, it 

West-wind, Qyvoog, ov, 6. 
When? noTE; ) 

Whence? tzo&ev ; } -,?q 
Where? no~v; onov;) iDJ - 
Whip, i^datii, i.yog, ?]. 
Whistle, avgiico, p. 181. 
White, Xsvxog, rj, ov. 
Whither? noT; 169. 
Who, [relat.) og, {interrog.) 

Tig ; 

in the world? TignoTE; 

Whosoever, oang, og dv. 
Why ? tI ; Why in the 

world? TinoTs; 
Wide, svQvg, sTa, v. 
Wife, yvvrj, yvrarsog, r\, p. 179. 
Wild-beast, ■&iqq, &>]Qog, 6. 
Wild-olive, xonvog, ov, 6 eti\. 
Willing, sxcov, ovaa, ov. 
Wine, ohog, ov, 6. 
Wing, nzzQv^, vyog, /;. 
Winter, xsijimv, cavog, 6. 
Wisdom, ooyla, ag, ?]. 
Wise, aoqiog, r], 6v. 
Wither, [Aaoai'vco. 
Witness, ndqrvg, voog, 6 et 

r), p. 179. 
Woman, yvvrj, yvvaixog, rj, 

p. 179. 



232 



FIRST GREEK LESSONS. 



Wonder, a, tegag, arog, to. 

Wonder-at, &av[id£oj. 

Wonderful, &afxaat6g, tf, ov. 

Wood, Ivlov, ov, to (=sil- 
va) vlrj, r t g, ?]. 

Word, Xoyog, ov, 6. 

Work, sgyov, ov, to. 

Workman, tQyuTrjg, ov, 6. 

World, nou[iog, ov, 6. Li- 
the- world, (see who). 

Worthy, a^iog, a, ov. 

Would (conditionally}, av 
with the opt. (See p. 
152. 



Wound, fiXdnTco, nTQmaxoj.* 
Wretched, d&hog, a, ov. 
Write yQacpa. 
Wrong (verb), adine'co. 

Y. 

Yoke, £vy6g, ov, 6. 

Yolk (of an egg), Iki&og, 

p. 29. 
Young man, veavlag, ov, 6. 
Young one, vsoTtog, ov, 6. 
Your, ) , , 
Yours, W™Q°s> «> ° v * 



With tenses formed from root 



&c. 



THE END. 



ARNOLD'S CLASSICAL SERIES. 



Opinions of Classical Professors. 

With regard to Arnold's Classical Works, I am able to speak from experience. I havi 
used portions of his series for several years, and know them to be far superior to any others i 
use in this country. The First and Second Latin Book, which I have just introduced, I fine 
admirably adapted to the wants of beginners in the Latin Tonguo. The Scholars themselve 
manifest a degree of interest and pleasure in the study of the book, which contrasts greatly will 
the disgust too often exhibited by those who are learning the first principles of the language. A 
I desire the advancement of Classical knowledge, I hope these works may have an extensiv 
circulation. 

E. SMITH. 
Principal of the Grammar School, Worcester, Mass. 

We have carefully examined it, and fully concur in the sentiment expressed by the America; 
Editor, that the " book is admirably adapted both in design and execution, to the wants of begin 
ners in the Latin language ; " indeed, we find it will supply the means of carrying out the ver 
plan which the experience of several years has suggested as expedient, and we intend to intro 
duce it at once into our school. 

S. EDWARDS & J. PARTON, 

Principals of the Penn-square School. 
Philadelphia, Feb. 23, 1446. 

Arnold's Series of Elementary Works in Latin and Greek, may be regarded as among thi 
best of the kind that have been published. They are the productions of a man distinguished fo 
learning, intelligence, good sense, and long experience in the business of teaching, and art 
deservedly commended to those who wish to obtain excellent manuals for the use of teacher; 
and pupils. 

D. PRENTICE, 
Professor of Greek and Latin Languages, and Literature 
Geneva College, March 31, 1846. 

You have, indeed, conferred a favor, by placing on my table a copy of Arnold's elementar; 
Latin Book, in an American dress. 

By using the admirable work of Grotefend, aa the basis of his general plan, the author ha 
produced a bonk, whose excellence has long been admitted, whose unrivalled superiority is stil 
felt, by multitudes that have been trained in the literary institutions of Germany as well as Eng 
land. Where this fact is known, further recommendation is needless. Certain I am, that if 
were acquainted with any similar work better calculated to effect its object, I would frankly tei 
you so. Very respectfully, 

H. HAVERSTICK, 
Professor of Ancient Languages 
Central High School, 
Philadelphia, March 2, 1846. 

With thorough instruction on the part of the teacher using these books at text books, I ar 
confident a much more ample return for the time and labor bestowed by our jouth upon Lati 
must be secured. The time certainly has come when an advance must be aade upon the ol 
methods of instruction. I am glad to have a work that promises so many adva itages as Arnold' 
First and Second Latin Book to beginners. 1 have little doubt of the result ol the experiment. 

A. B. RiJSSELL, 
Principal of the High School Oakland, Md. 
April 28, 1846. 

E13-- The above aro only a few of tho opinions entertained by competent Classical Scholar; 
of the high merits and usefulness of Mr. Arnold's Series. They are already use< in tho Universit 
of the City of New York, Rutgprs' Female Institute, N w York, Union Collf ge, Scbenectad; 
Mt, St Mary's College, Md., Yale College, New Haven, and numerous large s ,hools thioug'.oi 



Appletons'' Catalogue of Valuable Publications. 

CLASSICAL &- SCHOOL BOOKS. 
ARNOLD.— A FIRST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK 

And Practical Grammar. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised and carefully 
Corrected, by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, 12mo., neatly bound, 75 cents. 

SfCT" If preferred, the First Latin Book, or the Second Latin Book and Grammar, 
can be had separately. Price 50 cents each. 

The chief object of this work (which is founded on the principles of imitation and frequent 
repetition) is to enable the pupil to do exercises from the first day of his beginning his accidence 

ARNOLD.— LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION : 

A Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition. By Thomas K.Arnold, A.M. 
Revised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, 12mo., neatly 
bound, $1,00. 

This work is also founded on the principles of imitation and frequent repetition. It is at once 
a Syntax, a Vocabulary, and an Exercise Book ; and considerable attention has been paid to the 
subject of Synonymes. 

ARNOLD.— A FIRST AND SECOND GREEK BOOK ; 

With Easy Exercises and Vocabulary. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised and 
Corrected'by J. A. Spencer, A.M. 12mo. 

ARNOLD.— GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION: 

A Practical introduction to Greek Prose Composition. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. 
Revised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, 12mo. 

This work consists of a Greek Syntax, founded on Buttmann's, and Easy Sentences translated 
into Greek, after given Examples, and with given Words. 

ARNOLD.— A GREEK READING BOOK ; 

Including a Complete Treatise on the Greek Particles. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. 
Revised by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, 12mo. 

ARNOLD.— CORNELIUS NEPOS ; 

With Practical Questions and Answers, and an Imitative Exercise on each Chap 
ter. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised, with Additional Notes, by Prof. John 
son, Professor of the Latin Language in the University of the City of New- York 
One neat volume, 12mo. 

"Arnold's Greek and Latin Series. — The publication of this valuable collection of cias 
sical school books may be regarded as the presage of better things in respect to the mode of teach 
ing and acquiring languages. Heretofore boys have been condemned to the drudgery of going 
over Latin and Greek Grammar without the remotest conception of the value of what they were 
learning, and every day becoming more and more disgustpd with the dry and unmeaning task ; 
but now, by Mr. Arnold's admirable method — substantially the same with" that of Ollendorff 1 - the 
moment they take up the study of Latin or Greek, they begin to learn sentences, to acquire ideas, 
to see how the Romans and Greeks expressed themselves, how their mode of expression differed 
from ours, and by degrees they lay up a stock of knowledge which is utterly astonishing to those 
who have dragged on month after month in the old-fashioned, dry, and tedious way of learning 
languages. 

" Mr. Arnold, in fact, has had the good sense to adopt the system of riature. A child learns his 
own language by imitating- what he hears, and constantly repeating it till it is fastened in the 
memory ; in'the same way Mr. A. puts the pupil immediately to work at Exercises in Latin and 
Greek, involving the elementary principles of the language— words are supplied — the mode of 
putting them together is told the pupil — he is shown how the ancients expressed their ideas ; and 
then, by repeating these things again and again — itcrum iterumque— the docile pupil has 'them 
indelibly impressed upon his memory and rooted in his understanding. 

" The American editor is a thorough classical scholar, and has been a practical teacher for 
years in this city He has devoted the utmost care to a complete revision of Mr. Arnold's works, 
has corrected several efors of inadvertence or otherwise, has rearranged and improved various 
matters in the early volumes of the series, and has attended most diligently to the accurate print- 
ing and mechanical execution of the whole. We anticipate most confidently the speedy adoption 
of these works in our schools and colleges." — Cour. i$- Enq. 

§^f Arnold's Series of Classical Works has attained a circulation almost unparalleled in Eng.tnd, 
being introduced into nearly all the great Public Schools and leading Educational Institutions. 
They are also very highly recommended by some of the best American Scholars, for introduction 
into'the Classical Schools of the United States. They are already used in the University of the 
City of New- York, Itutger's Femaie Institute, N. Y. ; Union College, Schenectady; Mt. St. 
Mary's College, Md. ; Yale College, New-Haven ; ana. numerous large schools throughout the 
Union. 

30 



Appletons' Catalogue of Valuable Publications. 

CLASSICAL &, SCHOOL BOOKS— Continuee 
ARNOLD.— LECTURES ON MODERN HISTORY. 

By Thomas Arnold, D.D. With an Introduction and Notes, by Prof. Henrv Reec 
One volume 12mo., $1,25. 

ftCf This volume has already been adopted as a text-book in the University of Pennsylvani 
and Union College, Schenectady. 

ADLER.— A NEW GERMAN READER ; 

With Reference to Ollendorff's German Grammar. By G. J. Adler, Prof, of th 
German Language and Lit. in the University of the City of New- York. (In Press. 

GRAHAM.— ENGLISH SYNONYMES ; 

Classified and Explained, with Practical Exercises. By G. T. Graham, author of 
" Helps to English Grammar," etc. Edited, with illustrative authorities, by Henry 
Reed, Prof, of Eng. Lit. in the University of Pennsylvania. One volume, 12mo. 

" It is impossible not to praise both the design and execution of this work. It fills a chasm in 
our scholastic literature. Previous to this publication, we had but three works of the kind, 
whether for young or old students, (Trussler, Taylor, Crabb,) and not one of them is practical 
enough for elementary purposes." — London Athenamm. 

GESENIUS.— HEBREW GRAMMAR, BY RODIGER. 

Gesenius's Hebrew Grammar. Enlarged and Improved by E. Rodiger, Prof, of 
Oriental Literature in the University of Halle. Translated by Benj. Uavies, Doct. 
in Philosophy of the University of Leipsic ; with a Hebrew Reading Book, prepared 
by the translator, carefully reprinted from the fouteenth edition, (just published in 
London, by Bagster.) Complete in one handsome 8vo. volume. 

"The excellence of Gesenius's Grammar is universally acknowledged. Its adaptation, botl 
in matter and method, to meet the wants of Hebrew students, is triumphantly established by th- 
fact that no fewer than thirteen editions have been sold. The new edition, from which this trans 
lation has been made, was prepared by Prof. Rodiger, and appeared in 1845. Among living Phi 
lologists, there are but few names in higher repute than Rodiger's. His edition of this Gramma 
may therefore be supposed to contain some real improvements, as well as changes and additions 
and this presumption is fully borne out by a comparison with the thirteenth edition, which wa- 
itself improved by the author's last revision. The addition of the Reading Book, as an intro 
duction to the translating of Hebrew, will prove (the compiler hopes) of material service to th* 
student in mastering the Grammar and acquiring the language." — Ext. from Translator's PreJ 

GUIZOT.— GENERAL HISTORY OF CIVILIZATION 

In Europe, from the fall of the Roman Empire to the French Revolution. Trans- 
lated from the French of M. Guizot, Professor of History to la Faculte des Lettres 
of Paris, and Minister of Public Instruction. Third American edition, with Notes 
by C. S. Henry, D. D. One volume, 12mo , $1,00. 

" M. Guizot, in his instructive Lectures, has given us an epitome of modern history, distinguished 
by all the merit which, in another department, renders Blackstone a subject of such pei-uliar and 
unbounded praise — a work closely condensed, including nothing useless, omitting nothing essen- 
tial ; written with grace, and conceived and arranged with consummate ability." — Boston Trail. 

KEIGHTLEY.— THE MYTHOLOGY OF GREECE 

And Italy ; designed for the use of Schools. By Thomas Keightley. Numerous 
wood-cut illustrations. One volume, 18mo., half bound, 44 cents. 

" This is a neat little volume, and well adapted to the purpose for which it was prepared. It 
presents, in a very compendious and convenient form, every thing relating to the subject, of im- 
portance to the young student." — L. I. zitar. 

MICHELET.— HISTORY OF THE ROMAN REPUBLIC. 

By M. Michelet, Professor of History in the College of France, author of " The 
History of France," etc. One vol., 12mo. 

" I have looked over Michelet's Roman History in the original, with the admiration which all 
the works of that great master must inspire. It is iu many respects admirably adapted to the pur- 
poses of instruction in our higher seminaries of learning, &c. " Alonz.i p otter. 

"Union College" 

MANDEVILLE.— NEW ENGLISH READER : 

A Course of Reading for Common Schools and the Lower Classes of Academies, 
on a Scientific plan ; being in part an abridgement of the author's " Elements of 
Reading and Oratory." By H. Mandeville, Prof, of Moral Philosophy and Bellea 
Lettres in Hamilton College, N. Y. One \ r olume, 12mo. 
31 



Appletons' Catalogue of Valuable Publications. 

CLASSICAL 80 SCHOOL B O O K S— Continued. 
t OLLENDORFF.— NEW GERMAN GRAMMAR. 

l A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the German Language. 
^ By H. G. Ollendorff. Reprinted from the Frankfort edition ; to which is added a 

Systematic Outline of the different Parts of Speech, their Inflection and Use, with 
c full Paradigms, and a complete list of the Irregular Verbs. By G. J. Adler, Prof of 

the German Language in the University of the City of New York. 12mo-, #1,50. 
r " Ollendorff's New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the German Language, has 

had an extensive circulation in England, and its demand in this country also has constantly been 
i increasing of late. Nor is its popularity undeserved ; for it supplies a deficiency which has been 
, long and deeply felt by all those who have engaged in either teaching or learning the German. 
r " The German has hitherto been treated too much like a dead language; and hence many, dis- 

* gusted with the cumbrous terminology and crabbed rules which in the very outset met their eye, 
t have given up the acquisition of the language in despair. Ollendorff has completely remedied 

this evil. Beginning with the simplest phrases, he gradually introduces every principle of Gram- 
a mar; and he does it by interblending the rules with such copious exercises and idiomatic expres- 
s sions, that, by a few months' diligent application, and under the guidance of a skilful instructor, 

any one may'acquire every thing that is essential to enable him to read, to write, and to converse 
J in the language." QCj* A Key to the above, in a separate volume, uniform ; price 75 cents. 

I OLLENDORFF.— NEW FRENCH GRAMMAR. 

A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the French Language. By 
i H. G. Ollendorff. With an Appendix, containing the Cardinal and Ordinal Num- 
I. bers, and full Paradigms of the Regular and Irregular, Auxiliary, Reflective, and 
] Impersonal Verbs, by J. L. Jewett. One volume, 12mo., $1,50. 

"The plan pursued in teaching the French is snbstantially the same with that developed in the 
i German Method. Avoiding the exclusively didactic character of the older treatises on the one 

hand, and the tedious prolixity of detail which encumbers modern systems on the other, Ollendorff 
j combines and thoroughly teaches at once both the theory and practice of the language. The 
r student who pursues his method will therefore be relieved from the apprehension of either for- 
, getting his rules before practice has grounded him in their principles, or of learning sentences by 

* rote which he cannot analyze. Speaking and writing French, which in other systems is delayed 
until the learner is presumed to be master of Etymology and Syntax, and consequently is seldom 

J acquired, by this method is commenced with the first lesson, continued throughout, and made the 

\ efficient means of acquiring, almost imperceptibly, a thorough knowledge of grammar; and this 

t without diverting the learner's attention for a moment from the language itself, with which he is 

g naturally most desirous of becoming familiar. 

( The text of Ollendorff, carefully revised and corrected, is given in the present edition without 
abridgment To this the American editor has added an Appendix, containing the cardinal and 
Ordinal Numbers, and full conjugation of all the Verbs. The work is thus rendered complete, and 

? the necessity of consulting other treatises is wholly obviated." 

1 §Cf A Key to the above, in a separate volume, uniform ; 75 cents. 

I OLLENDORFF.— NEW ITALIAN GRAMMAR. 

i A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Italian Language. By 

t H. G. Ollendorff. With Additions and Corrections, by Felix Foresti, Prof, of the 

f Italian Language in the University of the City of N. Y. One vol., 12mo. (In Press.) 

\ M. Ollendorff's System, applied to the study of the Italian Language, possesses all the ad van 

1 tages of his method of learning the German and French, and will undoubtedly, as its merits be 

come known, take the place of all other Grammars. 

c {KF" A Key to the above, in a separate volume, uniform. 

[ REID.— A DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE ; 

I Containing the Pronunciation, Etymology, and Explanation of all Words authorized 

' by eminent writers ; to which are added a Vocabulary of the Roots of English 

1 Words, and an accented list of Greek, Latin, and Scripture Proper Names. By 

, Alexander Reid, AM, Rector of the Circus School, Edinburgh. With a Critical, 

f Preface by Henry Reed, Prof, of Eng. Lit. in the Univ. of Pa. 12mo., near 600 p., $1. 

I The attention of Professors, Students, Tutors, and Heads of Families is solicited to this volume, 
i Notwithstanding its compact size and distinctness of type, it comprises forty thousand words. 
< In addition to the correct orthoepy, this manual of words contains four valuable improvements: — 

I. The primitive word is given, and then follow the immediate derivatives in alphabetical or- 
I der, with the part of speech appended. 

II. After the primitive word is inserted the original term whence it is formed, with the name 
i of the language from which it is derived. 

III. There is subjoined a Vocabulary of '.he Roots of English words, by which the accurate 
' purport of them is instantly discoverable. 

I IV. An accented List, to the number of fifteen thousand, of Greek, Latin, and Scripture Pro- 
per Names, is added. 

32 



Appletons' Catalogue of Valuable Publications. 

CLASSICAL &, SCHOOL BOOKS— Continued. 
SURRENNE.— THE STANDARD PRONOUNCING DIC 

TIONARY OF THE FRENCH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES, in two parts. 
Part one, French and English ; part two, English and French; the first part com- 
prehending words in common use — terms connected with Science — terms belonging 
to the Fine Arts — 4000 Historical names — 4000 Geographical names — 11,000 terms 
lately published, with the pronunciation of every word according to the French 
Academy, and the most eminent Lexicographers and Grammarians ; together with 
750 Critical 'Remarks, in which the various methods of pronouncing employed by 
different authors are investigated and compared with each other. The second part, 
containing a copious Vocabulary of English words and expressions, with the pro- 
nunciations according to Walker. The whole preceded by a practical and compre- 
hensive system of French pronunciation. By Gabriel Surrenne, F.A-S.E., French 
Teacher in Edinburgh, Corresponding Member of the French Grammatical Society 
of Paris. One volume, 12mo., nearly 900 pages, neatly bound — $1,50. 

"This work must have been one of very great labor, as it is evidently of deep research. We 
have given it a careful examination, and are perfectly safe in saying, we have never before seen 
any thing of the kind at all to compare with it. Our space will not permit us give more than 
this general testimony to its value. Long as the title is, and much as it promises, our examination 
of the work proves that all the promises are fulfilled, and we think that no student of the French 
language should, for a moment, hesitate to possess himself of it. Nor, indeed, will it be found less 
useful to the accomplished French scholar, who will find in it a fund of information which can 
no where be met with in any one book. Such a work has for a long time been greatly needed, 
and Mr. Surrenne hus supplied the deficiency in a masterly style. We repeat, therefore, our well- 
digested opinion, that no one in search of "a knowledge of the niceties of the French language, 
Bhould be without it." — National Magazine for May, 1846. 

TAYLOR— A MANUAL OF ANCIENT AND MODERN 

HISTORY; comprising, I. Ancient History, containing the Political History, 
Geographical Position, and Social State of the Principal Nations of Antiquity, care- 
fully digested from the Ancient Writers, and illustrated by the discoveries of Modern 
Scholars and Travellers. 

II. Modern History, containing the Rise and Progress of the principal Euro- 
pean Nations, their Political History, and the Changes in their Social Condition ; 
with a History 01 the Colonies founded by Europeans. By W. Cooke Taylor, 
LL. D., ol Trinity College, Dublin. Revised, with additions on American History, 
by C. S. Henry, D.D., Professor of History in the University of N. Y. One hand- 
some vol., 8vo., of 800 pages, §."2,25. {jrj- For convenience as a class-book, the 
Ancient or Modern portion can be had in separate volumes. 

This Manual of History is last superseding all other compends, and is already adopted as a 
text-book in Harvard, Columbia, Yale, New-York, Pennsylvania, and Brown Universities, and 
several leading Academies. 

WARNER.— RUDIMENTAL LESSONS IN MUSIC. 

Containing the Primary Instruction requisite for all Beginners in the Art, whether 
Vocal or Instrumental. By James F. Warner, translator of " Weber's Theory of 
Musical Composition," " Kiibler's Anleitung zum Gesang-Unterrichte," [Boston 
Academy's Manual,] &c, &c One vol., 18mo., cloth, 50 cents. 

" We do not know how we can do a more substantial service to teachers and scholars in music, 
vocal or instrumental, than by urging them to adopt this volume as a class book. It is full and 
complete on every topic connected with the subject, clear in its arrangement, and concise in ex- 
pression. The illustrations are numerous and ingenious, and must prove very valuable aids to the 
learner, in comprehending the subject, as well as to the teacher in imparting instruction."— Tribune 

WARNER.— FIRST STEPS IN SINGING. 

The Primary Note Reader, or First Steps in Singing at Sight. By James F. War 
ner. 12mo., 25 cents. 

This volume of musical exercises is designed as a supplement to the author's " Rudimental 
Lessons in Music." The two works, taken together, are intended to furnish the beginner in vocal 
music, with a complete set of books adapted to his purpose. 

WRIGHT.— PRIMARY LESSONS : 

In which a Single Letter is first Taught, with its power ; then another Letter i3 
Taught in the same manner, and the two combined into a Word — an application of 
the letters being made in words as fast as they are learned. The words thus learned 
are arranged into easy sentences, so that the .'earner is immediately initiated into 
Reading Lessons. By Albert D. Wright, author of " Analytical Orthography," 
°honological Chart, &c 

33 



A NEW SCHOOL AND REFERENCE DICTIONARY, 

Published by D. Appleton df Company. 
A DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE? 

CONTAINING TUE 

PRONUNCIATION, ETYMOLOGY, AND EXPLANATION 

Of all words authorized by eminent writers ; 

TO WIIICH ARE ADDED, 

A VOCABULARY OF THE ROOTS OF ENGLISH WORDS, 
AND AN ACCENTED LIST OF GREEK, LATIN, AND SCRIPTURE PROPER NAMES 

BY ALEXANDER REID, A. M., 

Rector of the Circus School, Edinburgh. 

WITH A CRITICAL PREFACE, 

BY HENRY REED, 

Professor of English Literature in the University of Pennsylvania. 

One Volume 12mo. of near 600 pages, neatly bound in leather. Price $> 1 

Among the wants of our time was a good Dictionary of our own language, espe 
cially adapted for academies and schools. The books which have long been in use 
were of little value to the junior students, being too concise in the definitions, and 
immethodical in the arrangement. Reid's English Dictionary was compiled expressly 
to develop the precise analogies and various properties of the authorized words in 
general use, by the standard authors and orators who use our vernacular tongue 

Exclusive of the large numbers of proper names which are appended, this Diction- 
ary includes four especial improvements — and when their essential value to the 
student is considered, the sterling character of the work as a hand-book of our lan- 
guage instantly will be perceived. 

The primitive word is distinguished by a larger type ; and where there are any de- 
rivatives from it, they follow in alphabetical order, and the part of speech is append 
ed, thus furnishing a complete classification of all the connected analogous words ol 
the same species. 

With this facility to comprehend accurately the determinate meaning of the English 
word, is conjoined a rich illustration for the linguist. The derivation of all the prim 
itive words is distinctly given, and the phrases of the languages whence they are de 
duced, whether composite or simple ; so that the student of foreign languages, both 
ancient and modern, by a reference to any word, can ascertain the source whence it 
has been adopted into our own form of speech. This is a great acquisition to the 
person who is anxious to use words in their utmost clearness of meaning. 

To these advantages is subjoined a Vocabulary of the Boots of English Words, 
which is of peculiar value to the collegian. The fifty pages which it includes, fur- 
nish the linguist with a wide-spread field of research, equally amusing and instruct- 
ive. There is also added en Accented List, to the number of fifteen thousand of 
Greek, Latin, and Scripture Proper Names. 

With such novel attractions, and with such decisive merits, the recommendations 
which are prefixed to the work by Professors Frost, Henry. Parks, and Reed, Messrs. 
Baker and Greene, principals of the two chief grammar schools at Boston, and by Dr. 
Reese, Superintendent of Common Schools for the city and county of New York, are 
justly due to the labors of the author. They fully corroborate the opinion expressed 
by several other competent authorities, that "Reid's English Dictionary is peculiarly 
adapted for the use of scnools and families, and is far superior *o any other existlns; 
limilar compilation." 



D. Appleton 6; Co. Publish 
THE STANDARD PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY 

OF THE 

FRENCH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES, 

IJY TWO PARTS. 
PART I., FRENCH AND ENGLISH.— PART II., ENGLISH AND FRENCH. 
The First Part comprehending words in common use. Terms connected with Science. Terms 
belonging to the Fine Arts. 4000 Historical Names. 4000 Geographical Names. 1100 terms 
lately published, with the 

PRONUNCIATION OF EVERY WORD 

According to the French Academy and the most eminent Lexicographers and Grammarians, 

TOGETHER WITH 750 CRITICAL REMARKS, 

In which the various methods of pronouncing employed by different authors are investigated and 

compared with each other. 

The Second Part, containing a copious vocabulary of English words and expressions, with the 

pronunciation according to Walker. 

THE WHOLE PRECEDED BY 

A PRACTICAL AND COMPREHENSIVE SYSTEM OF FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 

BY GABRIEL SUREJYME, F. A. S. E 
French Teacher in Edinburgh ; Corresponding Member of the French Grammatical Society 61 
Paris ; Lecturer on Military History in the Scottish Naval and Military Academy ; and authoi 
of several works on Education. 
Reprinted from a duplicate cast of the stereotype plates of the last Edinburgh edition. One 
stout volume, 12mo., of nearly 900 pages. Price $1 50. 

This new Pronouncing French Dictionary will be found to be the most complete that has ye' 
appeared. It is admirably adapted for the purposes of education, as well as reference for th< 
French scholar. Although convenient sized, and sold at a low price, it contains every word ii 
use in the language. 

The Preface ofthe Author (here inserted) explains more fully the nature of the compilation 

AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 
" No French Pronouncing Dictionary having as yet appeared in the English field of French 
Education, the public are now presented with one, the nature and compass of which will give ar 
idea of the numerous and laborious investigations made by the Author, to render the presen 1 
work useful and acceptable. 

"It is now upwards of six years since this work was undertaken, and the resolution of bring 
ing it to light, arose from a diversity of opinion in Pronunciation, which he discovered long ugi 
in the various Dictionaries and Grammars made use of by him in preparing his former course o 
Lectures on French and English Comparative Philology. 

" In the course of his labors, had the Author found but little difference among French writer? 
probably no criticism would have appeared in the present woik ; but as he went along, his atten 
tion was arrested by so many opposite views in the mode of sounding letters and words, tha 
nothing short of a i'ull investigation could satisfy him. The result of his investigations is em 
bodied in the Dictionary, and hen^ie ihe origin ofthe critical remarks with which it abounds : tli 
nature and extent of which, of themselves, would form a volume conveying much solid instruc 
tion, as well as offering a sad picture of the uncertainties of French Pronunciation, of whic 
nine tenths perhaps ofthe Author's countrymen are not aware. Even upon the mere sounds o 
oi, there are many conflicting opinions, and the vacillating pen of Laudais, the last writer upoi 
Parisian pronunciation, by whom oi is represented sometimes by oa, and sometimes by x, has in 
creased the perplexity in no small degree. 

"The method employed by the Author for representing the sounds of words, is intended t< 
meet the English eye ; and he has been careful to make use of none but. genuine French letters 
that the reader may not be deceived, nor induced to follow a vicious system of articulation. 

" As to the pronunciation of Foreign Historical and Geographical names, it is laid down i 
the same manner, as if a Frenchman at Paris were reading aloud ; in this case nothing would b 
left to him but to Frenchify every proper name, with the exception of a few living Authors. 

"In ending this part of ihe Preface, it is of impoitance to observe that no syllable in this wor 
is invested with the syllabical accent, because, as yet, excepting two or three Grammarians alon 
with the Author, no wiiter in France, nor even the Academy itself, has thought proper to enforc 
this part of delivery, how unfortunately neglected. 

" The Phraseology, forming the second essential part of this Dictionary, is based on that ( 
the Academy, the sole and legitimate au'hority in France; and every effort of the Author In 
been so directed, as to render it both copious and practical. With this view, an improved methc 
of elucidating now meanings, by employing parentheses, has been introduced, and it is hoped th; 
the utility and benefits resulting from this improvement will not tail to be duly appreciated. 

" Another novelty to whi' h the Author may lay claim, is the placing of Historical and Ge( 
graphical names below each page : and, by this arrangement, the facility of being acquainte 
with their definition and pronunciation at a single glance, will be found of no small advantagi 
As to the English or second part of this Dictionary, the reader will find it to consist of a copiot 
yocabulary of terms, with their pronunciation, according to the system of Walker. The varioi 
peanings ofthe words are translated into French ; and when the expressions happen to be su 1 
^iantives, the French gender is pointed out by means of proper signs. 

j " Lastly, that competent judges may be aware of thea uthonties on which the pronunciatit 
find critical remarks pervading this Dictionary are founded, the titles and dates of the wor! 
which have boon consulted, with brief reflections on their professed object, will bo found in tl 
Introduction following the Preface. 



COMPLETE TEXT-BOOK OF HISTORY. 

D. APPLETON & CO. HAVE JUST PUBLISHED, 

A MANUAL 

OF 

ANCIENT AND MODERN HISTORY. 

COMPRISING 
I. 

®mimt fltf # tovg ; 

Containing tbe Political History, Geographical Position, and Social State of the Principal Na- 
tions of Antiquity, carefully revised from the ancient writers, and illustrated 
by the discoveries of Modern Scholars and Travellers. 

II. 

Containing the Rise and Progress of the Principal European Nations, their Political History, and 

the changes in their Social Condition, with a History, of 

the Colonies founded by Europeans. 

BY W. COOKE TAYLOR, LL. D., 

Of Trinity College, Dublin. 

Revised, with an Additional Chapter on the United States, 

BY C. S. HENRY, D. D., 

Professor of History in the University of Now-York 
One handsome volume 8vo. of upwards of 700 pages. $2 25 

•**For the convenience of Students as a text book, the Ancient or Modern portions can bn 
bad separately bound. 

The Ancient History division comprises Eighteen Chapters, which include the general out- 
ines of the History of Egypt — the Ethiopians — Babylonia and Assyria — Western Asia — Palestine 
—the Empire of the Medes and Persians — Phenician Colonies in Northern Africa — Foundation 
ind History of the Grecian States — Greece — the Macedonian Kingdom and Empire— the Statei 
ha.*. i.'a« from the Dismemberment of the Macedonian Empire — Ancient Italy — Sicily — the Ro- 
nan Republic — Geographical and Political Condition of the Roman Empire — History of the Ro- 
oan Empire — and India — with an Appendix of important illustrative articles. 

This portion is one of the best Compends of Ancient History that ever yet h&E appeared II 
ontains a complete text for the collegiate lecturer ; and is an essential hand-book for the stu lent 
rho is dosirous to become acquainted with all that is memorable in general secular archeology. 

The Modern History portion is divided into Fourteen Chapters, on the following general 
objects: — Consequences of the Fall of the Western Empire— Riso and Establishment of the 
laracenic Power — Restoration of the Western Empire — Growth of the Papal Power — Revival oi 
literature — Progress of Civilization and Invention — Reformation, and Commencement of tha 
to fas System in Europe — Augustan Ages of England and France — Mercantile and Colonial Sys^ 
Mil — Age of Revolutions — French Empire — History of the Peace — Colonization — China — th§ 
}wb -with Chronological and Historical Tables and other Indexes. Dr. Henry has appended ^ 
BW onapter on the History of tho United States. 

This Manual of Modern History, by Mr. Taylor, is «,he most valuable and instructive wor^ 
incoming tho general subjects which it comprehends, that can bo found in tho wnolo department 
f Watorieal literature. 



A LIST OF 



7UJ 



TEXT BOOKS, 



SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 



PUBLISHED BY 

D. APPLETON & COMPANY, NEW-YORK. 

AND 

GEORGE S. APPLETON, PHILADELPHIA. 
1846. 






ARNOLD'S CLASSICAL SERIES. 



Opinions of Classical Professors. 

With regard to Arnold's Classical Works, I am able to speak from experience. I have 
used portions of his series for several years, and know them to be far superior to any others in 
use in this country. The First and Second Latin Book, which I have just introduced, I find 
admirably adapted to the wants of beginners in the Latin Tongue. The Scholars themselves 
manifest a degree of interest and pleasure in the study of the book, which contrasts greatly with 
the disgust too often exhibited by those who are learning the first principles of the language. As 
I desire the advancement of Classical knowledge, I hope these works may have an extensive 
circulation. 

E. SMITH. 

Principal of the Grammar School, Worcester, Mass. 

We have carefully examined it, and fully concur in the sentiment expressed by the American 
Editor, that the " book is admirably adapted both in design and execution, to the wants of begin- 
ners in the Latin language ; " indeed, we find it will supply the means of carrying out the very 
plan which the experience of several years has suggested as expedient, and we intend to intro- 
duce it at once into our school. 

S. EDWARDS & J. PARTON, 

Principals of the Penn-square School. 
Philadelphia, Feb. 23, 1446. 

Arnold's Series of Elementary Works in Latin and Greek, may be regarded as among the 
Uest of the kind that have been published. They are the productions of a man distinguished for 
learning, intelligence, good sense, and long experience in Iho business of teaching and are 
deservedly commended to those who wish to obtain excellent manuals for the use of teachers 
and pupils. 

D. PRENTICE, 

Professor of Greek and Latin Languages, and Literature. 
Geneva College, March 31, 1846. 

You have, indeed, conferred a favor, by placing on my table a copy of Arnold's elementary 
Latin Book, in an American dress. 

By using the admirable work of Grotefend, as the basis of his general plan, the author has 
produced a bo k, whose excellence has long been admitted, whose unrivalled superiority is still 
felt, by multitudes that have been trained in the literary institutions of Germany as well as Eng- 
land. Where this fact is known further recommendation is needless. Certain I am, that if I 
were acquainted with any similar work better calculated to effect its object, I would frankly tell 
you so. Very respectfully, 

H HAVERSTICK, 

Professor of Ancient Languages 
Central High School, 
Philadelphia, March 2, 1846. 

With thorough instruction on the part of the teacher using these books a; text books, I am 
confident a much more ample return for the time and labor bestowed by our outh upon Latin 
must be secured. The t'me certainly has come when an advance must be icde upon the old 
methods of instruction I am glad to have a work that promises so many adva tages as Arnold's 
First and Second Latin Book to beginners. 1 have little doubt of the rcsultof he experiment. 

A B. Ki S3ELL, 

Principal of the High Schoo! Oakland, Md. 
April 28, 1846. 

BCg— The above are only a fpw of the opinions entertained by competent C a?.sical Scholars, 
Of the high merits and usefulness of Mr. Arnold's S. ri -s. They are already usee in tin Universitjj 
of the City of New York, Rutg-rs' Female Institute, N w York, Union Co!h »■, Schen> ctady, 
Bit, St Mary's College, Md., Yale College, New Haven, and numerous large s ,hools thiougl.out 
the Union. 



D. Appleton fy Co.'s Educational Publications. 

T. K. ARNOLD'S 

GREEK AND LATIN BOOKS, 

FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 

REVISED AND CAREFULLY CORRECTED BY THE REV. J. A. SPENCER, A. M. 
*** This Series of Classical Works has attained a circulation almost unparalleled, being intreducta 
into nearly all the greed Public Schools ana leading Educational Institutions in Englanu. They are 
eiso very highly recommended by some of the best American Scholars, for introduction mto the Clas- 
sical Schools of the United States. 

NOW READY. 
I. A FIRST AND SECOND 

LATIN BOOK AND PRACTICAL GRAMMAR, 

One neat volume, 12mo. Price 75 cts. 

The chief object of this work (which is founded on the principles of imitation and frequent 
repetition), is to enable the pupil to do exercises from the first day of his beginning his acoi- 
dence. 

The First Book can be had separately for Junior Classes in Schools. Price 50 cts. 

II. A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO LATIN PROSE 
COMPOSITION. 

ONE VOLUME, 12MO. $1,00 
This work is also founded on the principles of imitation and frequent repetition. It is at 
once a Syntax, a Vocabulary, and an Exercise Book ; and considerable attention has been paid 
to the subject of Synonyms. 

IN PREPARATION. 

I. A FIRST AND SECOND GREEK BOOK, with Easy Exer- 
cises and Vocabulary. One volume, 12mo. 

II. A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO GREEK PROSE 
COMPOSITION. One volume, 12mo. 

This work consists of a Greek Syntax, founded on Buttmann's, and Easy Sentences transla- 
ted into Greek, after given Examples, and with given Words. - 

III. CORNELIUS NEPOS, with Critical Questions and Answers, 
and an Imitative Exercise on each Chapter. 

IV. ECLOGUE OVIDIANvE, with English Notes, &c. 

This work is from the fifth part of the Lateinsches Elementarbuch of Profs. Jacobs and Do 
ling, which has an immense circulation on the Continent. 

V. HISTORLE ANTIQUE EPITOME, from Cornelius Nepos 
Justin, &c, with English Notes, Rules for Constructing, Ques- 
tions, Geographical Lists, &c. 

This is a most valuable collection of Classical School Books ; and its publication may be re- 
garded as the presage of better things in respect to the mode of teaching and acquiring Lan- 
guages. Heretofore boys have been condemned to the diudgery of going over Latin and Greefr 
Grammar without the remotest conception of the value of what they were learning, and ever) 
day becoming more and more disgusted with the dry and unmeaning task ; but now. by Mr. Ar 
nold's admirable method — substantially the same with that of Ollendorff — the moment they 
take up the study of Latin or Greek, they begin to learn sentences, to acquire ideas, to se^ 
how the Romans and Greeks expressed themselves, how their mode of expression differed from 
oars, and by degrees they lay up a stock of knowledge which is utterly astonishing to those who 
have dragged on month after month in the old-fashioned, dry, studious way of learning Lan- 
guages. 

Mr. Arnold, in fact, has had the good sense to adopt the system of Nature. A child learns 
his own language by imitating what he hears, and constantly repeating it till it is fastened in the 
memory. In the same way Mr. A. puts the pupil immediately to work at Exercises in Latin and 
Greek involving the elementary principles of the language — words are supplied — the mode of 
putting th6m together is told the pupil — he is shown how the Ancients expressed their ideas; 
and then by repeating these things again and again — iterum iterumque — the docile puDil has them 
indelibly impressed upon his memory and rooted in his understanding. 

The American edition comes out under the most favorable auspices. The Editor is a. tho- 
rough Classical Scholar and has been a practical teacher for years in this city : he has devoted 
the utmost care to a complete revision of Mr. Arnold's Woiks, has corrected several errors of 
inalvcrtence or otherwise, has rearranged and improved various matters in the early volumes 
of the series, and has attended most diligently to the accurate printing and mechanical execution 
of the whole. We anticipate most confidently the speedy adoption of these works in our School, 
and Colleges. 



A NEW SCHOOL AND REFERENCE DICTIONARY, 

Published by D. Appleton <%■ Company. 



A DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE? 

CONTAINING THE 

PRONUNCIATION, ETYMOLOGY, AND EXPLANATION 

Of all words authorized by eminent writers ; 

TO WHICH ARE ADDED, 

A VOCABULARY OF THE ROOTS OF ENGLISH WORDS, 
AND AN ACCENTED LIST OF GREEK, LATIN, AND SCRIPTURE PROPER NAMES 

BY ALEXANDER REID, A. M., 

Rector of the Circus School, Edinburgh. 

WITH A CRITICAL PREFACE, 

BY HENRY REED, 

Professor of English Literature in the University of Pennsylvania. 

One Volume l2mo. of near 600 pages, neatly bound in leather. Price $1 

Among the wants of our time was a good Dictionary of our own language, espe 
daily adapted for academies and schools. The books which have long been in use 
were of little value to the junior students, being too concise in the definitions, and 
immethodical in the arrangement. Reid's English Dictionary was compiled expressly 
to develop the precise analogies and various properties of the authorized words in 
general use, by the standard authors and orators who use our vernacular tongue 

Exclusive of the large numbers of proper names which are appended, this Diction- 
ary includes four especial improvements — and when their essential value to the 
student is considered, the sterling character of the work as a hand-book of our lan- 
guage instantly will be perceived. 

The primitive word is distinguished by a larger type ; and where there are any de- 
rivatives from it, they follow in alphabetical order, and the part of speech is append 
ed, thus furnishing a complete classification of all the connected analogous words oi 
the same species. 

With this facility to comprehend accurately the determinate meaning of the English 
word, is conjoined a rich illustration for the linguist. The derivation of all the prim 
itive words is distinctly given, and the phrases of the languages whence they are de 
duced, whether composite or simple ; so that the student of foreign languages, both 
ancient and modern, by a reference to any word, can ascertain the source whence it 
has been adopted into our own form of speech. This is a great acquisition to the 
person who is anxious to use words in their utmost clearness of meaning. 

To these advantages is subjoined a Vocabulary of the Boots of English Words, 
which is of peculiar value to the collegian. The fifty pages which it includes, fur- 
nish the linguist with a wide-spread field of research, equally amusing and instruct- 
ive. There is also added an Accented List, to the number of fifteen thousand of 
Greek, Latin, and Scripture Proper Names. 

With such novel attractions, and with such decisive merits, the recommendations 
w hich are prefixed to the work by Professors Frost, Henry, Parks, and Reed, Messrs- 
Baker and Greene, principals of the two chief grammar schools at Boston, and by Dr, 
Reese, Superintendent of Common Schools for the city and county of New York, are 
justly due to the labors of the author. They fully corroborate the opinion expressed 
by several other competent authorities, that "Reid's English Dictionary is peculiarly 
adapted for the use of scnools and families, and is far superior to any other existing 
"imiiar compilation." 



D. Appleton ty Co. Publish 
THE STANDARD PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY 

FRENCH AND E NgTi S H LANGUAGES, 

IJY TWO PARTS. 
PART [., FRENCH AND ENGLISH.— PART II., ENGLISH AND FRENCH. 
The First Part comprehending words in common use. Terms connected with Science. Terms 
belonging to the Fine Arts. 4000 Historical Names. 4000 Geographical Names. 1 1 00 terms 
lately published, with the 

PRONUNCIATION OF EVERY WORD 

According to the French Academy and the most eminent Lexicographers and Grammarians, 

TOGETHER WITH 750 CRITICAL REMARKS, 

In which the various methods of pronouncing employed by different authors are investigated and 

compared with each other. 

The Second Part, containing a copious vocabulary of English words and expressions, with the 

pronunciation according to Walker. 

THE WHOLE PRECEDED BY 

A PRACTICAL AND COMPREHENSIVE SYSTEM OF FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 

BY GABRIEL SURENJVE, F. A. S. E 
French Teacher in Edinburgh; Corresponding Member of the French Grammatical Society of 
Paris; Lecturer on Military History in the Scottish Naval and Military Academy ; and author 
of several works on Education. 

Reprinted from a duplicate cast of the stereotype plates of the last Edinburgh edition. One 
stout volume, 12mo., of nearly 900 pages. Price $1 50. 

This new Pronouncing French Dictionary will be found to be the most complete that has yet 
appeared. It is admirably adapted for the purposes of education, as well as reference for the 
French scholar. Although convenient sized, and sold at a low price, it contains every word in 
use in the language. 

The Preface of the Author (here inserted) explains more fully the nature of the compilation. 
AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 

" No French Pronouncing Dictionary having as yet appeared in the English field of French 
Education, the public ate now presented with one, the nature and compass of which will give an 
idea of the numerous and laborious investigations made by the Author, to render the present 
work useful and acceptable. 

" It is now upwards of six years since this work was undertaken, and the resolution of bring- 
ing it to light, arose from a diversity of opinion in Pronunciation, which lie discovered long ago 
in the various Dictionaries and Grammars made use of by him in preparing his former course ef 
Lectuies on Frencli and English Comparative Philology. 

" In the course of his labors, had the Author found but little difference among French writers, 
probably no criticism would have appeared in the present woik ; but as he went along, his atten- 
tion was arrested by so many opposite views in the mode of sounding letters and words, that 
nothing short of a full investigation could satisfy him. The result of his investigations is em- 
bodied in the Dictionary, and hence ihe origin of the critical remarks with which it abounds: the 
nature and extent of which, of themselves, would form a volume conveying much solid instruc- 
tion's well as offering a sad picture of th" uncertainties of French Pronunciation, of which 
nine tenths perhaps of the Author's countrymen ;ire not aware. Even upon the mere sounds of 
oi, there are many conflicting opinions, and the vacillating pen of Laudais, the last writer upon 
Parisian pronuncialion, by whom ni is represented sometimes by oa, and sometimes by ffi, has in- 
creased the perplexity in no small degree. 

" The method employed by the Author for representing the sounds of words, is intended to 
meet the English eye ; and he has been careful to make use of none but genuine French letters, 
that the reader may not be deceived, nor induced to follow a vicious system of articulation. 

" As to the pronunciation of Foreign Historical and Geographical names, it is laid down in 
the same manner, as if a Frenchman at Paris were reading aloud ; in this case nothing would be 
left to him but to Frenchify every proper name, with the exception of a few living Authors. 

"In ending this part of he Preface, it is of importance to observe that no syllable in this work 
is invested with the syliabical accent, because, as yet, excepting two or three Grammarians along 
with the Author, no writer in France, nor even the Academy itself, has thought proper to enforce 
this part of delivery, how unfortunately neglected. 

'' The Phraseology, forming the second essential part of this Dictionary, is based on that of 
the Academy, the sole and legitimate authority in France ; and every effort of the Author has 
been so directed, as to render it both copious and practical With this view, an improved method 
of elucidating new meanings, by employing parentheses, has been introduced, and it is hoped that 
the utility and benefits resulting from this improvement will not fail to be duly appreciated. 

"Another novelty to which the Author may lay claim, is the placing of Historical and Geo- 
graphical names below each page : and, by this arrangement the facility of being acquainted 
with their definition and pronunciation at a single glance, will be found of no small advantage. 
As to the English or second part of this Dictionary, the reader will find it to consist of a copious 
vocabulary of terms, with their pronunciation, according io the system of VValker. The various 
meanings of the words are translated into French ; and when the expressions happen to be sub- 
stantives, the French gender is pointed out by means of proper signs. 

" Lastly, that competent judges may be aware of thea uthoritu s on which the pronunciation 
and critical remarks pervading this Dictionary are founded, the titles and dates of the works 
which have been consulted, with brief reflections on their professed object, will be found in the 
Introduction following the Preface. 



D. Applcton Sf Company' s Educational Publications. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE 
GERMAN LANGUAGE. 

Reprinted from the Frankfort edition, to which is added a Systematic Outline of the different 
Parts of Speech, their Inflection and Use, vvitii full Paradigms, and a complete listof the Irreg- 
ular Verbs. By George Adler, A. B., of the University of the City of New- York. One 
handsome I2mo. volume. $1 50. 
Ollendorff's New Methodof Learning to Read, Write and Speak the German Lan- 
guage, has had an ex ensive circulation in England, and its demand in this country also has con- 
stantly been increasing of late. Nor is its popularity undeserved ; for it supplies a deficiency 
which has been long and deeply felt by all those who have engaged ,n either teaching or learning 
the German. 

The German has hitherto been treated too mnch like a dead language ; and hence many, dis- 
gusted with the cumbrous terminology and crabbed rules which in the very outset met their eye, 
have given up the acquisition of the language in despair. Ollendorff has completely remedied 
this evil. Beginning with the simplest phrases, he gradually introduces every principle of Gram- 
mar ; and he does it by interblending the rules with such copious exercises and idiomatic expres- 
sions, that by a few months diligent application, and under the gu. dance of a skilful instructor, 
eny one may acquire every thing that is essential to enable him to read, to write, and to converse 
in the language. 

In a separate volume, uniform with the Grammar, 

A KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 

Price 75 cents. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE 
FRENCH LANGUAGE. 

With an Appendix, containing the Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and full Paradigms of the 
Regular and Irregular, Auxiliary, Reflective, and Impersonal Verbs. By J. L. Jewett. One 
volume 19mo. $1 50. 

The plan pursued in teaching the French is substantially the same with that developed in 
the German Method. Avoiding~t.be exclusively didactic character of the older treatises on the 
one hand, and the tedious prolixity of detail which encumbers modern systems on the other, Ol- 
lendorff combines and thoroughly teaches at once both the theory and practice of the language. 
The student who puisues his method will therefore be relieved from the ap-prehension of either 
forgetting his rules before practice has grounded him in their principles, or of learning sentences 
by rote which he cannot analyze. Speaking and writing French, which in other systems is de- 
layed until the learner is presumed >o be master of Etymology and Syntax, and consequently is 
seldom acquired, by this method is commenced with the first lesson, continued throughout, and 
made the efficient means of acquiring almost imperceptibly, a thorough knowledge of grammar; 
and this without diverting the learner's attention for a moment from the language itself, with 
which he is naturally most desirous nf becoming familiar. 

The text of Ollendorff, carefully revised and corrected, is given in the present edition without 
abridgment. To this the American editor has added an Appendix, coniaining the Cardinal and 
Ordinal Numbers, and full conjugation of all the Verbs. The work is thus rendered complete, 
and the necessity of consulting other treatises is wholly obviated. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE 
ITALIAN LANGUAGE. 

WITH ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS, 
By Felix Forresti, Prof, of the Italian Language in Columbia College, New- York City. 

One volume, l2mo. 
M. Ollendorff's System, applied to the study of the Italian Language, possesses all the advan- 
tages of his method of learning the G. rman and French, and will undoubtedly, as its merits be- 
come known, take the place of all other Grumrnars. 



COMPLETE TEXT-BOOK OF HISTORY. 

D. APPLETON & CO. HAVE JUST PUBLISHED, 

A MANUAL 

OP 

ANCIENT AND MODERN HISTORY. 

COMPRISING 
I. 

Containing the Political History, Geographical Position, and Social State of the Principal Na- 
tions of Antiquity, carefully revised from the ancient writers, and illustrated 
by the discoveries of Modern Scholars and Travellers. 

II. 

Containing the Rise and Progress of the Principal European Nations, their Political History, and 

the changes in their Social Condition, with a History, of 

the Colonies founded by Europeans. 

BY W. COOKS TAY&OB., S.2.. D n 

Of Trinity College, Dublin. 
Revised, with an Additional Chapter on the United States, 

BY £!. S. HENRY, D. D., 

Professor of History in the University of New- York 
One handsome volume 8vo. of upwards of 700 pages. $2 25 

*** For the convenience of Students as a text book, the Ancient or Modern portions can be 
had separately bound. 

The Ancient History division comprises Eighteen Chapters, which include the general out- 
lines of the History of Egypt — the Ethiopians — Babylonia and Assyria — Western Asia — Palestine 
— the Empire of the Medes and Persians — Phenician Colonies in Northern Africa — Foundation 
and History of the Grecian States — Greece — the Macedonian Kingdom and Empire — the Statei 
that arose from the Dismemberment of the Macedonian Empire — Ancient Italy — Sicily-— the Ro- 
man Republic — Geographical and Political Condition of the Roman Empire — History of the Ro- 
man Empire— and India — with an Appendix of important illustrative articles. 

This portion is one of the best Compends of Ancient History that ever yet has: appeared. It 
contains a complete text for the collegiate lecturer ; and is an essential hand-book for the stulent 
who is desirous to become acquainted with all that is memorable in general secular archaeology. 

The Modern History portion is divided into Fourteen Chapters, on the following general 
•objects : — Consequences of the Fall of the Western Empire— Rise and Establishment of the 
Saracenic Power — Restoration of the Western Empire— Growth of the Papal Power — Revival oi 
Literature — Progress of Civilization and Invention— Reformation, and Commencement of the 
States System in Europe — .ugnstan Ages of England and France — Mercantile and Colonial Sys- 
tem — Age of Revolutions— French Empire — History of the Peace — Colonization — China — the 
iows-with Chronological and Historical Tables and other Indexes. Dr. Henry has appended a 
ttew cnapter on the History of the United States. 

This Manual of Modern History, by Mr. Taylor, is vhe most valuable and instructive work 
seneejuing tho general subjects which it comprehends, that can be found in the vruole department 
tf historical literature. 



TEXT BOOK FOR COLLEGES AND SCHOOLS. 



Appleton fy Co. have recently published the third edition 

GENERAL 

HISTORY OF CIVILIZATION 

IN EUROPE, 

From the Fall oi the Roman Empire to the French Revolution. 

By M.GUIZOT, 

Late Professor of History, now Prime Minister of France. 

With occasional Notes by C. S. Henry, D.D., Professor of Philosophy ana 

History in the University of the City of New-York. One volume 

12mo. Price $ 1 00. 

" We hail with pleasure the republication of this able work. It is terse and full, and 
adverts to the most interesting topic in the social relations of mankind, the progressive 
improvement of the European nations from the overthrow of the Roman Empire by the 
Goths, and Huns, and Vandals, in the Fifth Century. 

" The work of M. Guizot comprehends a Course of Lectures which he delivered, and 
which contain the spirit of Modern History, all condensed into a focus, to illuminate one 
most impressive feature in the annals of the world. A concise view of the chief themes 
will accurately unfold the importance of this volume. 

* The introductory lecture is devoted to a discussion of the general subject in its prin- 
ciples ; which is followed by the application of them to the condition of European society. 

" M. Guizot next proceeds to develop the deranged state of the kingdoms of Europe, 
after the subversion of the Roman power, and the subdivision of the ancient empire into 
distinct sovereignties ; which is followed by a survey of the feudal system. The various 
changes and civil revolutions of the people with the crusades, the conflicts between the 
nierarchical supremacy, and the monarchical and aristocratical authorities also, are de- 
veloped with the fluctuations of society, through their combined tumultuous collisions; 
until the invention of printing, and the maritime discoveries of the fifteenth century, with 
the Reformation, produced a convulsion, whose mighty workings still are exhibited, and 
the rich fruits of which constantly become more plentiful and fragrant. 

" The two lectures which close the series, are devoted to the English revolution of the 
seventeenth, and the French revolution of the eighteenth century. 

" There are two features in M. Guizot's lectures which are as attractive as they are 
novel. One is, the lofty moral and religious principles which he inculcates. We doubt 
that very few professors of history in our own country, in their prelections, among then 
students, within an American College, would have commingled such a continuous stream 
»f the best ethics, with a subject avowedly secular, as M. Guizot has incorporated with 
his lectures addressed to the Parisian infidels. 

"Another is, the predominant influence which he has attributed to Christianity, ia 
effecting the progressive melioration of European society. 

" To the friends of religious freedom especially M. Guizot's Lectures on Civilization 
are a most acceptable present ; because they are not the result of a controvertist's en 
deavours to sustain his own opinions in a polemical conflict with an adversary, but the 
deliberate judgment of an impartial observer, who has embodied his decisions in 
cidentally, while discussing another topic." — JV*. Y. American. 

PREPARING TOR PUBLICATION", 

COMPLETE HISTORY OF MODERN CIVILIZATION ; 

From the Fall of the Roman Empire until the Year 1789. With com- 
plete Chronological and Historical Tables. Translated from the French 
of M. Guizot. 

This volume is the second part of M. Guizot's " Course of Modern History," in thirty 
three Lectures, and is an erudite and luminous development of the principal changes, 
events, derangements, and organization of the modern European nations after the fall 
of the Roman Empire, until they assumed their present chief characteristics. It, form* 
a complete filling up, in minute details, of the former work, and is precisely adapted to 
unfold the origin, attributes, and operations of the political systems connected with feu 
daJism, and the subsequent revolutions t> f the kingdoms of Eurors. 



D. Appieton Sf Co. have just published 

LECTURES 
MODERN °HISTORY. 

BY 

THOMAS ARNOLD, D.D., 

Author of " History of Rome." etc., etc. 
With an Introduction and Notes by Henry Reed, Professor of English 
Literature in the University of Pennsylvania. One handsome volume 
12mo. $1 25. 

This volume contains the first Lectures which were delivered by Dr. Arnold after his 
appointment as Regius Professor of History in the university of Oxford. The series o( 
Lectures must be considered merely as introductory to the expanded views and re 
searches which the author would have developed had h's life been prolonged. In the 
primary lecture which was delivered when he entered upon his official duty, the lecturer 
presented his definition of history with a summary of the dutie ^nnertaining to the pro- 
fessor of it. Appropriate, dignified and perspicuous, it exhibits u^.h originality and 
power in a high degree, commingled with felicitous illustrations of the characteristics, 
effects, and value of historical literature. — Four lectures follow on the study of history, 
rich in the prominent topics of inquiry concerning national prosperity — among which, 
■with masterly eloquence and delineations he adverts to the political economy, the re- 
ligious controversies, the national wars, and the geographical relations of countries. — 
The next three lectures contain a survey of European history, particularly examining 
the revolutions in ecclesiastical affairs, and the continuous struggles to cast off the 
despotic yoke, and to gain and establish religious and civil freedom.— The eighth lecture 
displays the nature of that historical testimony which claims and merits credence. In 
this disquisition the author exhibits in his truth and forcefulness the law of evidence 
and the method of its application in investigating historical facts.— The course of Lec- 
tures is an elegant memorial of the author whose unquenchable philanthropy and un 
tiring zeal in behalf of the best interests of mankind render his decease the subject 01 
regret to the civilized world. 

WILL SHORTLY PUBLISH 

HISTORY 

ROMAN REP U B L I O . 

BY 

M . MICHELET, 

Professor of History in the University of France, Author of " The 
History of France," etc., etc. 

" M. Michelet. in his history of the Roman Republic, first introduces the reader to the 
Ancient Geography of Italy ; then by giving an excellent picture of the present state of 
Rome and the surrounding country, full of grand ruins, he excites in the reader the desire 
to investigate the ancient history of this wonderful land. He next imparts the results of 
the latest investigations, entire, deeply studied and clearly arranged, and saves the un- 
educated reader the trouble of investigating the sources, while he gives to the more edu- 
cated mind an impetus to study the literature from which he gives very accurate quo- 
tations in his notes. He describes the peculiarities and the life of the Roman people in 
a masterly manner, and he fascinates every reader, by the brilliant clearness and vivid 
freshness of his style, while he shows himself a good historian, by the justness -ind 
impartiality with which he relates and philosophizes." 

The Westminster Review observes : " His ' Histoire Romaine' is not only the history 
ol institutions and ideas, as in Niebuhr, but also by virtue of the vast interpretative faculty 
of imagination, places the men of Rome, with their creeds and asoirations, vividly before 
you." 



V. Appleton Sf Co. have recently published 

HISTORY OF GERMANY, 

FROM THE EARLIEST PERIOD TO THE PRESENT TIME. 



FREDERICK KOHLRAUSCH, 

Chief of the Board of Education for the Kingdom of Hanover, and 
late Professor of History in the Polytechnic School. 

Translated from the last German edition, 

By JAMES D. HAAS. 

One elegant 8vo. volume, of 500 pages, with complete Index, $1 50. 

translator's preface. 

The high merits and distinguished character of the original German Work, by Pro- 
fessor Kohlrausch, of which this is a translation, have long been acknowledged. A 
work which, during a period of thirty years, has enjoyed so much popularity as to have 
gone through several editions, embracing a circulation of many thousand copies ; a 
production which has extended and established its good repute, even in its original form 
far beyond its native clime, to England, France, Belgium, Italy, America, &c. (in some 
of which countries it has been r< printed in German,) and has thus become a standard 
bo"k of reference in almost all th> Universities and principal public as well as private 
educational Institutions. Such a p iblication possesses ample testimony proving it able to 
create a lasting interest, and confirm ng its claims to consideration and esteem. 

The aim of the distmguisheu author, in this valuable history, is thus simply but dis- 
tinctly expressed by himself: " My sole object," he says, " has been to produce a suc- 
cinct and connected development of the vivid and eventful course of our country's his- 
tory, written in a style calculated to excite the interest and sympathy of my readers, 
and of such especially who, not seeking to enier upon a very profound study of the sources 
and more elaborate works connected with the annals of our empire, are nevertheless 
anxious to have presented to them the means of acquiring an accurate knowledge of 
the records of our Fatherland, in such a form as to leave upon the mind and heart an 
enduring, indelible impression." 

That our industrious historian has atta ; ned his object, the intelligent reader will find 
in the interest excited, the clear views ii.parted, and the deep impression effected by 
his animated portrayals of Imlh events and individuals. This has been the original and 
acknowledged characteristic of Herr Kohlrausch's work throughout its entire existence 
but in the new edition, from which this translation has been rendered, he has endeavour- 
ed to make it as perfect as possible, both in matter and style, and besides this has en 
riched it with many valuable notes not contained in the former editions : thus making it 
in reality a concise, yet, in every respect, a complete history of Germany. 

It is important to remark, that Professor Kohlrausch is a Protestant, and one distin 
guished not less for his freedom from prejudice and impartiality, than for the comprehen- 
siveness of his views and the high tone of his philosophy. The general adoption of the wcrk 
— alike by Protestant and Romanist — is proof sufficiently convincing of the impartiality ol 
his statements, and of the justice of his reflections and sentiments. 



•' Aftei England, no country has stronger claims upon the attention of Americans then 
Germany Its institutions, language, literature and national character combine to ren- 
der its history highly interesting. The place it has occupied among nations for 1000 
years— that is, ever since the era of Charlemagne— has been, on the whole, secona to 
none in importance Some of the greatest inventions — among them gunpowder and the 
art of printing — owe their origin to the Germans. The literature of Germany is now 
orciting a marked influence over our own, and we can never forget that Germany is the 
cradle of the Reformation. 

" Notwithstanding all these claims upon our attention, it is not to be denied that the 
history of Germany has been very little known among us. Few persons except the highly 
llucated have more than a very meagre knowledge of the outlines of German history. 

" The publication of Kohlrausch's History, which is a standard work at home, comes )a 
very opportunely to supply the dearth of information on this interesting topic. It fur 
nishes a most valuable compend ; and will tend to spread in our country a knowledge 
«<■ one of the most refined as well as most learned of modern nations. Few of the hi»- 
torcul works of our day are more worthy of the public patronage— Evening , 



D. Appleton fy Co's Publications. 



RUDIMENTAL LESSONS IN MUSIC; 

CONTAINING THE PRIMARY INSTRUCTION REQUISITE FOR ALL BEGINNERS 
IN THE ART, WHETHER VOCAL OR INSTUMENTAL. 

By JAMES F. WARNER, 

Translator of 11 Weber's Theory of Musical Composition " " Kiibler's Anleitung 

zum Gesang-Unterrichtc," [Boston Academy's Manual,] fyc, fyc. 

One vol., 18mo. Cloth, 50 cents. 

This little work is a compendious and ample display of the scientific principles and artistical 
practice of Music, developed in fifteen chapters on the tones, lime, accent, intervals, scales, 
keys, harmony, style, and enunciation of musical sounds. These Rudimental Lessons comprise 
all that is necessary to render an Amateur Student proficient in the Theory of Music, so as to 
qualify him by efficient endeavors correctly to read music at sight. It will be found an excel- 
lent book of instruction for singing schools. 

We do not know how we can do a more substantial service to teachers and scholars in music, 
vocal or instrumental, than by urging them to adopt this volume as a class book. It is full and 
complete on every topic connected with the subject, clear in its arrangement, and concise in ex- 
pression. The illustrations are numerous and ingenious, and must prove very valuable aids to 
the learner, in comprehending the subject, as well as to the teacher in imparling instruction. 

THE 

PRIMARY NOTE READER, 



FIRST STEPS IN SINGING AT SIGHT. 

By JAMES F. WARNER, 

Author of '' Rudimental Lessons in Music," etc. 

One vol., 12mo. 25 cents. 

This summary of musical exercises is designed as a Supplement to the author's ''Rudimental 

Lessons in Music." The two works taken together are intended to furnish the beginner in Vocal 

Music with a complete set of books adapted to his purpose. 



MYTHOLOGY 

OF 

ANCIENT GREECE AND ITALY, 

FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS. 

By THOMAS KEIGHTLY, 
Author of the Histories of " England,'' "Rome," Greece," fyc. 
One vol. 18mo., numerous Wood Cuts. Price 44 cents. 
I have read wiih real pleasure a little volume published l.y D. Appleion & Co., on the My- 
thology of Ancient Greece and Italy, and esteem it one of the very best elementary works of the 
kind ever issued from the American press. It is extremely clear and concise in the narrative, 
divested of unnecessary explanations, and what is equally worthy of remark, it is free from all 
those indelicate allusions which are so objectionable to the larger works on the same subject. 
The illusrta'ions are well chosen, and add in no smail degree to the value of the book. It is ad- 
mirably well adapted for schools, and we hope soon to see it generally introduced. 

NORTON THAYER, Classical Teacher, N. York City 



EDUCATIONAL WORKS 



D. Appleton Sf Co. 
Are preparing for Publication, 

A SPEAKER FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS ; 

Selected from classical Greek, Latin, Italian. Frf nch, and English writers ; Demosthenes, 

Thucydides, Homer, Sophocles, Cicero, Livy, Virgil, Lucretius, 

Shakspeare, Milton, Burke, Bacon, &c. 

By the Rev. VV. SEWELL, B. D., 

Author of" Christian Morals, " Christian Politics, etc. etc. With additions 

By HENRY REED, M.A. 

Professor of English Literature in the University of Pennsylvania. 

DOEDERLIN'S 

HAND-BOOK OF LATIN SYNONYMES, 

Translated by the Rev. H. H. JlRJYOLD, B. A., 

With additions and revisions by the American Editor. One volume, ]2mo. 

ENGLISH SYNONYMES, 

Classified and Explained, with Practical Exercises. 

By G. F. GRAHAM, 

Author of " Helps to English Grammar," etc. Edited, with illustrative authorities, 

By HENRY REED, 
Professor of English Literature, in the University of Pennsylvania. One vol. 12mo. 

A NEW ENGLISH READER, 

By the Rev. HEJYRY MAJYDEVILLE, 

Professor in Hamilton College, New York State. One vol. 12mo. 

A NEW GERMAN READER, 

On the Basis of 
OLLENDORFF'S GERMAN GRAMMAR, 
One vol. 12010. 

A NEW GERMAN AND ENGLISH 

AND 

ENGLISH AND GERMAN 

DICTIONARY. 

One vol. large 8vo. 

PRIMARY LESSONS, 

OR 

CHILD'S FIRST BOOK, 

By ALBERT D. WEIGHT, 
Author of " Analytical Orthography," Phonological Chart, &c. 



x x ' .'. 



,V 



2 0' 



^ 1 







v^^^'yyA'^ ^ 







\^ : 




-<w^ 



,^'% '.IJ^BV. X^^' 




iV c 



S vT 



■A > 



^ ^ ^- 




1 ^ 



**- ^ ^ 



\°°*. 



%$ 















,x - ++ V* 



V 




00' 



\' N x \ 



'* "■ 



AX 



x^% 



•V s % 












6 * **<* 



• 






%^' 






%. 

V 













W ; ^s' 



^./ ? 



**% 



vV </V 



o '/ 



1 













*°" *?&&.; .? '*,. 






< ' " / Deacidified using the Bookkeeper prooa 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide I 
Treatment Date: July 2006 



$% 



PreservationTechnologi 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPE 

1 1 1 Thomson Pai 
Cranberry Towns 
,724)779-2111 
■>- A' 



i WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERV/ 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 



^v : ./ 



.# »C S ^\ 



,0 c. 






,^'% 



-^ 



.\ 






OO 1 









^ % 






,*^ 



\ 



o ' ^l^S % 



"+, <? 



* O -0' v ' 



X 



a"» v <? ft « •#> . •' ,v> 



vOo > 











WW 

- W ,/^ 




*, "**, I* o , 



